Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 184

CONTENTS

ELECTRICITY
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
1: Electronic Components and Circuits
2: Properties of Capacitors and Inductors
3: Electrical Properties of Skin
‘ To open a chapter, click
on the chapter name.

‘
Chapter 4: Electrical Stimulation of Nerve and Muscle To turn pages within a
Chapter 5: Rectification and Amplification chapter, use the keyboard
arrow keys.

FIELDS
‘
To navigate within a chapter,
Chapter 6: Electric and Magnetic Fields use the navigation buttons
Chapter 7: Therapeutic Fields: Shortwave Diathermy on each page.
Chapter 8: Non-Diathermic Fields

WAVES
Chapter 9: Sound and Electromagnetic Waves
Chapter 10: Therapeutic Waves: Ultrasound
Chapter 11: Electromagnetic Waves for Therapy

GENERAL
Chapter 12: Dosage and Safety Considerations
Chapter 13: Electrical Safety
Appendices: Quantities, Units and Prefixes
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 1

1 Electronic Components and Circuits


Though the use of electricity in a medical context is no recent development. the last
several decades have seen an unparalleled growth in electronic technology and its
application in medicine. Sophisticated electronic apparatus is now as commonplace in Although the central theme of
the hospital and clinical setting as it previously was in the research laboratory. It is this chapter is electronic
evident that all health professionals must become more and more accustomed to the components and hardware,
use of electronic instrumentation and its proper place in the practice of their profession. most of the concepts are
The physiotherapist makes use of such apparatus for a variety of diagnostic procedures needed to understand the
and treatments, collectively described by the terms electrodiagnosis and electrotherapy. relevant physiology and
electrotherapy covered in
The aim here is to provide a physical basis for electrodiagnosis and electrotherapy. We later chapters.
begin by discussing the 'nuts and bolts' of electronic apparatus, the basic components
which go to make up an electronic circuit.

Electronic circuits and electronic components owe their existence to the fact that the
Apart from conductors
everyday materials with which we are familiar have quite dissimilar electrical properties. and insulators there is
The vast majority of materials can be readily categorized as belonging to one of two a third, smaller group
groups: either conductors or insulators. First let us consider conductors and insulators comprised of materials
and some additional concepts which are fundamental to an understanding of electricity. displaying intermediate
conduction properties: this
SOME FUNDAMENTALS group includes the
semiconductors which form
Conductors are familiar to us in everyday life: the filament of a light bulb, the copper wire the basis of modern
connected to car batteries and copper wire in the cables leading to most electrical electronics technology. We
appliances are a few examples. If we picture atoms as consisting of a positively will talk more about
charged nucleus together with electron 'shells' surrounding the nucleus then the atoms semiconductors in chapter
of conductors have a characteristic feature. two.

Good conductors (iron, copper and other metals are examples) share the common
feature that the outermost electrons of the atoms are only loosely bound to the nucleus.
For this reason they can readily transmit electrons. A good way to picture this is to

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 2

imagine a fairly rigid lattice of atomic nuclei with a sea of electrons


contained within the boundaries of the piece of metal.
An electron entering one end of a length of wire causes a 'ripple in the sea
of electrons' and, a split second later, an electron is ejected from the other
end.

A flow of charges through any material is what we call an electric current


and materials which readily transmit charges are termed conductors.
The standard unit of current flow in the systeme internationale (Sl) is the
ampere (abbreviated amp and given the symbol A). The current in
amperes is a measure of the quantity of charge flowing through a
conductor each second. The unit is named after the noted French physicist
André Marie Ampère.

Insulators have their electrons tightly bound in their shells so that the
process of conduction described above can not take place under normal
conditions. Plastics and ceramics are good insulators; thus we can use
copper wires coated in plastic for the power leads to electric toasters, jugs,
TV sets and so on. The telegraph poles in the street have the wires
fastened not to the wood but around small white ceramic insulators. a metal consists of a rigid and
regular, crystalline array of metal ions
In order to cause a flow of current through a conductor we need a device ( ). A 'sea' or cloud of electrons ( )
which will produce an excess of electrons at one end of a wire and a fills the spaces between the ions.
deficiency at the other: such a device is a source of electrical potential
energy and is said to produce a potential difference. A typical example of
one of these devices is the battery found in a torch or transistor radio. The
two terminals of a battery are at a different electrical potential - that is, there
is a potential difference between the terminals. If a conductor is connected
between the terminals electrons move from the terminal at a high potential
to that at low potential.

The Sl unit of potential difference is the volt (symbol V). Often the terms
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 3

potential difference and voltage are used interchangeably.


It is important to clearly understand the difference between voltage and current. Using Just as we can have a
the analogy with water in pipes we can liken voltage to the water pressure and current
substantial pressure in the
to the volume rate of flow of water.
water mains without any flow
If we connect a piece of material between the terminals of a battery the amount of of water through a tap, so we
current flow will depend on the battery voltage and the resistance to current flow which can have a substantial
the material offers. Good conductors offer little resistance to current flow while potential difference without
insulators offer substantial resistance. The Sl unit of resistance is the ohm any flow of current.
(abbreviated Ω). We say something has a resistance of one ohm when a potential
difference of one volt produces a current of one amp through it. A good conductor such
as a metre length of household mains wire would have a resistance measured in
milliohms while a good insulator, a block of ceramic, would have a resistance of
several thousand megohms. Resistance values used in electronic circuits are
typically measured in ohms (Ω), kilohms (kΩ) or megohms (MΩ).

1 kΩ = 103 Ω = 1000 Ω 1 MΩ = 106 Ω = 1 000 000 Ω

COMPONENTS
An electronic device such as a radio, TV set or CD player can be very
complex but the complexity lies in the arrangement and total number of
components. When we examine a typical circuit we find only a few
different kinds of components.

Resistors are the most common circuit components: they come in a


variety of shapes and sizes and usually have their values coded in the
form of three or four coloured stripes on the body. High power resistors
are larger and usually have the resistance and power rating stamped on
the body. Rheostats and potentiometers are variable resistors having
two or three terminals respectively.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 4

Capacitors come in a greater range of sizes and shapes than resistors but
can readily be distinguished with a little practice.

fixed value capacitors

They consist of two metal plates (usually aluminium) and an insulator. The
insulator may be air (in the case of variable capacitors), mica or a plastic film.
The different kinds of capacitor are named after the insulator used, thus we
have mica capacitors, polyester capacitors, ceramic capacitors and so on.
Typical examples of fixed value capacitors are shown, together with a variable
capacitor such as might be used in the tuning section of a
radio.

For typical values of capacitance large areas of metal are


involved and it is convenient to save space by making the
plates of thin aluminium foil and rolling them into a cylinder.
Thus a tubular capacitor has the internal construction
shown.
We will return to discuss what a capacitor does in the next
chapter.

The unit of capacitance is the farad (F) but the values found
in typical circuits are measured in microfarads (µF),
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 5

nanofarads (nF) or picofarads (pF).

1 1 1
1 µF = F = 10-6 F 1 nF = µF = 10-9 F 1 pF = µF = 10-12 F
1 000 000 1 000 1 000 000

Electrolytic capacitors are polarized; that is, they have definite positive and negative
terminals and can only be connected one way around in a circuit. Ordinary capacitors
(mica, polyester, etc.) are non-polarized and can be connected either way around.
Inductors and transformers form our third category of components. An inductor is
simply a coil of wire: the wire may be wound on various kinds of core, depending on
the specific role for which it is intended. An example is shown.
The unit of inductance is the henry (H). You will also see the terms millihenry (mH)
and microhenry (µH) used frequently.

1 1
1 mH = H = 10-3 H 1 µH = mH = 10-6 H
1000 1000

When two inductors are wound on the same core in close proximity or
overlapping we have a transformer.

Valves, Transistors and Diodes are the 'workhorses' of any electronic


circuit, the devices which have permitted the development of long distance
voice communication, radio and television, computers and space
exploration, guided missiles and the reproduction of music to name a few of
the more obvious applications.
Today valves are seldom used except for special applications: they are
bulky and inefficient and have largely been superseded by transistors, their
semiconductor equivalents. The transistor performs much the same job as
a valve but is physically much smaller.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 6

Most electronic equipment today uses Integrated Circuits


(IC's), small devices having 8 or more pins and which contain
complete circuits having many transistors, diodes, resistors
and capacitors fabricated directly in a single package. The
pins are used for access to various points in the circuit so that
the designer can tailor the circuit to specific requirements by
connection to external components. Integrated circuits have
permitted a further reduction in the physical size of complex
circuits comparable to the reduction that was achieved by the
replacement of valve circuitry with transistors. The pocket
calculator, desktop computer and space satellites have all
been made possible by the miniaturization permitted with
integrated circuits.

ClRCUITS
The electronic components we have met so far are typically
found with a complex maze of interconnections between them.
The particular way in which they are connected defines a
circuit and the form that the circuit takes will depend on the job
it is designed to do. If we consider, for example, a radio, the
job it has to perform is exceedingly complex. It must pick up
radio transmissions, convert the radio waves to electrical
signals, amplify them and convert them to audible sound
waves. Not only that but it must also be capable of selecting a
particular frequency of radio wave (the one from the radio
station you wish to tune-in on) and ignoring the remainder.
Needless to say, the circuitry required to perform these tasks
is very complex.

In the next section we will consider extremely simple circuits in


order to examine the characteristic behaviour of some of the
components discussed so far. But first a few words on
circuits themselves and their physical construction.
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 7

The earliest circuits, those found for example in a valve radio receiver, were made up
of a large number of bulky components - the transformer, valves, etc., and the circuit
interconnections reflected this bulkiness. Large components such as the transformer
were bolted to a metal frame or chassis along with sockets for the valves, and the
circuit was built-up by interconnecting with smaller components (resistors and
capacitors) and lengths of wire.
With the advent of the transistor and the consequent trend to miniaturization which this
permitted, it was found to be more convenient and simpler to replace most of the
wiring with copper strips firmly attached to an insulating board having holes drilled in
appropriate places. All of the miniature components (transistors, resistors,
capacitors) could then be mounted on the board and soldered to the copper
conductors. Only a limited number of bulky components (transformer, volume control
and speaker in a mains-powered radio) need then to be mounted on a chassis or
casing.
Circuits assembled on these printed circuit hoards can be rapidly mass produced
and easily put together. Consequently they are used almost exclusively by
manufacturers. When integrated circuits are used rather than transistors a further
reduction in size is achieved. The printed circuit boards can be made smaller as the
l.C.'s themselves are small and relatively few external components are required.
SIMPLE CIRCUITS WITH RESISTORS
Perhaps the simplest kind of circuit which can be constructed comprises a battery (a
source of electrical energy) and a single electrical component such as a resistor or a
torch globe. First consider the simple circuit arrangement shown in figure 1.1.
On the left is a small lamp (torch globe) connected by means of wires to a dry cell
(battery). On the right is the circuit diagram of the arrangement: note the circuit
symbols used for the lamp and dry cell. When connected this way current will flow
from one terminal of the battery, through the lamp and back to the opposite terminal.
It is common convention to say that current flows from the positive terminal of the
battery to the negative terminal; although this is the opposite direction to the flow of

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 8

electrons. The difference between reality and convention is not important as it has no
effect on the magnitudes of currents and voltages in a circuit.
Under normal circumstances
the flow of current through the
lamp will cause it to glow - the
normal purpose of such a
circuit. If a break occurs in the
wire for example, or the wire is
not secured to the battery,
current will not flow and we
have an open circuit. If the wire
connected to one terminal of
the lamp comes loose and
touches the other wire, current
can flow directly through the
wires and bypass the lamp -
this condition is known as a
short circuit. The switch on a Figure 1.1
torch is just a means of A very simple circuit and its
introducing an open circuit representation using a circuit
condition at will: preventing the flow of current and thus conserving the electrical diagram
energy stored in the battery.
Going one step further than the circuit shown in figure 1.1 we may add a resistor to
produce the circuits shown in figure 1.2. Note the circuit symbol (zig-zag line) for a
resistor.

Figure 1.2(a) shows the resistor in series with the lamp, i.e. the resistor and lamp are
connected end to end so that current must flow through both the lamp and the
resistor. In 1.2(b) the resistor is connected in parallel with the lamp so that some
current can flow through the lamp and some through the resistor. The resistor is thus
allowing part of the current to bypass the lamp and return to the opposite terminal of
the battery.
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 9

RESISTORS IN SERIES Figure 1.2


Two less simple circuits. (a) a
Two or more resistors may be connected in series or in parallel. When the
resistors are connected in series as in figure 1.3 the current must pass through series and (b) a parallel
each resistance in turn and the total resistance offered by the circuit is equal to the arrangement.
sum of the individual resistances.
In general for a circuit having n resistors connected in series the total resistance
of the circuit, R, is equal to the sum of the individual resistances i.e.

R = R1 + R2 + R3 ........ + Rn .... (1.1)

As mentioned previously, the current flowing is a measure of the rate of flow of


charges around the circuit and is measured in amperes, or amps for short. Since
there can be no accumulation of charges within a resistor the current flowing into
a certain resistor is equal to the current flowing out. Thus the same current must
flow through each resistor when they are connected in series.
Although the current in each resistor is the same, the potential difference across
each resistor in a series circuit is, in general, different. The sum of the potential
differences across the resistors is equal to the potential difference generated by Figure 1.3
the battery (the battery voltage). Resistors in series

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 10

RESISTORS IN PARALLEL
When a number of resistors are connected in parallel as in figure 1.4 the
current flowing in each resistor may be different. In this case the total
resistance of the circuit, R, is given by the equation

1 1 1 1
= + +
R R1 R2 R3

or more generally, where there are n resistors in parallel in a circuit

1 1 1 1 1
= + + ..... + .... (1.2)
R R1 R2 R3 Rn

Although the current in each resistor may be quite different, the voltage or Figure 1.4
potential difference across each resistor is the same and is equal to the Resistors in parallel
battery voltage. This must be so since the ends of each resistor are
connected directly to the terminals of the battery. The largest amount of
current will flow through the smallest resistance when resistors are
connected in parallel.

OHM'S LAW
The relationship between potential difference (V), resistance (R) and current (I )
through a resistor is summarized by Ohm's law which states that the current flowing
through a resistor is proportional to the potential difference across the resistor and is
inversely proportional to the resistance.

The equivalent mathematical expression of Ohm's law is


V
I = .... (1.3)
R
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 11

where I is the current in amperes, V is the potential difference in volts and R is the
resistance in ohms.
Example 1. If, in figure 1.3, R1 is 50 ohms, R2 is 100 ohms and R3 is 150 ohms then
the total resistance R is
R = 50 + 100 + 150 = 300 Ω

If these are connected to a 10 volt battery the current flow will be

V 10
I = = = 0.033 amps or 33 milliamps.
R 300

Here we have calculated the total current drawn from the battery which is equal to the
current flowing through each resistor. The battery gives a total potential difference of
10 volts across the combination of resistors. If we wish to calculate the potential
difference across each individual resistor we again use equation 1.3 but apply the
equation to each resistor in turn.

For example, for the 50 ohm resistor we know that

I = 0.033 amps and R = 50 Ω


V V
so I = becomes = 0.033 and hence V = 50 x 0.033 = 1.7 volts.
R R
For the 100 ohm resistor V = 100 x 0.033 = 3.3 volts

and for the 150 ohm resistor V = 150 x 0.033 = 5.0 volts.

The total potential difference across the combination of resistors is V = 1.7 + 3.3 +
5.0 = 10 volts as expected.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 12

Example 2. Now consider the same three resistors as in the previous


example connected in parallel to a 10 volt battery as in figure 1.4. The total
resistance, R, is now given by
1 1 1 1 6 3 2 11
= + + = + + =
R 50 100 150 300 300 300 300
300
so R = = 27 ohms
11
V 10
The total current is I = = = 0.37 amps
R 27

To calculate the current in each individual resistor we use the fact that the
potential difference across each resistor is the full 10 volts. Then for the 50
ohm resistor we have
V 10
I = = = 0.20 amps.
R 50
10
For the 100 ohm resistor I = = 0.10 amps
100
V 10
and for the 150 ohm resistor I = = = 0.07 amps
R 150
So the total current drawn from the battery is
I = 0.20 + 0.10 + 0.07 = 0.37 amps as calculated previously.
The calculations are made relatively simple by remembering that when
resistors are connected in series the current through each is the same and
when resistors are connected in parallel the potential difference across each
is the same.
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 13

POWER DISSIPATION IN RESISTORS


When electric current flows through a conductor, whether the conductor is a resistor,
copper wire, the filament of a light bulb or whatever, electrical energy is converted to
heat energy in the conductor. An extreme example of this is seen with a lamp - the
heat generated is so great that the filament wire glows brightly. The same heating
effect takes place, though to a lesser extent, in a resistor and clearly there will be a
limit to how much heat a resistor can generate per second before it starts glowing and
disintegrates or melts. The maximum rate at which a resistor can safely dissipate
electrical energy is called the power rating of the resistor and this depends on the size
and physical construction.

The actual rate of dissipation of electrical energy at any particular time is the power
dissipated. This depends on both the current flowing through the resistor and the
potential difference across it. The power (in watts) is equal to the product of current (in
amps) and potential difference (in volts).

If we denote power by the symbol P the relationship may be written


P = V.I .... (1.4)
This formula can be usefully used with Ohm's law to calculate the maximum values
for voltage or current for a particular resistor of known resistance and power rating. Starting with the expression
Alternatively if we know any two of the values of V, I or R for a given resistor, we can P = V.I and substituting V = I.R
calculate the power dissipated in the resistor using equation 1.4 or the two we have P = (I.R).I or P = I 2R
expressions obtained by solving equations 1.3 and 1.4. These are:
V2
P = .... (1.5)
Starting with the expression
R
P = V.I and substituting I = V/R
where we have eliminated I in solving the two expressions and 2
we have P = V.(V/R) or P = V
P = I2.R .... (1.6) R
where we have eliminated V.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 14

With these three alternative formulae for calculating power we would choose the
equation which gives the required answer with a minimum of calculations.

Consider the three resistors connected in series as in example 1 previously. If we


wish to calculate the power dissipated in each resistor we would first calculate the
current (which is the same for each resistor) and then use equation 1.6. In example 2
previously the resistors are in parallel and the potential difference is the same for
each resistor. Equation 1.5 is thus the choice for power calculation.
RESISTORS IN A SERIES/PARALLEL COMBINATION
The ideas we have considered previously can be applied to more complex circuits
where resistors are combined in a series/parallel arrangement. Figure 1.5 shows
one possible series/parallel combination.
To calculate the total resistance in this circuit we would first
need to calculate the resistance of R2 and R3 in parallel using
equation 1.2. The total resistance is obtained by adding this to
R 1 . This is because R 1 is in series with the parallel
combination of R2 and R3 so equation 1.1 applies.
To calculate voltages and currents in this circuit it is important to
visualize current flowing from the positive terminal of the battery,
through R1 and then through the combination of R2 and R3 .
The current flowing through R1 splits. Some goes through R2
and some through R3. The current though R2 plus the current
through R 3 must equal that through R1 since the moving
charges cannot disappear nor can new ones appear.
Another important idea is that current (charge) flows around the circuit, losing Figure 1.5
electrical potential energy in the process. Some energy is lost as charges flow Resistors in a series/parallel
through R1 . The remainder is lost as charges flow either through R2 or R3 . The arrangement
potential difference across R 2 is one-and-the-same as the potential difference
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 15

across R3. The potential difference across R1 plus that across the R2/R3 combination
must equal the battery voltage.

Example 3. If we have a resistor combination like that shown in


figure 1.5, with the resistance values and battery voltage are as
shown alongside:
(i) what is the current through each of the resistors?
(ii) do the currents calculated add-up i.e. is the current through
the 50 Ω resistor equal to the total current through the 100 Ω
and 200 Ω combination?
(iii) what is the potential difference across the 50 Ω resistor?
(iv) what is the power dissipated in the 100 Ω resistor?
Answers:
(i) First calculate the total resistance.
1 1 1 3 200
For the parallel combination, = + = so R = = 67 Ω
R 100 200 200 3
The total resistance is thus 67 + 50 = 117 Ω
V 10
The battery voltage is 10 V so the total current is I = = = 0.085 A
R 117
All of this current flows through the 50 Ω resistor so the current through it is 0.085 A
or 85 mA.
The potential difference across the 50 Ω resistor is V = I.R = 0.085 x 50 = 4.3 V,
which answers question iii above.
The potential difference across the 100 Ω/200 Ω parallel combination is 10 - 4.3 =
5.7 V.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 16

V 5.7
The current through the 100 Ω resistor is I = = = 0.057 A
R 100
V 5.7
The current through the 200 Ω resistor is I = = = 0.029 A
R 200
(ii) The total current through the 100 Ω/200 Ω parallel combination is 0.057 + 0.029
= 0.086 A which (allowing for rounding errors as we have used two-figure
accuracy) agrees with the value calculated for the 50 Ω resistor.
(iii) See above.
(iv) The power dissipated in the 100 Ω resistor can be calculated using either
equation 1.4 or 1.5 or 1.6 as we know the potential difference, current and
resistance. Using equation 1.4 we have P = V.I = 5.7 x 0.057 = 0.33 W.

AC AND THE MAINS SUPPLY


DC and AC

If we connect a battery to a lamp, as in figure 1.1 previously, current will flow


from one terminal of the battery, through the lamp and return to the opposite
terminal. Such a flow of current is termed direct current (DC) because the
flow is always in one direction. A graph of voltage against time or current
against time would look like figure 1.6.
DC is directly available from a battery and it is DC that we need to power
most electronic circuits.

The voltage available at the power points in the laboratory or home is not,
however, constant or direct but fluctuates rapidly and regularly between
about + 340 and -340 volts. The repetition rate or frequency of the
alternating voltage is 50 times per second. If we plotted a graph of voltage Figure 1.6
against time it would look like figure 1.7. Direct current as from a battery
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 17

The alternating voltage supplied by the mains gives rise to an alternating


current (AC) in any device which is connected to a power point. During
the positive half-cycles of the waveform shown in figure 1.7 the current
flows in one direction through the appliance and during the negative
half-cycles the current flows in the opposite direction. Because the
waveform in figure 1.7 is symmetrical the current flow in one direction
during the positive half-cycles will be exactly balanced by the current flow
in the opposite direction during the negative half-cycles. Hence there is
no net transfer of charge over a full cycle; electrons are simply moved
back and forth. This is in contrast to direct current where electrons are
moved in one direction only.
Figure 1.7
The frequency or number of times an AC waveform repeats itself per
second is expressed in units of hertz (abbreviated Hz). 1 Hz is 1 cycle Alternating current as from the
per second. mains supply

It is easy to calculate the frequency of an AC waveform from a graph like figure 1.7.
First we determine the period of the waveform. The period is simply the time taken for
one complete cycle which is read from the horizontal axis. In this example, the
alternating current is from the mains supply and the period, the time for one complete
cycle or oscillation, is 0.02 second or I /50th of a second. The frequency (f) is the
reciprocal of the period (T). In symbols:
1
f = .... (1.7)
T
Hence for AC supplied by the mains the frequency is 1/0.02 = 50 Hz.
During the first hundredth of a second the voltage in figure 1.7 has gone from zero to
+340 volts and back to zero again. The effective (average) voltage will be some figure
between these limits. The figure of 340 volts (the maximum value) is termed the peak
voltage but we normally specify AC by an average rather than peak value. The
average during the first hundredth of a second is 340/ or 240 volts in this example.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 18

Thus the appliances we plug into the mains must have a rating of 240 volts AC.
Since the voltage is rapidly oscillating between + 340 and -340 volts the current
through a light globe connected to the mains will flow alternately in one direction and
then the other and the globe will flicker in brightness according to the voltage. It is
only because the frequency of fluctuation is sufficiently rapid that this effect is not
noticeable.

TRANSFORMERS AND THE MAINS SUPPLY


Transformers are the devices we use to step-up or reduce AC voltage. If we apply a
certain AC voltage to one winding of a transformer (the primary winding) an AC signal
of the same shape but different amplitude (peak voltage) will appear on the other
winding (the secondary winding).
Power Transformers are specifically designed to convert 240 volts AC to some other
voltage: for example a stereo tuner/amplifier would require only 20 to 60 volts to power
the circuitry comprising the radio and amplifier, it would thus require a power
transformer to step down the mains voltage to an appropriate value.

An example of a transformer was shown in section 1.1. Figure 1.8 illustrates the
circuit symbol and construction of a transformer. A transformer consists of two coils of
wire which are insulated from each other but in close proximity. In practice the two
coils of wire are often wound on a common core, made of iron (see figure 1.8(b)).
This allows the transformer to work more efficiently. When AC is applied to one coil of
wire (the 'primary' coil), an alternating current is induced in the other (the secondary)
and the voltage will, in general, be different.

If the transformer is constructed with more turns on the primary winding than on the
secondary then it will act as a step-down transformer. For example if there are 200
turns on the primary winding and 50 on the secondary the voltage from the secondary Figure 1.8
will be one quarter of that applied to the primary. If 240 volts is applied to the primary (a) Circuit symbol and (b)
60 volts will be produced at the secondary. construction of a transformer
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 19

If the transformer is constructed with fewer turns on the primary winding than on the
secondary then it will act as a step-up transformer. For example if there are 20 turns
on the primary winding and 100 on the secondary the voltage from the secondary will The principle that 'you can't
be five times that applied to the primary. If 240 volts is applied to the primary 1200 get something for nothing'
volts will be produced at the secondary. applies here. If the trans-
former steps-up the voltage,
Because of their physical construction - two inductors in close proximity but insulated the available current is
- they play a useful role in isolating the voltage applied to one winding (the primary) reduced. If the transformer
from that available at the other winding (the secondary). Most appliances are isolated steps-down the voltage,
from the mains voltage in this way - by their transformers. The the current is increased.
isolation given by a transformer is important because the voltage
from the secondary is earth-free.
The power from the mains comes from two cables, the active cable
(colour coded brown) and the neutral cable (colour-coded blue).
The neutral cable is earthed at the power station and at distribution
substations. That is, the neutral cable is physically connected to
the ground through a metal conductor (for example, a thick length
of wire connected to a metal stake or water supply pipe buried in
the ground). The neutral cable is thus kept at zero volts potential.
The problem with this arrangement is that if a connection is
inadvertently made between the active cable and earth, such as by Figure 1.9
a person accidentally touching the active cable, this will complete a Isolation with a power
circuit and current will flow from the active wire through the person transformer
to earth, giving an 'earth' shock. To obtain a shock from the 'earth
free' power supplied at the transformer secondary it would be Current can only flow along
necessary for the person to touch both terminals simultaneously. the 'active' wire if it can
simultaneously return via
As long as there is no connection between the primary and secondary windings, the 'neutral' wire. Because
touching only one secondary terminal and thus making a connection between the the neutral wire is earthed,
secondary circuit and earth will not complete a circuit and no current can flow, hence anything touching the earth
no shock. Mains supply and the mechanisms of electric shock are described in more is provided with a return
detail in a later chapter. pathway via the neutral wire.

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 20

EXERCISES
1 The lamp shown in figure 1.1 has a resistance of 3.0 Ω and is connected to a 1.5
V battery. Calculate the current flowing through the lamp and the power
dissipated.
2 An electric jug draws a current of 1.2 amps when connected to the 240 volts
mains supply. Calculate the resistance and power rating of the heating element.
3 The power dissipation of an electric heater is 1000 watts when connected to a
240 volt supply. Calculate its resistance, and the current it will draw.

4 Three resistors are connected in series as shown in figure 1.3. The battery
voltage is 12 V. The resistors have values R1 = 100 Ω, R2 = 500 Ω and R3 = 600
Ω. Draw a diagram of the circuit and label the values of the components.
What is:
(a) the current through each resistor
(b) the potential difference across each resistor
(c) the power dissipated in each resistor
Do the values calculated in (b) add to equal the battery voltage?

5 Three resistors are connected in parallel as shown in figure 1.4. The battery
voltage is 5 V and the resistors have values R1 = 50 Ω, R2 = 100 Ω and R3 = 75
Ω. Calculate:
(a) the current through each resistor
(b) the potential difference across each resistor
(c) the power dissipated in each resistor
(d) the total resistance of the circuit and hence
(e) the total current drawn from the battery.
COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 21

(f) does the value calculated in part (e) agree with the
sum of the values found in part (a) above?

6 Three resistors are connected in the circuit arrangement


shown.
The current through the 100 Ω resistor is 50 mA.
Determine:
(a) the battery voltage and
(b) the power dissipated in the 30 Ω resistor.

7 In the course of an experiment a student sets-up the circuit


shown below using a torch globe, 2 resistors and a battery.
A voltmeter connected across the 200 Ω resistor registers 8
volts.

(a) What is the resistance of the torch globe?


(b) What is the current through the globe?

COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS 22

8 Consider the circuit shown.


The current through the 50 kΩ resistor is measured as 67 µA.
Determine the:
(a) value of the unknown resistor, R.
(b) total current drawn from the battery.
(c) power dissipated in the 50 kΩ resistor.
(d) potential difference across the resistor, R.
(e) current through the 100 kΩ resistor.

9 Consider the circuit shown.


The total current drawn from the battery is 0.2 A. What is the:
(a) current through the 30 Ω resistor.
(b) value of the unknown resistor, R.
(c) power dissipated in the 50 Ω resistor.
(d) potential difference across the 30 Ω resistor.
(e) power dissipated in the resistor, R.
10 (a) What are the two important functions of a transformer?
(b) A transformer has 100 turns on the primary winding and
40 turns on the secondary. If an AC signal of amplitude
60 V is applied to the primary winding what voltage will
appear at the secondary?
(c) A transformer has 200 turns on the primary winding. An
AC signal of amplitude 240 V is applied to the primary
winding and a voltage of 12 V is produced by the
secondary. How many turns are there on the
secondary?
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 23

2 Properties of Capacitors and Inductors


Figure 2.1 shows the circuit symbol for a capacitor and an inductor. Note the parallel
between the circuit symbol and the physical construction of the component. A
capacitor consists of two metal plates (often sheets of aluminium foil) separated by
an insulator. An inductor is simply a coil of wire.

Knowing the physical construction of each we can predict what resistance they offer
when connected in a circuit to a battery. The capacitor, with an insulator between its
plates, offers an extremely high (virtually infinite) resistance to DC. Current can not
flow from one plate to the other. Inductors, being simply coils of conducting wire,
have an extremely low resistance to DC (almost zero).
Figure 2.1
STORAGE CAPABILITY OF CAPACITORS Circuit symbol for (a) a
capacitor and (b) an inductor.
A special property of a capacitor is its ability to store charge and thus electrical
energy. If we connect a battery to the capacitor current will flow for a very short time
and, since the current can not flow continuously through the insulator, the capacitor
will accumulate charge on the plates. When the charge has built up until the voltage
across the capacitor is equal to the battery voltage, current will no longer flow.

The capacitance tells us how much charge a capacitor will accumulate for a given
battery voltage. Capacitance (C), charge (q) and voltage (V) are related by the formula
q
C = .... (2.1)
V
Once charged, a capacitor can store the charge indefinitely. If the battery is
disconnected, the charge on the capacitor and can only leak away if we connect an
external resistance.
The circuit shown in figure 2.2 can be used to observe the discharge of a capacitor.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 24

Suppose that the capacitor is first fully charged to 12 V, then


connected into the circuit. Upon closing the switch, current flows
through the 500 kΩ resistor, allowing the capacitor to discharge. The
reading on the voltmeter progressively falls. Table 2.1 shows
measured values of the voltage taken at 2 second intervals for 20
seconds using a 25 µF capacitor. The 25 µF capacitor was then
replaced with a 50 µF capacitor and the second set of results was
obtained.

Time Voltage on the Voltage on the


(s) 25 µF capacitor 50 µF capacitor
Figure 2.2
0 12 12 A circuit for measuring the
2 10.2 11.1 discharge of a capacitor
4 8.7 10.2
6 7.4 9.4
8 6.3 8.7
10 5.4 8.0
12 4.6 7.4
14 3.9 6.8 Table 2.1
16 3.3 6.3 Measured voltages for the
18 2.8 5.8 discharge of capacitors through
20 2.4 5.4 a resistance of 500 kΩ

A graph of these voltages against time is shown in figure 2.3. Note


that it takes about 8.5 seconds for the 25 µF capacitor to discharge to
half of the original voltage and 17 seconds for the 50 µF capacitor.
On this basis we predict that it would take about 85 seconds for a 250
µF capacitor to discharge to half the original voltage through the
same resistance.
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 25

What we observe is that the time to half discharge (τ1/2)


is directly proportional to the capacitance (C) of the
capacitor. In symbols this is written

τ1/2 α C
Other experiments, where the resistance through which
the capacitor discharges is varied, show that the time
for half-discharge is also proportional to the resistance
(R) through which the capacitor discharges. That is,

τ1/2 α R
Combining these equations we have that the time for
half discharge is directly proportional to the product of
the resistance and the capacitance. In symbols

τ1/2 α R.C .... (2.2)

This is a general relationship between resistance,


capacitance and discharge time for a resistor/capacitor
combination. Sometimes the term 'half-discharge time' Figure 2.3
is used, sometimes 'RC time-constant'. They are
related, but are not the same thing. The RC time- Discharge of capacitors
constant is simply the product R.C. The constant of through a resistance
proportionality in equation 2.2 is 0.693 (the natural
logarithm of 2) so if we know the RC time constant, τ1/2
is easily calculated.
Notice that for a short period of time, such as 1/50th of a second, the 25 µF capacitor
in table 2.1 will not have discharged appreciably. If it discharges by 0.9 volt in the first
second, in l/50th of a second it will discharge by less than 0.02 volt. The importance
of this and the previous ideas will be considered later.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 26

INDUCTORS AND MAGNETIC FIELDS


When current flows though an inductor, a magnetic field is produced. In fact, Most of you would have made
whenever current flows, there is an associated magnetic field so a straight piece of an electromagnet at school.
wire which is carrying current will have a magnetic field around it. The reason Insulated copper wire is
inductors are special is that the wire is wound in closely spaced loops and this wound around, say, a nail to
results in a much more intense magnetic field. The field can be further intensified by make an inductor. When the
wrapping the coil around a piece of iron or mild steel. Both the magnetic field ends of the wire are connect-
intensity and the inductance are increased if the inductor is wound around a core of ed to a battery, the nail
iron or other so-called ferromagnetic material. becomes magnetized.
We will have more to say about magnetic fields (and their effects on tissues) in later
chapters.

IMPEDANCE OF CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS


A major part of the field of electronics is concerned with processing alternating
current of various frequencies and it is for this reason that capacitors and inductors
are so important. Resistors are impartial as far as direct current and alternating
current is concerned: they offer the same resistance to AC and DC. Capacitors and
inductors display no such impartiality: they both react quite differently to AC and DC.
Before describing the properties of capacitors it is useful to have some idea of the
kind of frequencies we are dealing with.
Sounds which are audible to humans lie in the range from 20 Hz to up to a
maximum of about 20 kHz (1 kHz = 1000 Hz). Normal (AM) radio transmissions are Infants can hear sound
made in the frequency range from 500 to 1500 kHz. FM radio transmissions are frequencies of 20 kHz or more.
made in the range 88 to 108 MHz. (l MHz = 1000 kHz or 1000 000 Hz). Check-out With age, this maximum
the numbers on your tuner or pocket radio display panel. Television transmissions frequency drops so that most
are made in the frequency range on either side of the FM range, i.e. between 40 and people over 35 can not hear
80 MHz and above 108 MHz up to about 130 MHz. In each case the sound, radio or frequencies above about
television frequency wave can be converted to alternating current of the same 14 kHz.
frequency which can be amplified, filtered and processed by an electronic circuit to
produce the resulting sound or image.
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 27

Capacitors and inductors are useful because their resistance to alternating current
depends on the frequency of the AC. Next we examine this frequency dependence.
Knowing the physical construction of capacitors and inductors we can predict what
resistance they offer when connected in a circuit to a battery. The capacitor, with an
insulator between its plates, offers an extremely high (virtually infinite) resistance to
DC. Current can not flow from one plate to the other. Inductors, being simply coils of
conducting wire, have an extremely low resistance to DC (almost zero).

For alternating current the resistance of these components is not predicted quite so
simply. Instead of attempting a prediction let us look at some experimental
observations with AC.

When we talk about resistance to the flow of alternating current we no longer use the
term 'resistance' but impedance. The impedance is still measured in ohms but we
reserve 'resistance' for use when talking about DC. The symbol Z is usually used for
impedance. Impedance can be calculated from measurements using a circuit such
as that shown in figure 2.4. The potential difference across R and that across C are
found to depend on the AC frequency. The two values added equal the potential
difference produced by the AC source.
The voltage across the resistor can be used to calculate the current flowing around
the circuit (using Ohm's Law, I = V/R). Since C and R are in series, this equals the
current flowing to the capacitor. The impedance of the capacitor is then calculated
using
V
Z = .... (2.3) Figure 2.4
I
A circuit for measuring the
Which is Ohm's law in its more general form.
impedance of a capacitor
If the capacitor in figure 2.4 is replaced by an inductor, impedance values for the
inductor can be calculated in a similar manner. Table 2.2 gives the measured
impedance of a 20 millihenry (mH) inductor and a 1 microfarad (µF) capacitor at
various frequencies.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 28

Table 2.2
Variation of impedance with Frequency Impedance of 1 µF Impedance of 20 mH
frequency for a 1 µF f (kHz) capacitor (ohms) inductor (ohms)
capacitor and a 20 mH
inductor 0.2 795 25.1
0.3 530 37.7
0.4 398 50.2
0.6 265 75.4
1.0 159 126
2.0 79.5 251
3.0 53.0 377
4.0 39.8 502
5.0 31.8 628

A graph of these values of impedance at each frequency is shown in figure 2.5.


Notice that for the inductor the graph is a straight line passing through the origin.
This tells us that the impedance of the inductor is directly proportional to the
frequency of the AC. For the capacitor the curve suggests an inverse relationship
between impedance and frequency: this is, in fact, the case. To check that the
relationship is an inverse one rather than inverse square or inverse cube we would
need to plot impedance versus 1/frequency and establish that this gives a straight
line graph. This is left as an exercise for the interested reader.
The mathematical expression for the dependence of impedance on frequency for
each of these components is

Zαf for the inductor

and Z α 1/f for the capacitor.


By substituting different values of inductance and capacitance, it is established that
for inductors, Z α L and for capacitors, Z α 1/C.
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 29

Since for inductors, impedance is proportional to the


frequency and is also proportional to the inductance,
we can combine these expressions and write Z α f.L.
When the impedance is specified in Ohms, the
inductance in Henrys and the frequency in Hz, the
constant of proportionality is 2π. The relationship
between Z and f for an inductor is thus

Z = 2πfL .... (2.4)

Similarly for the capacitor: since impedance is


proportional to the reciprocal of frequency and the
reciprocal of the capacitance we can combine the
expressions and write Z a 1/f.C.

When the impedance is specified in Ohms, the


capacitance in Farads and the frequency in Hz, the
constant of proportionality is 1/2p. The relationship
between Z and f for a capacitor is thus
1
Z = .... (2.5)
2πfC
Figure 2.5
From equations 2.4 and 2.5 we can see that it is predicted that doubling the Impedance versus frequency
value of inductance would double the impedance at all frequencies. Doubling graph for (a) a 1 µF capacitor
the value of capacitance would halve the impedance at all frequencies. These and (b) a 20 mH inductor
predictions are easily confirmed experimentally.
Two important points to note from the equations (or the graphs) are that
capacitors have an infinite impedance to direct current (zero frequency) whereas
inductors have zero impedance to DC. This is in agreement with our previous
predictions based on the physical construction of each.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 30

RESONANT CIRCUITS
A traditional and simple way of producing alternating
current relies on the properties of capacitors and
inductors and their behaviour when connected
together in a circuit. An inductor and capacitor
combined in parallel as in figure 2.6 forms what is
called a parallel resonant circuit.

The impedance of the inductor increases with


frequency while the impedance of the capacitor
decreases with increasing frequency (figure 2.5). The
parallel combination will have a low impedance at
low frequencies (because of the inductor) and at high
frequencies (because of the capacitor). At an
intermediate frequency the combination has a
maximum impedance. This is when the impedances
of the components are equal. The peak in the graph Figure 2.6
shown in figure 2.6 occurs at this frequency. A parallel resonant circuit and how its
impedance varies with AC frequency
A formula for calculating the frequency at which the
impedances of the capacitor and inductor are equal
is obtained as follows. The impedance of the
capacitor is given by equation 2.5, and the impedance
of the inductor by equation 2.4. When the
impedances of the components are equal
1
= 2πfL
2πfC
which rearranges to give
1
f2 =
4π 2LC
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 31

1
or f = .... (2.6)
2π√
 L C
This frequency is termed the resonant frequency of the
combination, and for good reason.

Imagine that the capacitor in figure 2.6 is disconnected from


the inductor and connected to a battery to charge it. The
battery is then removed and the capacitor connected to the
inductor again. What subsequently happens?
The capacitor immediately begins to discharge and current
flows through the inductor. In so doing the current flow sets
up a magnetic field around the inductor. Immediately the
charge disappears the current ceases, causing the magnetic
field to collapse. The collapsing magnetic field then induces a
current in the inductor and the capacitor recharges, but with
opposite polarity. The sequence of events is illustrated in
figure 2.7 where the arrows show the direction of current flow.
The capacitor next begins to discharge in the opposite
direction (not shown in figure 2.7 - this would follow (d)) and
the whole cycle is repeated again and again.

What is happening is that the electrical energy stored in the


capacitor is converted to magnetic field energy around the
inductor. Because a magnetic field can only exist if current is
flowing, the magnetic field must collapse as the capacitor
becomes discharged. The magnetic field energy can not
disappear, but is converted back into electrical energy which
moves charge around the circuit and reverse-charges the Figure 2.7
capacitor. The reverse-charged capacitor (figure 2.7(d)) would Initial current flow in a
then discharge through the inductor. Current would flow in the resonant circuit

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 32

reverse direction to that in figure 2.7, producing a magnetic field which would collapse
and re-charge the capacitor to its original state (figure 2.7(a). The process would
repeat indefinitely.

If this were the whole story the circuit would resonate, generating a continuous
alternating flow of current through the inductor. A graph of current versus time would
be an undamped sine wave as shown in figure 2.8(a). A graph of voltage across the
capacitor against time would also resemble figure 2.8(a).
In practice, capacitors and inductors are not
ideal. The inductor will have some DC
resistance and the capacitor will allow some
leakage of current so that energy is lost
during each oscillation. The oscillations will
be damped and must eventually come to an
end. The net result will be a damped
oscillation as shown in figure 2.8(b).
The natural frequency of oscillation is the
same frequency indicated by the peak in the
graph shown in figure 2.6: the resonant Figure 2.8
frequency. This is also the frequency at
which the impedances of the capacitor and (a) undamped and
inductor are equal (where the graphs (b) damped sinewaves
intersect in figure 2.5).

[A graph similar to that in figure 2.6 could be arrived at simply by adding impedances
graphically, say by using figure 2.5. The method gives a correct qualitative result. It
does not give a correct quantitative prediction as no consideration is given to the
phase relationship between the current in each component. The 'resonant frequency'
obtained is correct but the height of the impedance peak is not. A rigorous
mathematical treatment shows that, for ideal components, the impedance is infinite at
the resonant frequency. For real components the impedance will be finite because of
the resistance of the inductor and leakage of the capacitor].
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 33

Although resonant circuits are most commonly encountered in the parallel


combination shown in figure 2.6, they can occur as a series combination (figure 2.9).
Again there is a definite resonant frequency at which the impedances of the two
components are equal.
For a series resonant circuit the impedance has a minimum
value at the resonant frequency. Because of the non-ideal
nature of the components the impedance is not zero at the
resonant frequency but when component losses are low the
impedance can suddenly drop to a very low value as this
frequency is approached.

COUPLING AND RESONANT CIRCUITS


If an oscillator is designed to operate at a fixed frequency
the usual way of coupling its signal to an amplifier or, more
generally, between circuits is by use of a resonant circuit.
This method is most commonly used at high frequencies
(above 100 kHz).
Figure 2.10 shows how a resonant circuit is used to transfer
electrical energy from one circuit to another most efficiently. Figure 2.9
In other words to 'couple' the circuits most efficiently. A series resonant circuit and how its
impedance varies with AC frequency
The signal from the first circuit supplies energy for the
resonant circuit to oscillate. The signal is induced in the
second circuit by the transformer action of the two inductors.
In order for transformer action to operate most efficiently the signal produced by circuit
1 should have the same frequency as the resonant circuit. This means either that the
frequency of circuit 1 can be adjusted to match that of the resonant circuit or that the
frequency of the resonant circuit can be adjusted to match that of circuit 1. The latter
would require the inductor or capacitor in the resonant circuit to be variable so that the
resonant frequency could be adjusted to suit.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 34

Figure 2.10
Coupling with a resonant circuit.

The combination of L and C will have a resonant frequency which is determined


by their inductance and capacitance values according to equation 2.6. The current
through the inductor connected to circuit 1 will induce a current of the same This is analogous to pushing
frequency in L. If the current induced in L does not have the same frequency as a swing. The swing has its
the resonant circuit, little energy will be transferred. If the resonant frequency of L own, natural or resonant
and C in combination is the same as the frequency of the signal supplied by frequency. If you apply
circuit 1, then the circuit will resonate and maximum electrical energy will be pushes at the same
transferred. frequency, the swing
oscillations are reinforced.
SUSTAINED OSCILLATION Pushing at a different
frequency would be
By appropriate choice of the capacitor and inductor a resonant circuit can be counterproductive.
made to generate any frequency of sine wave. A resonant circuit alone is not
sufficient, however, to generate a sustained oscillation. To produce a continuous,
steady supply of alternating current (as in figure 2.8a) we must arrange for the
resonant circuit to be continuously supplied with energy to overcome the losses
in the components and keep it oscillating.

By use of an amplifying circuit, we can provide the energy to overcome the circuit
losses and prevent the oscillations from dying. An amplifier provides positive
feedback. Amplifiers and positive feedback are considered in chapter 5.
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 35

PIEZOELECTRIC CRYSTALS
So far our discussion of oscillators has been restricted to resonant circuits in the form of
inductor and capacitor combinations. Unfortunately, such combinations tend to drift in
frequency over a period of time and with changes in ambient temperature. The effect is
only slight and not very important at low frequencies unless high accuracy is required. The
effect is much more significant at radio frequencies (greater than 500 kHz) where it is very
important to have good frequency stability - imagine switching on your radio and never
knowing quite where to find your favourite radio station!
The effect is really quite serious in TV and radio transmission and communications. The
frequencies allocated to users are quite closely spaced and any drift in transmission
frequency could result in overlap with adjacent transmitters. Similarly the shortwave
diathermy equipment used in physiotherapy operates at radio frequencies and radiates a
certain amount of energy as radio waves - for this reason only certain frequencies are
permitted for their operation and little deviation or drift is permitted.
Good frequency stability can be achieved by use of a piezoelectric crystal. These crystals
have the special property that when squeezed or stretched, a potential difference is
produced between each surface. This piezo-electric effect is illustrated in figure 2.11.
The other side of the coin with piezoelectric crystals is that if a potential difference is
applied to their opposite sides, they change in thickness. Thus in the example shown in
figure 2.11, if a potential difference is applied to an unstressed crystal and the voltage is
positive on top, the crystal will shrink in thickness. If the potential difference is applied
negative on top in this example, the crystal will expand.
An interesting thing happens if a potential difference is suddenly and briefly applied. The
piezoelectric crystal reacts like a bell which is struck by a hammer and starts ringing. The
thickness of the crystal changes when the voltage is applied but the molecules have a
momentum which causes them to overshoot their equilibrium positions. They are pulled
back and overshoot in the opposite direction. The cycle continues and the result is that the Figure 2.11
crystal vibrates continuously. Figure 2.12 illustrates the process and what would be A piezo-electric crystal
observed in practice. compressed and stretched

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 36

The crystal resonates mechanically at a particular frequency. Its thickness


oscillates about a mean which is its normal, unstressed thickness (the
horizontal axis in figure 2.12a).

As the circuit resonates mechanically, the surfaces become charged according


to whether the crystal is stretched or compressed (figure 2.11). Hence, as the
thickness oscillates, the charge on each surface will vary and a graph of charge
versus time would resemble figure 2.12(a). A graph of potential difference
versus time would look the same.

Crystal resonators consist of a quartz wafer between two electrodes. The


physical dimensions of the crystal determine the resonant frequency and if the
crystal is maintained at a constant temperature a very high order of frequency
stability can be obtained. When included in a circuit the crystal only permits
current to flow when the frequency of the current is equal to the natural frequency
of oscillation of the crystal.
Quartz crystals can thus replace the resonant circuits of figure 2.6 and 2.9 and Figure 2.12
set the frequency of the oscillator more precisely. The frequency stability of (a) The change in thickness of a
quartz crystals is exploited in applications where precise timekeeping is piezoelectric crystal in response
required. Everyday applications include wristwatches and the clock which is the to (b) a briefly applied voltage
heart of every computer.
We will meet quartz crystals again in a later chapter describing the production of
ultrasound waves.
CAPACITORS AND DEPOLARISATION
Earlier in this chapter we discussed the charge storing capability of capacitors
and introduced the half-discharge time, τ 1/2 which characterizes the rate of
discharge of a capacitor through a resistor (equation 2.2).

τ1/2 α R.C .... (2.2)


CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 37

When a capacitor is charged through a resistor, equation 2.2 also applies to the
charging behaviour. Hence in a circuit such as that shown in figure 2.13, when the
switch is closed the voltage across the capacitor will increase as shown.

The voltage across the capacitor increases and approaches the battery voltage
asymptotically. For the graph shown the battery voltage is 12 V. From the graph, τ1/2
is approximately 6 seconds.
The reason that the graph has this shape is that the current flowing to charge the
capacitor decreases as the capacitor charges. Initially, the capacitor is uncharged so
when the switch is closed, the potential applied to the left side of the resistor is 12 V
and the potential on the right side is zero. The potential difference across the resistor
is maximum (in this circuit, 12 V) so the current flow is maximum. When the capacitor
has charged to, say, 3 V, the potential difference across R is 9 volts, so the current

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 38

flow (calculated using Ohm's law or measured directly) is less. When the capacitor is
charged to 9 V, the potential difference across R is only 3 V and the current is one-
quarter of its original value. The closer the capacitor comes to fully charged, the
smaller is the potential difference across R and the smaller is the charging current.
Consequently, the rate of charging, determined by the current flow through the
resistor, becomes smaller and smaller as the capacitor approaches fully charged
and the capacitor voltage approaches the battery voltage but never quite gets there.
Next consider what happens
if a pulsed voltage is applied
to the resistor-capacitor
combination shown in figure
2.14.
At the start of the pulse, the
current flow through the
resistor is high and the
capacitor charges rapidly.
As the capacitor charges,
the rate of charge decreases
and the potential difference Figure 2.14
across the capacitor (VC ) approaches a A pulsed voltage applied to a
plateau (figure 2.14a). A graph of
current flow through the resistor or resistor-capacitor combination.
potential difference across the resistor (a) potential difference across the
versus time mirrors the graph of V C capacitor and (b) current through
(figure 2.14b). The initial charging the resistor versus time.
current is high but reduces rapidly as
the capacitor charges.
Note that the current flow through the resistor is AC. Current flows through the
resistor as the capacitor charges and an equal amount flows in the reverse (negative)
direction as the capacitor discharges.
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 39

The pulse duration in this example is significantly greater than the half-
discharge/half-charge time, τ 1/2 so the pulse is able to (almost) completely
charge the capacitor
before coming to an
end and allowing the
capacitor to discharge.
If the RC time constant
(and hence τ1/2) of the
resistor-capacitor co-
mbination was com-
parable to the pulse
width, the capacitor
would not fully charge
(figure 2.15b) and the
current flow through
the resistor would be
more sustained.
[The dashed lines in
figure 2.15 indicate the
voltage across the
capacitor when it is
fully charged (in this
case, it is the pulse
voltage).]
If the RC time constant
was greater than the Figure 2.15
pulse width, the capacitor would charge minimally (figure 2.15c) and the Response of the circuit shown in figure
current flow through the resistor would be well sustained. 2.14 when the pulse duration is (a)
much greater than R.C, (b) comparable
The importance of the RC time constant will be apparent when we consider to R.C and (c) less than R.C.
transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation in subsequent chapters.

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 40

A final point which should be noted is that in each example in figure 2.15, the current
through R is AC. The capacitor charges by a certain amount then discharges, so the
net movement of charge is zero. Whatever charge flows through R during the pulse
must flow back afterwards.

EXERCISES
1 The table below shows readings of voltage obtained at 2 second intervals as a
capacitor discharged through a resistance. The circuit arrangement used is
shown in figure 2.2.
In this case the value of the capacitor was known to be 50 µF but the resistance
was unknown.
_______________________________________________________
Time Voltage on the 50 µF Time Voltage on the 50 µF
(sec) capacitor (sec) capacitor
_______________________________________________________
0 12.0 12 1.8
2 8.7 14 1.3
4 6.3 16 0.9
6 4.6 18 0.7
8 3.3 20 0.5
10 2.4
_______________________________________________________
(a) Plot a graph of voltage against time for comparison with figure 2.3.
(b) How long does it take for the 50 µF capacitor to discharge to half the
original voltage?
(c) What would the unknown resistance need to be to give the results shown
above?
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 41

2 A capacitor is charged to a potential of 15 V then connected to a 250 kΩ resistor


and allowed to discharge. The time taken to half discharge is 2.4 seconds.
How long would the capacitor take to half discharge if:
(a) the resistor was replaced by one of value 500 kΩ
(b) the resistance was halved in value
(c) the capacitance was doubled in value
(d) the resistance was halved in value and the capacitance doubled
(e) the resistance was doubled in value and the capacitance also doubled.

3 What is the impedance of:


(a) a 10 µF capacitor
(b) a 0.047 µF capacitor
(c) a 10 µH inductor
(d) a 2 mH inductor
at a frequency of 1 kHz?
How would the impedance change if the frequency was doubled?

4 A capacitor is connected directly to a 12 volt AC supply (of frequency 50 Hz). The


current flowing through the capacitor is found to be 15 mA. What is the
capacitance?
5 A capacitor has an impedance of 600 ohms at a frequency of 2 kHz. What is its
impedance at a frequency of:
(a) 100 Hz
(b) 1 MHz.

6 Figure 2.5 includes a graph of impedance versus frequency for a 20 mH


inductor. The graph is obtained using the values of impedance and frequency
listed in table 2.2. Use the values listed to plot your own graph of impedance

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 42

versus frequency for a 20 mH inductor. On this graph draw lines showing the
relationship between impedance and frequency for:
(a) a 10 mH inductor
(b) a 50 mH inductor.

7 Use the values in table 2.2 to plot a graph of impedance versus frequency for a 1
µF capacitor. On the same graph draw curves relating impedance and
frequency for:
(a) a 0.5 µF capacitor
(b) a 2 µF capacitor.

8 Figures 2.6 and 2.9 show the variation of impedance with frequency for series
and parallel resonant circuits. Explain the shape of each graph in terms of the
variation of impedance with frequency of the individual inductors and capacitors.
9 A resonant circuit is made by combining a 0.1 µF capacitor with a 3.0 mH
inductor. What is the resonant frequency of such a combination?

10 A 50 mH inductor in combination with a capacitor is found to have a resonant


frequency of 1 kHz. What is the value of the capacitor?
11 When a pulse of current is applied to the circuit shown in figure 2.22 it
'resonates' generating an alternating voltage as shown in figure 2.24(b).
(a) explain what is meant by resonance and why the circuit resonates
(b) explain why the AC is damped.

12 Two circuits are coupled together as shown in figure 2.10. The values of the
components are C = 100 pF and L = 1 mH.
(a) Under what circumstances will power be transferred most efficiently
between the circuits?
CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 43

(b) At what frequency will maximum power transfer occur?


(c) If C was increased to 500 pF, what would be the new frequency for
maximum power transfer?

13 An AC signal of frequency 100 kHz is generated by circuit 1 in figure 2.10. The


value of C is 0.01 µF.
(a) What value of L is needed for maximum power transfer to circuit 2?
(b) If L is 3 mH, at what frequency will maximum power be transferred?

14 A DC pulse is applied to a resistor/capacitor combination. The result is a


potential difference and flow of current through the resistor as shown.

(a) why does the graph of current flow through the resistor droop so rapidly?
(b) why must the current flow through R be purely AC?
(c) if the capacitance was increased, how would this affect the shape of the
graph of current through R? Why?
(d) under what circumstances will the graph of current flow through the
resistor resemble that of the applied voltage?

CAPACITORS AND INDUCTORS 44

15 DC pulses as shown below are applied to a resistor/capacitor combination.

(a) what can you conclude about the RC time constant for this circuit?
(b) if the RC time constant was reduced (by decreasing C or R) how would
this affect the shape of the graph of potential difference or current flow
through the resistor? Give an explanation of your reasoning.
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 45

3 Electrical Properties of Skin


Physiologists study the bioelectric properties of nerve and muscle using invasive
surgical techniques where the nerve trunk is exposed and so rendered accessible to
direct electrical stimulation. Sometimes nerve fibres are teased-out and stimulated
individually. In this way much has been learned about the electrical characteristics of
nerve. This knowledge is used by the physiotherapist to choose electrical stimulus
characteristics (such as the intensity, treatment time, pulse width and frequency) to
invoke the desired physiological response during patient treatment. A complication is
that electrical stimulation for therapy is almost invariably applied non-invasively. It is
normally achieved by applying an electrical stimulus through the skin using surface
mounted electrodes. The skin has complex electrical characteristics and these must
be taken into account when transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation (TENS) is used.
SKIN AND APPENDAGES
The biological makeup of skin and its physiological state determine its electrical
properties so it is worthwhile to consider some aspects of its structure which are
relevant to electrical stimulation. Examined microscopically, the skin is found to have
two distinct layers, the dermis and epidermis, as illustrated in figure 3.1.

The dermis and epidermis together constitute the skin. The epidermis is punctured by
the skin appendages: the sweat gland ducts and hair follicles. Beneath the skin is the In most areas of the
subcutis, also referred to as the superficial fascia or simply subcutaneous tissue. body, the subcutis is
Blood vessels, lymph vessels and nerves infiltrate the subcutis and dermis but not the predominantly adipose
epidermis. (fat storing) tissue. It is,
nonetheless, quite
There are other fundamental differences between the dermis and epidermis. The conductive because of
dermis is well hydrated. It consists of a matrix of collagen and elastin fibres embedded its water (and ion) content
in a 'ground substance' rich in proteoglycans and hyaluronic acid. Fibroblasts are the and the presence of an
predominant cells in this layer. The high degree of hydration makes the dermis extensive network of
electrically conductive. The epidermis is less hydrated and consists of a matrix of blood vessels.
keratin fibres. The cells present in this layer are predominantly keratinocytes which

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 46

receive nutrients from capillaries in


the underlying dermis. The basal
layer of the epidermis is metabolically
very active, with the cells regularly
undergoing mitosis. Keratinocytes,
formed and pushed upwards from
this layer, synthesise keratin and
store it within the cytoplasm. In their
life cycle, the keratinocytes move
towards the skin surface, becoming
less metabolically active as diffusion
limits the rate of nutrient supply. Near
the surface the cells die and shrivel,
turning into little sacs of (mostly)
keratin. The dead cells form a scaly
shell called the stratum corneum.
The stratum corneum is thus the
withered, dehydrated remains of
keratinocytes packaged full of
keratin. From formation in the basal
layer to desquamation (flaking off as
tiny scales from the surface) takes
the keratinocyte approximately 40
days. The balance between desquamation and mitosis in the basal layer Figure 3.1
keeps the thickness of the epidermis constant. Some important features of skin.
The stratum corneum is a dry, insulating but very thin shell which separates
and isolates the highly hydrated soft tissues of the human body from the drier
and far more changeable external environment. If the stratum corneum is
removed, the body loses water and if too great an area of the stratum corneum
is lost or damaged, the resulting water loss can be fatal. As noted above, the
fibrous protein, keratin forms the bulk of this dead, insulating layer which is so
essential for water homeostasis. From the point of view of transcutaneous
electrical nerve stimulation, the presence of the stratum corneum is significant
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 47

because it is an electrical insulator.

The skin appendages, the hair follicles and sweat gland ducts, are important both
physiologically and electrically. The keratinous structures which we call hairs serve
two important physiological roles; one sensory, one thermal. Hairs are relatively rigid
structures which are anchored in the skin. Sensory receptors close to the hair root
detect and respond to movement of the hair, so providing sensitive touch receptors.
A sufficient drop in temperature will signal a reflex response from receptors which
triggers contraction of smooth muscle fibres connected to the hair root. The myofibril
contraction causes the hairs to 'stand on end', trapping a volume of warmer air which
separates the living tissue from the external environment. This effect is pronounced
in humans and is also seen in other species which have greater hair covering. An
elevated temperature triggers an increased blood flow to the dermis, thus increasing
the rate of heat transfer from deeper structures and also activates the sweat glands
to release water on the skin surface and provide evaporative cooling. Electrically, the
hair follicles and sweat gland ducts are conductive pathways through the insulating
layer, the stratum corneum.

AN ELECTRICAL MODEL FOR TRANSCUTANEOUS STIMULATION


When an electrode is placed on the skin surface we
create a situation where two conductors are
separated by an insulator, in other words, a
capacitor. The electrode and the tissue beneath the
stratum corneum are the two conductors. The
stratum corneum is the insulator although, as we
have seen, the stratum corneum is a 'leaky' insulator
as it is punctured by conductive channels created by
the skin appendages. The combination of
electrodes and tissue can thus be modelled by a
resistor capacitor combination. Figure 3.2 shows an Figure 3.2
electrical model for two electrodes placed on the
skin surface. An electrical model for
transcutaneous stimulation.

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 48

C is the capacitance of the stratum corneum. Rp , the resistor in parallel with C,


represents the conductive pathway created by the skin appendages. Rs, the series
resistance, represents the resistance of the tissue volume under the stratum In this model, the resistance
corneum between the two electrodes. The resistance of the electrodes is assumed of the electrodes is
to be negligible. The actual values of Rp and C depend on factors such as the assumed to be negligible,
electrode size, ambient temperature and skin condition. The quantity Rs varies little. but could be included
putting a resistor at each
An important point which we will return to is that nerve fibres, whether sensory motor end of the model or including
or pain, are located beneath the stratum corneum. In terms of the electrical model, the electrode resistance
this means that the potential difference across Rs determines the stimulation In R s .
intensity experienced by nerve fibres. The potential difference across C and Rp
represents lost electrical energy as far as nerve fibres are concerned.

RESPONSE OF THE MODEL TO STEADY DIRECT CURRENT


If a source of direct current, such as a battery is connected to the circuit shown in
figure 3.2, some current will flow through the three resistors in series and some will
flow on to the capacitors, so charging them. The initial flow of current is large as it
includes charging current flowing to the capacitors (figure 3.3a) which is limited only
by Rs. After the capacitors have charged, the current flow is lower as there is only
current flow through the resistors (figure 3.3b).

If Rp , the parallel resistance of the stratum corneum, is high (as it is, under normal
circumstances), the 'steady state' current flow (figure 3.3b) will be low - appreciably
lower than the initial current flow which includes charging current for the capacitors.
At the extreme, if the stratum corneum was not 'leaky' i.e. if the parallel resistance, Rp,
in figure 2 was infinite, no steady direct current could flow. There would be a brief
flow of current as the capacitors charged, then no further current flow.

In reality, Rp allows current flow, so after C is charged the only current flow is through
Rs and the two resistances Rp which are connected in series.
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 49

Question 1:
How much steady direct current would flow in a
typical 'real life' situation if the applied DC
voltage is 50 V and electrodes with an area of 10
cm 2 are used?
Information:
Skin capacitance is proportional to the electrode
area. A typical value for the capacitance per unit
area is 0.05 µF.cm-2, so for a 10 cm2 electrode
area, the capacitance, C, is 0.5 µF. Skin
resistance is inversely proportional to the
electrode area. The larger the area, the greater
the number of conductive channels through the
stratum corneum and the lower the total
resistance. The parallel resistance x unit area
might typically be 10 kΩ.cm 2 , so for a 10 cm2
electrode area, the parallel resistance, Rp , is
about 10 kΩ.cm2/10 cm2 = 1 kΩ. The resistance
of the tissue volume beneath the stratum
corneum is typically about 200 Ω.
Answer:
Under steady-state conditions, the capacitors
are charged so no current flows to the capacitors
and the value of C is irrelevant. The combination
of electrodes and tissue behaves as three Figure 3.3
resistors in series. The total resistance is (1 kΩ Response of the electrical model
+ 200 Ω + 1 kΩ) = 2200 Ω. The applied potential to direct current (a) initially and (b)
difference is 50 V so the resulting current flow is,
from Ohm's Law, I = V/R = 50/2200 = 0.0227 A = after the capacitors have charged.
22.7 mA.

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 50

Question 2:
How big is the initial current flow for the 'real life' situation described in question 1?
Information:
Initially, the capacitors act as a 'short circuit'. They are uncharged and offer no
resistance to current flow. As each capacitor charges, the potential difference across
the capacitor increases and this opposes further flow of current. When fully charged,
an ideal capacitor has infinite resistance. Uncharged, the 'resistance' is zero.

Answer:
The initial flow of current is resisted only by Rs. The capacitors offer zero resistance
when they are uncharged so the current flow is I = V/R = 50/200 = 0.25 A = 250 mA.
This is more than ten times larger than the steady-state current (question 1).

Question 3:
What is the steady-state potential difference across Rp and Rs for an applied potential
difference of 50 V?

Answer:
Since the three resistors are in series, the same current (22.7 mA) flows through
each. The potential difference across each resistor can be calculated using Ohm's
Law. The resistance Rs is 200 Ω so the potential difference across it is V = I.R s =
0.0227 x200 = 4.5 Volts. For each parallel resistance, Rp, V = I.Rp = 0.0227x1000 =
22.7 Volts.
THE USE OF STEADY DC
The previous calculations demonstrate an important idea concerning the use of
steady direct current for patient treatment. Namely, that steady DC is of little practical
use for stimulation of nerve fibres. For steady, continuous flow of direct current
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 51

through the skin, the tissue impedance is high (Rs + 2Rp) and the potential difference
across Rs is small.

Nerve fibres are located in the tissues underlying the stratum corneum (represented
by Rs) so the potential difference across them is small and their stimulation intensity Notice that in the answers to
is low. Most of the applied voltage drop occurs across the stratum corneum (Rp ). question 3, for an applied
This is one reason why steady direct current is not used for transcutaneous nerve potential difference of 50 V,
stimulation. A second, more important, reason is that nerves are relatively insensitive only 4.5 V is produced
to steady DC because they accommodate. The firing threshold progressively across the tissue beneath
increases with a constantly applied DC stimulus, so the nerve will cease firing once the stratum corneum.
the threshold has risen above the applied DC stimulus. Accommodation is described
in more detail in chapter 4.
IONTOPHORESIS
It is for the reasons outlined above that steady direct current is not used for
transcutaneous nerve stimulation. Steady DC does, however, have an important
clinical role in iontophoresis, where drugs or other chemical agents are driven
through the skin to the underlying tissue. Iontophoresis only works if the chemical to
be driven is charged. It uses steady DC so that the chemical ions are driven
continually in one direction while no nerve stimulation (in particular, no stimulation of
pain or motor fibres) occurs.
An example is acetate ion iontophoresis for decalcification of connective tissue. A
soluble acetate, such as sodium acetate is dissolved in conductive gel. This is
applied to the skin under the positive electrode (anode). Steady DC is applied at a
current level of about 10 mA over a treatment period of 10 to 20 minutes. The
negatively charged acetate ions are driven through the skin into deeper tissue. The
calcium in calcified tissue is in the form of calcium phosphate crystals, which react
with the acetate ions to form the soluble substance, calcium acetate. In this way the
calcium phosphate crystals are removed.
If the ion to be driven through the skin was positively charged, it would be applied
under the negative electrode (the cathode).

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 52

RESPONSE OF THE MODEL TO PULSED DIRECT CURRENT


If a pulse of direct current is applied to the circuit shown in figure 3.2, the initial current
flow through Rs will be large, but will quickly drop as the capacitors charge. The time
constant for the charging process is proportional to Rs.C. Figure 3.4 shows the effect
of stimulus pulse width and time constant on the current flow.
In (a) the pulse duration is long
compared to Rs .C so the capacitors
charge during the pulse and the
current quickly drops to resistive
current flow only. This means that if
R p is large, the current will drop to a
very low value. At the end of the
applied voltage pulse the capacitors
discharge, producing a negative-
going current spike. Nerve fibres,
located in deeper tissue beneath the
stratum corneum (represented by Rs),
would thus experience two short-
duration pulses of stimulating current,
one at the beginning and one at the
end of the applied voltage pulse. Most
of the applied voltage is ineffective as
far as stimulation of nerve fibres is Figure 3.4
concerned. Response of the electrical model to pulsed
In (b) the pulse duration is short compared to Rs .C. The current direct current (a) when the pulse duration
decreases only fractionally during the pulse and most of the resulting is long compared to R s.C and (b) when the
current is due to the capacitors charging. The resulting current through pulse duration is short compared to R s.C.
R s is high and does not decrease much during the pulse. Most of the
applied voltage pulse is effective.
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 53

Figure 3.4 shows examples close to the range of extremes for stimulation with
rectangular pulsed current. Note that the horizontal (time) axis scale is different in
each example. In figure 3.4(a) the time scale is relatively long compared to Rs.C and
sharp spikes are seen in the graphs of current through Rs versus time. In figure
3.4(b) the time scale is relatively short compared to Rs.C and the current through Rs
shows only a small decrease during the stimulus pulse. During the spikes in 3.4(a),
appreciable current flows through Rs, meaning that electrical energy is dissipated in
the tissue volume beneath the stratum corneum. Between spikes, little current flows
through the deeper tissue (Rs), and most of the electrical energy is dissipated in the
stratum corneum. The short duration pulse in 3.4(b) results in appreciable and
sustained current flows through Rs, so most of the electrical energy is available for
nerve stimulation.
The above is one of the reasons why modern stimulators use short duration pulses
for transcutaneous nerve stimulation. A second, perhaps more important reason is
that better discrimination between sensory, motor and pain fibre stimulation is
achieved with narrower stimulus pulses. This will be considered further in chapter 4.

RESPONSE OF THE MODEL TO ALTERNATING CURRENT


The response of the model to alternating current is particularly interesting as The term 'low frequency'
alternating current (at kilohertz frequencies) is commonly used in physiotherapy for currents refer to those in the
patient treatment, either in the form of 'interferential currents' or 'Russian stimulation'. 'biological' frequency range
Interferential currents are 'medium frequency' AC currents normally applied at a from 0 to approximately 100
frequency of 4 kHz. Russian current has a frequency of 2.5 kHz. Part of the reason Hz. 'Medium frequencies' are
that these frequencies are used is that at kHz frequencies, the stratum corneum has in the kHz to tens of kHz range.
a low electrical impedance. 'High frequencies' are in the
100 kHz and upward range.
The impedance of the stratum corneum is the total impedance of Rp and C in the
electrical model (figure 3.2). It is strongly dependent on the alternating current
frequency because of the capacitance, C. The impedance of C is given by the formula:

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 54

1
Zc = .... (2.5)
2πfC In most descriptions of
interferential or Russian
where Zc is the impedance and f is the alternating current frequency. currents, the choice of a
kilohertz frequency is justified
Question 3: as being due to the low skin
What is the capacitative impedance of the stratum corneum, Zc, at frequencies of (a) impedance at kHz
50 Hz, (b) 500 Hz and (c) 5 kHz? frequencies. The low skin
impedance is due to the low
Information: impedance of both the
stratum corneum and the
A typical value for the skin capacitance per unit area is 0.05 µF.cm-2 . A typical underlying skin layers.
electrode area is 10 cm2 so the capacitance, C, in the model is about 0.5 µF.

Answer:
(a) Using equation 2.5, the impedance at 50 Hz is
1 1 10 6
Zc = = = = 6400 Ω
2πfC 2 x 3.142 x 50 x 0.5 x 10-6 50 x 3.142
(b) Using equation 2.5, the impedance at 500 Hz is
1 1 10 6
Zc = = -6 = = 640 Ω
2πfC 2 x 3.142 x 500 x 0.5 x 10 500 x 3.142
(c) Using equation 2.5, the impedance at 5 kHz is
1 1 10 3
Zc = = -6 = = 64 Ω
2πfC 2 x 3.142 x 5000 x 0.5 x 10 5 x 3.142

If the stratum corneum was purely capacitative, its impedance would vary as
calculated above. In fact the skin appendages provide a parallel resistive path for
current flow (Rp in figure 3.2) so the total impedance of the stratum corneum is lower,
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 55

significantly so at low frequencies. The parallel resistance x unit area of the stratum
corneum is typically about 10 kΩ.cm 2 , so for a 10 cm2 electrode area, the parallel
resistance, Rp, is about 10 kΩ.cm2/10 cm2 = 1 kΩ.
At a frequency of 5 kHz, the capacitative impedance of the skin is about 64 Ω and
placing a 1 kΩ resistance in parallel makes virtually no difference to the total
impedance. At a frequency of 500 Hz, the capacitative impedance of the skin is about
640 Ω and placing a 1 kΩ resistance in parallel reduces the total impedance to
appreciably less than 640 Ω. At a frequency of 50 Hz, the capacitative impedance of
the skin is about 6400 Ω and placing a 1 kΩ resistance in parallel reduces the total
impedance to less than 1 kΩ.

Despite the effect of skin appendages offering a conductive pathway (Rp ) at low
frequencies, the total impedance of the stratum corneum (C and Rp in parallel) still
shows a dramatic decrease with increasing frequency. Thus, for a given stimulus
voltage, greater current flows at higher frequencies. This means that the current
through Rs, representing the underlying tissues, is higher at higher frequencies and
the potential difference across Rs is correspondingly higher.

Question 4:
What is the impedance of the stratum corneum at frequencies of (a) 50 Hz, (b) 500 Hz
and (c) 5 kHz? Strictly speaking, capacitative
and resistive impedances
Use the model in figure 3.2 and values of C and Rp used previously assuming an must be added using
electrode area of 10 cm2.
complex number algebra. If a
Use the formula for two resistances in parallel to add the two impedances. resistor, R p and a capacitor,
C, are connected in parallel,
Information:
the total impedance, Z, is
As indicated previously, a typical value for the skin capacitance for an electrode area given by the formula:
of 10 cm2 is about 0.5 µF. The capacitative impedance is thus 6400 Ω, 640 Ω and 64
Ω at frequencies of 50 Hz, 500 Hz and 5 kHz respectively. The parallel resistance, Rp, Rp
is about 1 kΩ. Z =
21
(1+(2πfRp C) ) /2

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 56

Answer:
The impedance of the stratum corneum at each frequency is the total impedance of C
and Rp in parallel. Two resistances in parallel can be added using the formula
1 1 1
= +
RT R1 R2
Adding the impedances of C and Rp in this way we use
1 1 1
= +
Z Rp Zc
where Zc is the impedance of C at the frequency concerned.
(a) Using the above formula, the impedance at 50 Hz is calculated as follows:
1 1 1 1000 + 6400 6500
= + = =
Z 6400 1000 1000 x 6400 1000 x 6400
6400 x 1000
so Z = = 985 Ω
6500

(b) The impedance at 500 Hz is given by


1 1 1 1000 + 640 1640 640 x 1000
= + = = so Z = = 390 Ω
Z 640 1000 1000 x 640 1000 x 640 1640

(c) The impedance at 5 kHz is given by


1 1 1 1000 + 64 1064 64 x 1000
= + = = so Z = = 60 Ω
Z 64 1000 1000 x 64 1000 x 64 1064

The impedance of the stratum corneum (C and Rp in parallel) thus shows a dramatic
decrease with increasing frequency: from about 1 kΩ at 50 Hz to about 60 Ω at 5 kHz.
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 57

It is the potential difference across Rs which determines the stimulation intensity


experienced by nerve fibres, which are located under the stratum corneum. This
depends on both Z and Rs. Rs is about 200 Ω and does not vary appreciably with
frequency. Since Z decreases appreciably with increasing frequency, the potential
difference across Rs will correspondingly increase.
Question 5:
What is the potential difference across Rs at frequencies of (a) 50 Hz, (b) 500 Hz and
(c) 5 kHz for an applied potential difference of 50 V? Use the values of Z and Rs
calculated previously assuming an electrode area of 10 cm2.

Information:
Accurate calculation of the potential difference across Rs requires complex number
algebra, but a good first-approximation can be made by treating the impedances as
simple resistances in series.
Answer:
(a) The impedance of the stratum corneum at 50 Hz
is 985 Ω and R s is 200 Ω . Thus the total
impedance is 985+200+985 = 2170 Ω. For an
applied potential difference of 50 V, the current
through the series combination is I = V/Z =
50/2170 = 0.023 A = 23 mA. This is also the
current through Rs , so the potential difference
across Rs is V = I.Rs = 0.023 x 200 = 4.6 volts.

(b) The impedance of the stratum corneum at 500 Hz is 390 Ω and Rs is 200 Ω.
Thus the total impedance is 980 Ω. For an applied potential difference of 50 V,
the current through the series combination is I = V/Z = 50/980 = 0.051 A = 51
mA. This is also the current through Rs, so the potential difference across Rs is
V = I.Rs = 0.051 x 200 = 10.2 volts.

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 58

(c) The impedance of the stratum corneum at 5 kHz is 60 Ω and Rs is 200 Ω. Thus
the total impedance is 320 Ω. For an applied potential difference of 50 V, the
current through the series combination is I = V/Z = 50/320 = 0.156 A = 156 mA.
Thus the potential difference across Rs is V = I.Rs = 0.156 x 200 = 31.2 volts.
Notice that at 5 kHz, the potential difference across Rs is 31.2 volts, which is more
than 60% of the applied (50 V) stimulus. At 500 Hz, the potential difference across Rs
is about 20% of the applied stimulus and at 50 Hz, about 9%. If the objective is to
stimulate nerve fibres which are located beneath the stratum corneum, the higher the
alternating current frequency, the less the energy wasted in the stratum corneum and
the greater the current through, and voltage across, the deeper tissues.
If skin impedance was the only factor, then the higher the alternating
current frequency, the lower the skin impedance and the more efficiently
nerves could be stimulated. Following this logic, if 5 kHz stimulation is
more efficient than 500 Hz, then 50 kHz should be even more so. In fact
this is not the case. The reason is that the impedance of the nerve fibre
also varies with frequency.
NERVE FIBRE IMPEDANCE
The electrical properties of nerve fibres are analogous to those of skin
and underlying tissue. The nerve fibre membrane, like the membrane of
all cells, is a phospholipid bilayer with an embedded patchwork or
mosaic of protein molecules. This fluid-mosaic structure, illustrated
alongside, explains the measured electrical properties. Orange shapes
are the polar, high-water-content, protein molecules. Blue circles with
two dangling chains represent the phospholipid molecules which have
two long, non-polar 'tails'.

The phospholipid bilayer is an insulator. The hydrocarbon tails of the


phospholipid molecules separate the conductive intracellular fluid from
the equally conductive extracellular fluid. Thus the nerve-fibre membrane
acts as a capacitor. Protein molecules which span the width of the
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 59

membrane provide conductive channels, allowing


some ions to cross the membrane continuously. For
this reason the membrane behaves electrically like a
capacitor, C, with a parallel resistance Rp.
Electrical stimulation of the nerve fibre involves current
flow across the membrane, through the intracellular
fluid and out across the membrane at some other point
(usually the adjacent node of Ranvier). The internal
contents of the nerve fibre, the intracellular fluid, is
purely resistive so the nerve fibre can be electrically
modelled as shown in figure 3.5.
Figure 3.5
C in figure 3.5 is the capacitance of the nerve-fibre membrane: an insulating
phospholipid bilayer. Rp is the resistance of conductive channels through the bilayer An electrical model for a
(the protein molecules which span the full width of the membrane). Rs is the nerve fibre
resistance of the intracellular fluid.
To excite a nerve fibre, that is, to cause the nerve to fire and produce an action
potential, the membrane potential must be changed from its resting value to the
excitation threshold. For nerve excitation it is not the potential difference across the
fibre which determines this but the potential difference across the fibre membrane (C
and Rp in figure 3.5).
Since the membrane acts as a capacitor, if alternating current is used for nerve
stimulation, the potential difference across the fibre membrane will be less at higher
alternating current frequencies. The decrease in membrane impedance with
increasing frequency means that a greater potential difference will be produced
across Rs and a correspondingly lower potential difference will be produced across
C and Rp. At high frequencies, nerve fibres are less excitable because the potential
difference produced across the fibre membrane is reduced. In practical terms this
means that electrical stimulation with alternating current does not become more and
more efficient at higher alternating current frequencies. the decrease in impedance
of the stratum corneum, which results in a higher potential difference across the

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 60

underlying tissues at kilohertz frequencies is countered by the decrease in


impedance of the nerve fibre membrane. In theory, the decreased nerve fibre
sensitivity could be compensated-for by increasing the stimulus intensity but in
practice this would result in a high current flow through the skin and consequently a
high electrical power dissipation and the risk of tissue damage. The result is that
frequencies above about 10 kHz are of little use for eliciting a nerve response.
A similar argument applies to
stimulation with rectangular pulses.
As indicated previously, long duration
pulses are relatively ineffective for
transcutaneous nerve stimulation as
most of the electrical energy is
dissipated in the stratum corneum and
the current through the deeper tissues
is in the form of two spikes, at the
onset and cessation of the stimulus
(figure 3.4(a)). With short duration
pulses (figure 3.4(b)), little energy is
dissipated in the stratum corneum and
the current through the deeper tissues
is sustained during the pulse.
However, if the pulse duration is
extremely short (tens of
microseconds), there will be
insufficient time during the pulse for the nerve membrane capacitance to Figure 3.6
charge. Figure 3.6 illustrates the response of the electrical model Change in potential difference across the
shown in figure 3.5 to short and longer duration current pulses.
nerve fibre membrane (voltage across C and
With a sufficiently long duration pulse, there is time for the membrane Rp in the electrical model shown in figure
capacitance to charge (figure 3.6(a)) and the change in membrane 3.5) when the pulse duration is (a) much
potential is maximum. With a very short duration pulse, there is longer than R s.C and (b) shorter than R s.C.
insufficient time for the membrane capacitance to fully charge and the
change in membrane potential is small (figure 3.6(b)). The use of a
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 61

higher stimulus intensity can compensate for the short pulse duration, but if the
intensity required is too large, there is the risk of skin damage. Specifically, at
stimulus intensities of several hundred volts, there is the risk of skin electrical
breakdown where tiny regions of skin under the electrodes suddenly become highly
conductive, allowing an extremely high current to flow and causing tissue damage.
The net effect is that for transcutaneous stimulation using rectangular pulses, there is
a 'window' of pulse widths between tens of microseconds and about 1 ms, outside
which stimuli are either ineffective or inefficient and potentially dangerous.
EXERCISES
1 Explain, in terms of the structure of skin, why the electrical model shown in
figure 3.2 is an appropriate model for a description of transcutaneous electrical
nerve stimulation.
2 When a constant DC stimulus is applied, via electrodes, to the skin surface,
there is a large transient flow of current through the tissue. Explain why the
initial flow of current is high and why the steady-state current is lower.
3 (a) What is iontophoresis?
(b) Why must the active agent be charged (i.e. in the form of an ion)?
(c) What is the advantage of iontophoresis for application of medication?

4 Figure 3.4, page 52, shows graphs of the current flow through tissue in
response to stimulus pulses of different duration.
(a) explain why long duration pulses produce only short-duration current
flows, as in figure 3.4(a).
(b) Why is the current flow sustained when short duration pulses, as in figure
3.4(b), are applied transcutaneously?

5 For transcutaneous nerve stimulation, body tissue can be modelled by the


resistor/ capacitor combination shown below. Skin capacitance per unit area is

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 62

approximately 0.05 µF.cm-2 and the parallel skin resistance x unit area, approx-
imately 10 kΩ.cm2. The subcutaneous resistance is typically around 200 Ω.
Sinusoidal AC with an amplitude of 20V is applied between A and B using 1 cm2
electrodes.

(a) Calculate the impedance of the capacitor at AC frequencies of:


* 50 Hz
* 500 Hz
* 5 kHz.
(b) Calculate the impedance of the stratum corneum; i.e. the impedance of
the parallel (Rp and C) resistor capacitor combination, Z||, at each of the
three frequencies.
(c) What is the potential difference across the deep tissue, modelled as Rs, at
each of the frequencies?

6 If the electrode area in question 5 above was 50 cm2, what would be:
(a) the impedance of the capacitor, C, at the same AC frequencies?
(b) the impedance of the stratum corneum; i.e. the impedance of the (Rp and
C) resistor-capacitor combination at each of the three frequencies?
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF SKIN 63

(c) the potential difference across Rs (representing the deeper tissues) for
the same AC frequencies?

7 A rectangular pulse of amplitude 40 V is applied to the circuit shown in question


5. What is:
(a) the peak current through Rs
(b) the minimum current through Rs
when a long duration pulse is used?

8 (a) Draw graphs of the voltage across Rs versus time when rectangular
pulsed current is applied to the circuit in question 1. Consider three
situations (i) the pulse width is small compared to Rs .C, (ii) the pulse
width is comparable to Rs.C and (iii) the pulse width is large compared to
Rs.C.
(b) explain, using graphs to illustrate, the effect of Rp on the voltage measured
across Rs.

9 The skin acts as a capacitative barrier to the flow of current, meaning that the
higher the AC frequency, the lower the skin impedance. For this reason kHz
frequency sinusoidal AC is used for transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation.
(a) why are higher frequencies (tens or hundreds of kHz) not used clinically to
reduce skin impedance further?
(b) what is the clinically useful frequency range for AC stimulation?
10 Pulsed current with widths between about 50 µs and 1 ms are normally used for
transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation. Why are pulses of duration
(a) less than 50 µs and
(b) greater than about 1 ms
not normally used?
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 64

4 Electrical Stimulation of Nerve and Muscle


Both low frequency pulsed current and kHz frequency alternating current are used by
the physiotherapist for the stimulation of nerve and muscle. Low frequency
stimulation using short duration pulses has most often been used by physiologists
for studying nerve and muscle. Consequently, the physiological basis for electrical
stimulation with these currents is reasonably well understood. Less is known of the
effects of kHz frequency alternating currents, particularly when applied trans-
cutaneously. The aim of this chapter is to present some of the important
observations that have been made concerning the response of nerve and muscle to
electrical stimulation using both kinds of currents.
When a nerve fibre is in its resting state there is a potential difference of some 70 The resting membrane
millivolts between the interior and exterior of the fibre. This is called the 'resting potential is also affected by
membrane potential'. The inside of the fibre is negative with respect to the outside. the movement of other ions,
The resting membrane potential originates from the difference in concentration of including sodium ions, but
different ions inside and outside the cell and the permeability of the fibre membrane because their permeability is
to particular ions. Potassium ions contribute most to the resting membrane much lower than that of
potential. The intracellular and extracellular concentrations of potassium ions differ potassium, their effect on the
markedly, with the result that they diffuse down their concentration gradient, resting membrane potential
producing a difference in electrical potential across the nerve fibre membrane. The is less.
origin of the resting membrane potential is described in most physiology text books
and so will not be elaborated here.
If a current of sufficient intensity is passed through tissue containing a nerve fibre the
potential difference set-up across the fibre may be sufficient to cause depolarization
of the fibre membrane and the nerve is stimulated. The depolarization of the
membrane, once induced, is transmitted along the length of the nerve fibre and is
indistinguishable from a normal nerve impulse (sometimes referred to as an action
potential). The important idea is that the potential difference across the membrane
must be changed by a critical amount to produce the transient, but large, membrane
depolarization which is known as an action potential.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 65

STIMULATION OF NERVE FIBRES


In order to elicit an action potential the potential difference across a nerve fibre must
be changed to more than some critical value known as the threshold potential. An
electrical stimulus resulting in less than the threshold potential across the nerve fibre
will not trigger any response. The process is illustrated in figure 4.1.
The threshold potential of most excitable
membranes is between 5 and 15 mV more
positive than the resting potential. Thus if the
resting potential is -70 mV the threshold potential
may be -60 mV. To generate a nerve impulse the
potential must be changed by more than 10 mV in
this case.
Once the potential is increased above threshold
the nerve fibre is 'fired'. The response is 'all or
none'. That is, any stimulus above the threshold
value produces the same size of response. The
membrane potential rapidly changes to around
+30 mV then decreases to the resting value,
typically in about one millisecond.
Refractory Periods
After a nerve has been stimulated there is a short
period of time, typically around 10 milliseconds for
sensory and motor neurones, during which the
sensitivity of the nerve to stimuli is decreased.
During this time the nerve membrane is said to be Figure 4.1
refractory to a second stimulus. The threshold Response of a nerve fibre to
potential is increased above the normal value as stimuli of increasing intensity.
shown in figure 4.2.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 66

For the first millisecond or so after initiation of a


nerve impulse no stimulus, no matter how large,
will produce a second impulse. This is the
absolute refractory period. This is followed by a
further period, the relative refractory period, during
which only a larger than normal stimulus will
produce a response. Full recovery is normally
complete in about 10 to 15 milliseconds, when the
threshold potential has returned to its original
value.
Termination of the action potential involves the
membrane potential returning to its resting value.
The membrane potential typically decreases
towards resting, overshoots, and returns to
baseline during the relative refractory period.
During the overshoot, the magnitude of the
membrane potential is somewhat greater than the Figure 4.2
normal 70 mV and the membrane is described as being hyperpolarized. Refractory periods for a
Hyperpolarization and refractoriness following an action potential lasts for 10 to 15 nerve fibre.
milliseconds in large diameter sensory and motor neurones. For smaller diameter
fibres, the refractory period is longer. This is associated with the observation that the
firing rates of smaller diameter fibres are typically less than those of larger diameter
fibres.
Accommodation
Three characteristics of an electrical impulse influence its ability to stimulate nerve
fibres:
* the size or amplitude of the pulse,
* the width or duration of the pulse, and
* the rate of change (or rise) of the pulse.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 67

The size or amplitude of the pulse is clearly important in that the


larger the pulse, the more rapidly the nerve fibre will reach
threshold. The width or duration of the pulse is also important in
that the longer the pulse duration, the more time is available for
the fibre to reach threshold.

Figure 4.3
The effect of stimulus rise-time on
action potential production. (a) short
stimulus rise-time, (b) lower rate of
rise of the stimulus and (c) very low
rise time.

The rate of change (or rise) of the pulse is important because, in


general, a stimulus pulse which rises slowly to its maximum
value is less effective than a sudden sharp pulse, other things
being equal. If a slow rising pulse is used then the minimum
amplitude needed to elicit an action potential will be greater. This
happens because the nerve fibre is able to accommodate to a
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 68

slow change in potential. Indeed, if the pulse rises at a sufficiently low rate, no nerve
impulse will be generated. The effect of accommodation is illustrated in figure 4.3. In
figure 4.3(a) the pulse rise-time is short and threshold is reached before any
appreciable change in threshold potential occurs. In 4.3(b) the pulse increases at a
faster rate than the threshold potential so threshold is reached after several
milliseconds. In 4.3(c) the pulse rises at the same rate as the threshold potential and
so does not 'catch up' and cannot generate an action potential: the nerve fibre has
'accommodated' to the rising stimulus intensity by becoming insensitive to electrical
stimulation.
The refractory period and accommodation both stem from the same basic molecular
process by which the nerve impulse, once generated, is terminated and the Hille (Hille B. Ion Channels
membrane potential returns to the resting value. An explanation involves voltage- of Excitable Membranes.
sensitive 'gates' which control opening and closing of conduction channels in the 2nd Edn. Sinauer Associates.
nerve fibre membrane. 1992) provides a simple,
yet detailed explanation
of the molecular dynamics
STIMULATION OF NORMALLY INNERVATED MUSCLE of an action potential.
When the nerve supply to a muscle or group is intact, transcutaneous electrical
stimulation will normally evoke a motor response - not by a direct effect on the muscle
fibres, but indirectly via excitation of the motor nerve fibres (α-motoneurons). The
reasons for this are twofold. The first is that many muscle fibres are deeply located
and so less likely to be stimulated than those closer to the stimulating electrodes. Transcutaneous electrical
The second, and perhaps more important reason, is that the time constant for stimulation then, particularly
depolarization of a muscle fibre is much greater than that of a nerve fibre. If short with short duration pulses
duration pulses are used, muscle fibres do not have sufficient time to respond. Nerve (durations less than the time
fibres, which have a smaller time constant and depolarize more rapidly, are more constant for muscle fibres),
likely to have sufficient time to reach threshold and fire. preferentially recruits nerve
fibres.
Where to Stimulate?
When the aim of transcutaneous stimulation is to produce a motor response, the
electrodes are normally placed either over the nerve trunk or directly over the muscle
to be stimulated. Stimulation of the nerve trunk is described as 'indirect' and will

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 69

evoke a response from all of the muscles innervated by fibres in the trunk. Stimulation
over the muscle ('direct' stimulation) will preferentially activate just that muscle. For
example, if the femoral nerve is stimulated at the level of the groin, the quadriceps Note that the terms 'direct'
femoris group will be activated. Alternatively, electrodes may be positioned over an and 'indirect' stimulation refer
individual muscle to activate just one member of the quadriceps group. to proximity to the muscle.
Direct stimulation does not
The best response from an individual muscle is obtained if the stimulus is applied at mean that muscle fibres are
a motor point. This is often the region of skin which is over the point where the main stimulated directly but rather
nerve enters the muscle. In the case of deeply placed muscles the motor point is that stimulation is via nerve
usually where the muscle emerges from under cover of the more superficial ones. fibres entering the muscle.
Note, however, that motor point locations are defined as points where a motor
response is most easily produced and such points are determined experimentally.
Thus a particular motor point may not fit either of the above descriptions - for example
it may be simply an area where the nerve is located more superficially.

Electrode Orientation and Size


To stimulate nerve, current must flow through tissue between two electrodes which
are normally positioned so that current flows parallel to the nerve fibres. If the current
flow is at right angles to the fibres, much higher stimulus intensities are required. The
reason is that in order to produce an action potential, current must flow in across the
fibre membrane at one Node of Ranvier, along the fibre and out at an adjacent node.
The amount of current flow depends on the applied potential difference and the
greatest potential difference will be produced between adjacent nodes if the current
flow direction is parallel to the nerve fibre.

A related idea is that action potentials will more readily be generated under the
negative electrode (the cathode) than under the positive electrode (the anode). The
reason for this is as follows. The nerve fibre membrane, in its resting state, is
polarized. The outside is positively charged and the inside, negatively charged. A
potential difference of about 70 mV exists across the membrane. If a stimulus is
applied using two electrodes, the resulting current flow will depolarize the membrane
at one Node of Ranvier while hyperpolarizing the membrane at its neighbour.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 70

Figure 4.4 illustrates the effect. The resting membrane


is positively charged on the outside and negatively
charged on the inside. The membrane also acts as a
capacitor, which can store charge. The flow of current
between anode and cathode increases the positive
charge on the membrane closer to the anode, while
reducing the charge on the membrane closer to the
cathode.

The result is that the potential difference across the


membrane near the anode is increased and the
membrane becomes hyperpolarized. The potential
difference across the membrane near the cathode is
decreased and the membrane becomes less polarized.
When the reduced polarization (i.e. depolarization) is
sufficient, an action potential is generated. Figure 4.4
Current flow between anode and
To enhance the efficiency of stimulation under the cathode, a small cathode produces depolarization under
electrode size can be used. A larger anode helps to ensure that the current the cathode and hyperpolarization
density beneath the electrode is low while the smaller cathode under the anode.
concentrates the current flow and more specifically targets Nodes of
Ranvier closest to this electrode. Under these conditions, the location of
the anode is relatively unimportant as the cathode acts as the 'active'
electrode. The anode acts as an 'indifferent' or 'dispersive' electrode
('dispersive' referring to spreading of the current over a larger area). The
main criterion for the location of the anode is that it should not be located
over an electrically sensitive area such as a motor point or muscle belly.
Sometimes equal size electrodes are used for transcutaneous electrical
stimulation. This is often the case when electrodes are placed over a
muscle belly. The cathode is positioned distally and the anode proximally.
The reason for the 'cathode distal' arrangement is that an action potential
generated near the cathode may not propagate through the region under
the anode. The phenomenon is referred-to as anodal block. The idea is

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 71

that if an action potential is generated at a particular node of Ranvier, it will normally


trigger an action potential at the nodes immediately adjacent. This means that when
the nerve is stimulated electrically, action potentials can propagate in both directions Two-way action potential
along the fibre from the site of stimulation. Propagation in the direction towards the propagation does not
anode, however, will not occur if the adjacent node is kept hyperpolarized by the happen physiologically as
stimulus pulse. If the objective is to elicit a motor response, a cathode distal action potentials are always
arrangement should be used, so that action potential propagation towards the muscle initiated either at a synapse
fibres is not blocked. Conversely, if the objective is stimulation of sensory fibres, or a nerve ending.
where the aim is sensory input to the central nervous system, a cathode proximal
arrangement would be appropriate.
Recruitment and Summation
When muscle fibres are stimulated indirectly, via their nerve supply, the muscle fibres
are activated synchronously because their motoneurons are activated simultan-eously.
Each stimulus pulse activates a proportion of the fibres in the nerve trunk and the
activated fibres evoke a twitch response in the muscle fibres which they innervate.

The number of fibres recruited, and hence the force of the muscle contraction depends
on the stimulus intensity. At low intensities, only a small proportion of the fibres are
recruited. At higher intensities, a greater proportion of the nerve fibres are activated.
Whatever the intensity, the muscle response to transcutaneous electrical nerve
stimulation is critically dependent on the stimulus frequency. At low frequencies (a few
Hz or less), isolated twitches are produced in response to each stimulus pulse. There
is time for the muscle to relax before the next contraction. If the frequency is more than
a few Hz, the muscle fibres do not have time to completely relax between pulses. Each
successive contraction occurs on the tail of the previous one and the peak force is The term 'tetanus' refers to a
greater. With a further increase in the frequency it becomes more difficult to tetanic muscle contraction. It
distinguish the effects of individual stimuli. The twitch responses fuse and the is also used to describe a
contraction becomes stronger still. With most human muscles, at a stimulus pathalogical condition
frequency of about 20 Hz, only small ripples are seen in the force record. This is produced by the toxin of a
described as partial tetany. Between 20 Hz and 50 Hz, the ripples disappear, the bacillus which causes tetanic
contractile force reaches a plateau and the contraction is described as tetanic. muscle contraction.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 72

Figure 4.5 illustrates the effect of a progressive


increase in stimulus frequency on the evoked
muscle response. In this diagram, the frequency
has been ramped from 2 Hz to 50 Hz. Note that at
about 20 Hz, the response is almost tetanic.
Above this frequency complete tetany occurs.
Note also that the tetanic force is about four times
greater than the isolated twitch force.
In the example considered, the fusion frequency
is about 30 Hz. The fusion frequency varies
between muscles and depends on the muscle
fibre types present. In terms of twitch times, two
groups of fibres are distinguished: fast- and
slow-twitch. The contraction time, defined as the Figure 4.5
time from the start of the contraction to peak force, is about 40 ms for human fast- Muscular force produced in
twitch muscle fibres and about 120 ms for slow-twitch fibres. Muscles such as response to short duration
soleus contain mostly (80%) slow twitch fibres. The twitch contraction time is long rectangular pulsed current
and consequently the fusion frequency is low. At the opposite extreme, orbicularis with frequencies in the range
oculi, an eye movement muscle, contains mostly (85%) fast-twitch fibres and the 2 Hz to 50 Hz.
fusion frequency is high. Fusion frequencies can thus vary from less than 20 Hz to
close to 80 Hz. Many human skeletal muscles have roughly equal proportions of slow
and fast-twitch fibres. For example, biceps and triceps brachii are comprised of about
60% fast-twitch fibres, wile the figure for quadriceps is close to 50%.

Effect Of Pulse Duration


Earlier we saw that the characteristics of an electrical impulse which determine its
effectiveness in stimulating nerve fibres were pulse amplitude, duration and rate of
rise. We now examine the first two factors in more detail.
For the stimulation of normally innervated muscle it is customary to use rectangular
pulses of short duration. The reasons for this are as follows:

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 73

* the short rise-time of a rectangular pulse overcomes the problem of accomm-


odation of the nerve fibre membrane.
* some sensory nerves will invariably be stimulated. The sensation associated
with pulses of short duration (less than 1 ms) is less unpleasant than that
associated with a longer pulse duration (above 1 ms).
* for long pulses, only the early part is effective in
stimulating nerve. If the pulse duration is a few
multiples of the skin RC time constant, significant
subcutaneous current flow will only occur at the
beginning and end of the pulse (chapter 3, figure 3.4).

A graph of stimulus strength needed to produce a minimal


muscle contraction against pulse duration is shown in
figure 4.6. The method of obtaining these results is as
follows. Pulses of long duration (usually 100 ms) are
applied to a muscle and the stimulus intensity is increased
until a minimal contraction is obtained. The stimulus
intensity (voltage or current) is then recorded. The pulse
duration is then decreased and the intensity needed for
minimal contraction is again determined. The process is
repeated until enough results are obtained to give a graph
like that shown in figure 4.6.

The graph (the strength-duration curve) is normally plotted


using a logarithmic axis for pulse duration. This magnifies
the region of the curve showing the effect of short pulse
durations and makes interpretation easier.

It is found that pulses of long duration (about 10 ms or


more) produce a muscle contraction with the same voltage Figure 4.6
for all durations. When the duration is decreased below a A strength-duration curve for
certain point (in this example, a little over 1 ms) the normally innervated muscle
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 74

stimulus intensity needed to produce contraction is increased.

The increase in intensity with decreasing pulse duration can be explained in terms of
the electrical properties of the nerve fibre: specifically the capacitance of the nerve fibre
membrane (see chapter 3 previously). To generate an action potential, the
membrane must be depolarized to threshold. That is, the potential difference across
the membrane, the resting potential, must be changed by a certain amount by
charging the capacitative membrane. As figure 3.6 shows, if the pulse duration is
long, the capacitor charges fully. With short duration pulses, the membrane does not
have time to fully charge. However, if a higher voltage is used, the overall current flow
is higher and the membrane potential changes more rapidly. Threshold is
approached more rapidly so a shorter charging period (short duration) is
compensated by a greater charging force (higher voltage pulse).

The plateau above 1 ms in this example relies on two factors: the membrane
capacitance and the skin capacitance. When the pulse duration is long, the skin
capacitance will fully charge and the flow of current through the deeper tissues will
decrease to a negligible amount during the pulse (figure 3.4a). A long duration pulse
also allows time for the membrane capacitor to fully charge, and any additional time
does not produce further charging (figure 3.6a). Once the time has elapsed for both of
these processes to reach a steady state, any further increase in pulse width has a
negligible effect.

Chronaxie and Rheobase


Two important quantities are obtained from the strength-duration curve, the chronaxie
and the rheobase:
* The rheobase is the minimum voltage (or current) which will produce a response
if the stimulus is of infinite duration. In practice a pulse width of 100 ms duration
is used, quite satisfactorily, to assess this.
* The chronaxie is the minimum duration of impulse which will produce a
response with a voltage (or current) of double the rheobase.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 75

In figure 4.6 the rheobase is 25 volts so the chronaxie is


the minimum duration required with a 50 volt stimulus. In
this case the chronaxie is 0.03 ms (see alongside).

Strength-duration curves and their chronaxie and rheobase


values can be used clinically to assess and monitor
muscle which may have suffered damage to its nerve
supply. Strength-duration graphs for denervated muscle
are quite different to those of normally innervated muscle,
as are the chronaxie and rheobase values - but more of
this later.
Effect of Pulse Frequency
We have already described the response of typical skeletal
muscles to nerve impulses of different frequencies. Single
muscle twitches are produced with low frequency stimuli
(less than about 5 per second) and as the frequency
approaches 20 Hz, the twitches summate to produce
partial tetany (see figure 4.5). At some frequency above 20
Hz, a tetanic contraction results. Once a fused, tetanic
contraction is induced, any further increase in stimulus
frequency does not induce any increase in muscle force.
For typical human muscles (which have mixed fibre types
in roughly equal proportions) the fusion frequency is
around 40 Hz. For muscles with a high proportion of fast
twitch fibres, the fusion frequency is higher. For muscles
with a high proportion of slow twitch fibres, the fusion
frequency is lower.
What of stimulation at frequencies above the fusion frequency? At frequencies which
are high enough that successive stimuli arrive within the refractory period, the nerve
fibre response depends on the intensity of the stimulus. Just at threshold, one
stimulus pulse will produce an action potential, the next will not, as the nerve fibre will
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 76

be refractory. Well above threshold, when fibres are stimulated at multiples of their
threshold intensities, firing will occur within the refractory period and the firing rate will
equal the stimulus frequency. It has been demonstrated experimentally that nerve
fibre firing rates up to the limit determined by the absolute refractory period can be
produced by stimulus intensities of only a few times threshold. Thus if the absolute
refractory period is 1 ms, the maximum firing rate would be every millisecond so the
frequency would be 1 kHz. The experimentally determined maximum firing rate of α-
motoneurons is 800 Hz, a value in close agreement with measured absolute
refractory periods.
Nerve fibre firing rates with electrical stimulation can thus be much higher than those
produced physiologically.
In a sustained, weak voluntary contraction, firing rates of 8 - 12 Hz are typical. Lower
firing rates are found with repetitive weak contractions. For a steady, sustained McComas (McComas AJ.
forceful contraction, an upper limit to the firing rate seems to be about 30 Hz in human Skeletal Muscle: Form and
skeletal muscle. These are firing frequencies which result in a partially fused Function. Human Kinetics.
contraction. 1996) provides a wealth of
fascinating information on
How, then, are smooth, controlled voluntary movements possible when low forces are nerve firing frequencies in
involved and the firing rates are very low? Why is it that no twitching or fluttering is different activities.
seen when the firing rates are below the fusion frequency? The answer is that the
activity of different motor units is asynchronous. Although individual motor units may
be firing at low frequency and producing a fluttering, partly fused contraction in
individual muscle fibres, there is no synchronization between different motor units. At
the level of the whole muscle, the total force is the sum of the contributions of all active
motor units so the ripples in force output from each motor unit are smoothed i.e. lost
in the total. By contrast, when muscles are activated electrically, all of the activated
fibres are synchronously activated so smooth contractions are only possible when the
induced firing frequencies are greater than, or equal to, the fusion frequency.
The very large range of force output of which human muscles are capable is only partly
due to variation in nerve firing rates. A second factor which is at least as important is
recruitment. In a weak contraction only a few motor units may be active. In a stronger

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 77

contraction, more motor units are recruited. The gradation in force which all skeletal
muscles exhibit is achieved by a combination of increase in firing rate and increase in
number of motor units recruited. Different skeletal muscles rely to different extents on Larger muscles such as
these two strategies. biceps brachii and deltoid,
which contain a large
With rapid, forceful contractions, initial nerve fibre firing rates can be as high as 100 Hz number of motor units, rely
or so, but this is never sustained. Such rates are only observed at the start of a more on recruitment than
contraction and drop to much lower 'steady' values within a few seconds. With smaller muscles, such as
prolonged effort and fatigue, the maximum steady firing rate might typically drop from adductor pollicis and the first
30 Hz to about half this figure. It is interesting to note that as muscle fibres fatigue, dorsal interosseous muscle.
their twitch duration increases so the associated decrease in firing rate does not
result in a partially fused contraction becoming unfused. Were this to occur, a very
large drop in force would result (figure 4.5). Rather the decrease in firing rate seems
to be balanced by the increase in contraction time.
Fatigue considerations
An observation made very early in the history of electrically induced muscle contraction
is that the rate of fatigue is much greater with electrically induced contractions than
with voluntary contractions of the same magnitude. Two factors contribute to the
difference: the firing rates of the motor units and the number and nature of the motor
units which are recruited.
As discussed previously, in order to produce a smooth, non-twitching motor
response, the frequency of electrical stimuli must be higher than the fusion frequency
of the excited muscle fibres. 50 Hz is a 'ball-park' figure for most skeletal muscles. A
voluntary contraction of the same magnitude would involve lower firing frequencies
and, to compensate, greater recruitment of motor units. The difference is that
physiologically, the load is spread over more motor units which, individually, do not
have to work as hard. The result is a lower rate of fatigue.
The second difference involves different muscle fibre types. Muscle fibres are typed,
as described previously, as fast- or slow-twitch. They are further categorized
according to fatigue resistance where slow, fast-resistant and fast-fatigable fibres are
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 78

distinguished. Fatigue-resistance depends on cellular metabolism. Slow fibres have a


long twitch-force duration and are fatigue-resistant. They rely on aerobic glycolysis for
energy production. Fast-fatigable fibres are designed to produce very high peak
forces for a very short time (from a fraction of a second to a few seconds). They rely on
anaerobic metabolism for peak energy production: an oxygen supply from the
bloodstream is not an immediate concern. Fast-resistant fibres are relatively fatigue
resistant but also have a short twitch-force duration and moderately high peak force.
In a steady or repetitive voluntary contraction it is the slow, highly fatigue-resistant
motor units which are recruited first. For contractile forces up to about 20% of
maximum, slow motor units dominate. Above this level, the contribution of fast-
resistant units increases. Fast-fatigable units are the last to be recruited.
Slow motor units are the smallest in terms of the number of fibres innervated by an Henemann et al, in 1965,
individual motoneuron and also in terms of the motoneuron diameter. Fast-resistant proposed the size principle of
motor units are larger and the motoneuron diameters are larger. Fast-fatigable units motoneuron recruitment
are the largest on both counts. Clearly it is optimal to have small motor units with based upon their own
long twitch times and low fusion frequencies used for weak contractions. In this way, experimental work and that of
an unsteady twitching contraction is avoided. others. The principle states
that with increasing contractile
The order of recruitment described above applies to steady or repetitive contractions. force, recruitment proceeds in
In sudden movements, fast-fatigable units are activated at the beginning of the an orderly fashion from
movement. These units fire very few action potentials in a single high-frequency smallest to largest
burst. This produces a high peak force with a rapid initial rate of increase, such as motoneuron diameter.
would be needed to produce a sudden, brief acceleration of a limb segment.

With electrical stimulation, the pattern of recruitment is very different to that which
occurs physiologically. Two factors determine the order of recruitment: proximity to the
stimulating electrode and nerve fibre diameter.
Fibres closer to the stimulating electrode will experience a higher stimulation intensity
than those further away. This is because current spreads within the tissue, resulting
in a decrease in intensity. Close to the electrodes, spreading is minimal and the
current density is highest. With increasing distance, the current density decreases.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 79

The current density, i, is given by the formula

I
i = ...... (4.1)
A

where I is the current (in amperes) and A the area


through which the current passes (in square
metres). The units of current density are thus
amperes per square metre (A.m-2).
Close to the electrodes the current density will be
greatest: approximately I/Ao, where Ao is the area
of the electrode (figure 4.7). Further from the
electrodes the area A through which the current
passes is larger than Ao so the current density is
less.
Figure 4.7
Fibre diameter is important because the distance The spreading of current
between adjacent nodes of Ranvier is greater for larger diameter fibres. Histological within a volume conductor
measurements show that the distance between nodes is directly proportional to nerve
fibre diameter. As stated previously, initiation of an action potential relies on
producing a potential difference between adjacent nodes. The greater the distance
between the nodes, the greater will be the potential difference for a given stimulus
intensity applied to the tissue.

Larger diameter nerve fibres then, are more easily recruited than those of smaller
diameter. This means that for nerve fibres at a certain distance from the stimulating
electrode, the order of recruitment will be the reverse of that which occurs
physiologically. The largest diameter fibres, which innervate fast-fatigable motor units
which have the highest fusion frequencies, will be recruited first.
The effect of electrode-to-nerve-fibre distance means that the reverse recruitment
order will not be followed exactly, but fast-fatigable motor units will contribute
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 80

disproportionately to an electrically induced contraction. A consequence is that a high


stimulus frequency is needed to achieve a smooth, fused response and this inevitably
induces a high rate of fatigue.

STIMULATION OF DENERVATED MUSCLE


Even though a muscle may have lost its motor nerve supply it is possible to stimulate
the fibres directly. The effect of electrical stimuli on muscle fibre and on nerve is
similar: the potential difference across the muscle fibre membrane is reduced and
this results in a wave of excitation which propagates along the fibre and is transmitted
into the interior of the muscle fibre via the transverse tubule (T-tubule) system.
Depolarization of the T-tubules triggers the calcium ion release which results in
contraction of the fibre.
There are three main differences between the response of innervated and denervated
muscle to electrical stimulation. One difference is in the type of contraction produced
and the others are in the effects of pulse shape and duration:
* The contraction and subsequent relaxation of denervated muscle is more
sluggish than innervated muscle. This is mainly due to the absence of
synchronization in stimulation of the muscle fibres.
* Denervated muscle shows a much less marked accommodation effect than
nerve. Thus it is not necessary to use short duration, rectangular pulses for
stimulation. An impulse which rises slowly in intensity can depolarize the
muscle fibre membrane. For this reason impulses having, for example,
sawtooth, trapezoidal or triangular shape and long duration are effective in
stimulating denervated muscle. Such pulses are termed selective because it is
possible to adjust the pulse duration and intensity for adequate stimulation of
denervated muscle with minimal stimulation of nearby intact nerve fibres.
* Denervated muscle is relatively insensitive to short duration stimuli. This
important point is discussed next.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 81

Effect of Pulse Duration


The much smaller accommodation effect with denervated
muscle compared to nerve results in longer pulses being
more effective for stimulating denervated muscle.
However, short duration pulses are considerably less
effective. These experimental observations are illustrated
in figure 4.8, which shows a strength-duration curve typical
of completely denervated muscle.
The graph shows that painfully high voltages must be used
to stimulate denervated muscle if the duration is short. In
contrast, if long duration pulses are used only low voltages
are needed. In this particular example, comparison with
figure 4.6 shows a greater sensitivity for denervated
muscle to pulses of duration above 50 ms. The increased
sensitivity to long pulse duration stimuli is typical of
recently denervated muscle. The lack of neural input
apparently causes an increased sensitivity of the muscle
fibre membrane. The increase may be the result of normal
control mechanisms whereby the muscle fibre adapts-to or
compensates-for changes in neural activity.
Effect of Pulse Frequency Figure 4.8
A strength-duration curve for
We saw previously that for frequencies above about 100 Hz, the higher the frequency completely denervated muscle
the less efficient pulses are for direct stimulation of nerve fibres. Similar behaviour
is observed when muscle is stimulated directly, though the frequencies concerned
are different, as is the explanation of the effect. For stimulus frequencies above
about 10 Hz the sensitivity of denervated muscle decreases with the effect becoming
quite marked at frequencies above 50 Hz.
A simple explanation for this behaviour is evident from the strength-duration graph of
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 82

denervated muscle. From figure 4.8 we see that for pulse durations below 100 ms
the stimulus intensity needed for contraction begins to increase. For a pulse duration
of 100 ms the pulse frequency cannot exceed 1/(100 ms) = 1/(0.1 s) = 10 Hz. This The effect of stimulus
would allow no 'rest' time between stimuli. As the frequency is increased above 10 Hz frequency then is somewhat
the pulse duration must inevitably decrease if there is to be any separation between simpler to explain than for
the pulses. One pulse must finish before the next one is applied. nerve fibre stimulation, where
the effects of accommodation
To charge the muscle fibre membrane enough to depolarize it, the stimulus intensity and pulses applied within the
needs to be increased if the pulse duration is decreased. The membrane capacitor relative refractory period are
must be charged by a certain amount to trigger depolarization. This can be achieved needed to account for the
by a long duration pulse of relatively low intensity or a shorter duration pulse of higher observed variation in
intensity. Charge movement is the critical factor, as with nerve fibres, but the time- sensitivity.
frames are very different.

SENSORY, MOTOR AND PAIN RESPONSES


So far the focus has been on the motor response to electrical stimulation. In reality,
the forcefulness of the motor response will be limited by pain. Pain can be a direct
result of the muscle contraction or can be due to stimulation of pain fibres
(nocioceptive afferent nerve fibres) by the electrical stimulus. Clearly, if pain is
produced as a result of the forcefulness of the muscle contraction, more efficient
electrical stimulation will not enhance the motor response. On the other hand, if
noxious electrical stimulation is the limiting factor, stimuli which preferentially recruit
motor (A-α) fibres ahead of pain (A-δ and C) fibres will be more effective. Fortunately,
a degree of selectivity can be achieved by appropriate choice of pulse duration. The
reason is that α-motoneurons and pain fibres have a different range of diameters and
different strength-duration behaviour.
α-motoneurons have the largest diameters (range 12-20 µm), the largest internodal α -motoneurons are
spacing (distance between adjacent nodes of Ranvier) and consequently, the lowest intrinsically more sensitive to
thresholds for electrical stimulation. The range of diameters of sensory fibres (A-α electrical stimulation than the
afferents, diameters 6-17 µm) overlaps with that of α-motoneurons, making it virtually smaller diameter A-δ and C
impossible to elicit a motor response without also electrically activating sensory fibres.
fibres. When stimulation is applied transcutaneously, a sensory response is, more

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 83

often than not, elicited before a motor response. The reason is that although motor
fibres have, on average, larger diameters, they are located more deeply. Sensory
fibres are in abundance near the skin surface and so will inevitably be closer to the A motor response is elicited
electrodes. In other words, the effect of current spreading with depth tips the balance first in some individuals. This
to favour sensory fibre activation before motoneuron activation in most individuals. can happen when the person
has a low skinfold thickness
Pain fibres are also found in abundance near the skin surface. If this was the whole i.e. a very thin layer of
story then one would expect a painful sensation before a motor response. That this subcutaneous adipose
seldom occurs is due to the fact that A-δ and C fibres are less sensitive to electrical tissue. The motor response
stimulation than the larger diameter sensory and motor nerve fibres. inevitably produces a sensory
response, but this is a result
Suppose then that skin surface electrodes are attached to a subject and stimuli of of the muscle activity rather
increasing intensity are applied. Three distinct responses may be obtained, each than electrical activation of
response having a different threshold for its onset. As the stimulus intensity is sensory fibres.
increased the first response normally noticed is sensory. The subject perceives the
electrical stimulation before any muscular response is elicited. A further increase in
intensity is needed for the onset of a motor response. This is followed, at higher
intensities, by the subject reporting a sensation of pain. The sequence of responses
and their separation in terms of the intensity required, depend on four factors: the
placement of electrodes, the electrode size, the stimulus pulse width and the
stimulus frequency.
* Electrode placement is important in that to obtain a pronounced motor response
without pain the electrodes should be over a motor point or region where the
motor nerve is located superficially. Conversely, if the aim is to produce sensory
fibre stimulation with no motor response (as would be appropriate for pain
control), motor points and nerve trunks should be avoided.

* The electrode size should be as large as possible to avoid concentrating the


current in a small superficial region. Current spreads as it enters tissue and the
greatest spreading is produced near the edges of the electrodes. Near the
electrode centre the spreading is less. By using a large electrode the central
part, where current spreading is least, covers a larger deep tissue area (see
figure 4.9).
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 84

* The stimulus pulse width should be


sufficiently small. Experimentally it has been
shown that best discrimination between
sensory, motor and pain responses is
achieved using relatively narrow stimulus
pulses. This point is discussed further below.
* The stimulus frequency would be expected to
influence discrimination because the nerve
fibres associated with sensory, motor and
pain responses have different refractory
periods. To date, no studies of discrimination
as a function of frequency appear to have been
published.

Effect of Pulse Duration Figure 4.9


The effect of electrode size on
The differences in electrical characteristics of nerve fibre types and their different current density in tissue. (a) small
depths of location in tissue results in separate strength-duration curves for electrodes, greater spreading of
sensory, motor and pain responses. current, (b) larger electrodes, more
uniform current density
Consider first the effect of fibre type and consequently fibre diameter. Other things
being equal, the observation is that the strength-duration curve is shifted to the
right (to longer pulse durations) for smaller diameter fibres. The smaller the fibre
diameter, the larger is the chronaxie. This is another way of saying that the The graphs shown in figure
smaller the fibre diameter, the larger is the associated RC time-constant. Figure 4.10(a) are based on animal
4.10(a) illustrates the differences in strength-duration curves of different diameter studies. There are greater
nerve fibres. The results apply to nerve which is stimulated directly using surgical ethical problems associated
intervention. On this basis we would predict a recruitment order of motor then with human experimentation
sensory then pain fibres, with the sensory fibres recruited almost as soon as the using the same design, so
motor fibres. such studies have not been
carried-out.
As noted previously, with transcutaneous stimulation, depth in tissue also affects

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 85

the threshold for nerve excitation. This is because of current spreading and a
consequent reduction in the local stimulus intensity. Superficially located fibres are
therefore recruited at lower stimulus intensities. Figure 4.10(b) shows measurements
obtained with human subjects and transcutaneous electrical stimulation.

Figure 4.10
Note the horizontal axis (time) scale. In this figure the pulse widths are Strength-duration curves for (a) different
measured in microseconds (µs) and not milliseconds as have been nerve fibre types, with the nerve trunk
previously used to describe action potentials and the subsequent exposed and stimulated directly and (b)
refractory period. Here we are dealing with pulse widths which are sensory, motor and pain thresholds
small compared to the time-course of an action potential. measured using transcutaneous stimulation.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 86

Two things are apparent from figure 4.10(b). First, that in reality the order of
recruitment is usually sensory, then motor, then pain at all pulse durations when
current is applied transcutaneously. Second, that as we go to shorter pulse durations
the separation between the curves increases.

The separation due to fibre diameter is most marked in figure 4.10(a) and indicates
that with direct nerve stimulation, by using sufficiently short pulse durations (around The results shown in figure
500 µs), the small diameter C fibres will not be stimulated at intensities which very 4.10(a) indicate that, with
effectively recruit the larger A-δ, A-β and A-α fibres. A shorter pulse durations (around surgically implanted
50 µs), neither C nor A-δ fibres will be stimulated at intensities which efficiently recruit electrodes, very good
A-β and A-α fibres. This indicates that as one goes to smaller pulse widths, the ease discrimination between nerve
of discrimination between sensory and motor responses on the one hand, and pain fibre types can be achieved
responses on the other, is increased. by choice of an optimal pulse
width.
The extent of discrimination evident with transcutaneous stimulation is less. As figure
4.10(b) shows, the sensory, motor and pain threshold graphs are more overlapped
and the variation occurs at smaller pulse widths. This is because the measured
response depends not just on the fibre type (and the associated diameter) but also
two other factors: the depth of the fibres within tissue and the electrical characteristics The pain threshold graph in
of the skin and underlying tissues. The capacitative nature of the stratum corneum figure 4.10(b) should not be
means that longer duration pulses are not more effective for nerve stimulation identified with the A-δ and C
(whatever the fibre type) as the current flow in tissue beneath the stratum corneum is fibre graphs. Very little
transient (figure 3.4). Spikes in the current flow are produced at the start and end of contribution would be made
long duration pulses and increasing the pulse width does not result in a longer by C fibres. Rather, A-δ fibre
duration flow of current in tissue. Thus C fibres are not as more readily recruited at activity and the pain
longer pulse durations as would be expected from figure 4.10(a). Nor are A-δ fibres, associated with a forceful
though the effect is less. The result is a plateau in the transcutaneous sensory, motor muscle contraction would
and pain threshold graphs at a pulse width much less than in figure 4.10(a). determine pain thresholds.
The observations regarding the effect of pulse width have important practical
implication for therapy, and the results shown in figure 4.10(b) are most relevant. If
long duration pulse widths are used then only small changes in intensity will be
needed to change from a sensory response to a motor or pain response. By contrast,

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 87

if short duration pulses are used, much larger changes in intensity will be needed to
recruit motor and pain fibres. If the objective is to produce a sensory response with
minimal motor or pain responses then short duration pulses are preferred (less than
50 µs from figure 4.10a or perhaps 'the shorter, the better' from figure 4.10b). Short
duration pulses will also be capable of producing an effective motor response with
minimum pain sensation. It is for this reason that modern electronic stimulators
produce higher voltage, shorter duration pulses than their predecessors.
A question arising from the foregoing discussion is whether very short pulses, around
2 to 10 µs duration, will give better discrimination with transcutaneous stimulation
than, say, 20 µs pulses. The evidence certainly indicates that pulses of duration in the
range 20 to 50 µs will more effectively discriminate than pulses with duration greater
than 100 µs. It is not known whether this trend continues to very short pulse
durations. Further research is needed before any firm conclusions can be drawn.

STIMULATION USING SINUSOIDAL AC


Sinusoidal alternating current has been used for patient treatment almost since
devices for producing AC were first marketed in the late 1800s. It was soon
established that low frequency AC produced noxious stimulation while AC in the kHz
frequency range could produce strong muscle contractions without the degree of
noxious stimulation associated with lower frequencies.

The French scientist Arsène d'Arsonval studied the effect of AC stimulation on nerve
and muscle, both using dissected animals and by transcutaneous stimulation of
human subjects. He used an alternator, the first device built for generating AC and the On the basis of his work,
one which is used in every modern-day motor car. An alternator works on the principle d'Arsonval described the
that if a coil of wire is made to spin in a stationary magnetic field, alternating current is electric chair, recently
produced in the coil. d'Arsonval reported in 1891 that with increasing frequency, the adopted in New York state for
neuromuscular response to sinusoidal AC becomes stronger up to about 1400 Hz, is criminal executions, as
constant between 1500 and 2500 Hz and decreases to 5,000 Hz. He also reported 'barbarous and unholy' as the
that a current of 1500 Hz is more painful than 5,000 Hz but much less painful than voltage chosen was too low
currents of 75 and 20 Hz. (1500 V) and death is slow.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 88

d'Arsonval's observations of transcutaneous stimulation using human subjects and


sinusoidal AC laid the foundations for the use of kHz frequency AC in clinical practice.
Sinusoidal AC stimulation has figured in clinical practice since the 1950s when a
German physician, Hans Nemec, began advocating 'Interferential Currents' as a The Nemectrodyne
means of producing comfortable, pain-free, muscle contractions and 'promoting interferential stimulator was
tissue healing'. More recently, the use of interferential currents for pain control has the first on the market and
been advocated. Interferential currents used clinically are sinusoidal AC with the company continues to
frequencies around 4 or 5 kHz. sucessfully market
interferential units.
More than two decades after the introduction of interferential currents, 'Russian
currents' became popular, principally due to the claims made by a Russian physician,
Yakov Kots, in the late 1970s. Kots claimed that kHz frequency AC, modulated at 50
Hz with a 1:1 duty cycle, could produce large strength gains in stimulated muscle. He
based his claims on studies made with young Russian athletes as subjects: athletes
who were hoping to qualify for the Olympic games. Russia's success in the Olympics
and the intense competitiveness which existed at the time seems to have given
weight to Kots' claims. Kots argued that an optimal AC frequency for muscle
strengthening, one which produced maximal force at the pain-tolerance threshold,
was 2.5 kHz if the muscle was stimulated directly (with the active electrode over the
muscle) or 1 kHz if the muscle was stimulated indirectly (with the active electrode over
the nerve trunk supplying the muscle).
Both Russian currents and Interferential currents continue to be used in clinical
practice. Interferential currents are popular in England, Europe and Australia. Diadynamic currents have all
Russian currents are, somewhat paradoxically in the light of political relations post but disappeared from clinical
world war two, more popular in the USA. practice and will not be
discussed here. Details can
Stimulation with low frequency AC is seldom used nowadays. It is particularly painful. be found in older texts e.g.
Nonetheless, it did experience some popularity in Europe in earlier decades. A the 2nd (1986) edition of
particular form of low-frequency AC stimulation, called 'Diadynamic current' was Electricity, Fields and Waves
popularized in Europe. The argument seems to have been that the discomfort in Therapy'.
associated with the stimulation had therapeutic benefits resulting from a counter-
irritant effect.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 89

Low Frequency Alternating Current


The term low frequency AC as applied in therapy relates to frequencies
between about 1 Hz and 100 Hz. A sinusoidal current is, in effect, a
continuous train of current pulses. For example, 50 Hz AC has one
complete cycle every 1/50th of a second or 20 milliseconds. The 20 ms
sinewave has a rounded 10 ms positive pulse followed by a rounded 10
ms negative pulse. The stimulus is therefore a series of 10 ms pulses.

As noted previously, a pulse width of 10 ms results in little discrimination


between sensory, motor and pain thresholds. Smaller diameter pain
fibres are recruited at thresholds not much above those of the larger
sensory and motor fibres (figure 4.10b).

As the waveform does not have an abrupt rise, some nerve fibre
accommodation will occur meaning that a greater current intensity will be
needed to produce the same response as a 10 millisecond rectangular
pulse. The effect of accommodation is greater in large diameter nerve
fibres so there is dropout of their contribution if sinewaves rather than
square waves are used. This means that there will be less stimulation of
large (A-α and A-β) fibres with low frequency AC and, relatively, more
contribution of smaller (A-δ) fibres.
The pulse duration will result in stimulation which is both superficial and relatively
non-discriminatory between sensory, motor and pain responses. Thus if the aim of
therapy is to stimulate superficially and to produce, say, modest muscle contraction
together with stimulation of pain fibres, or simply painful stimulation, then 50 Hz
sinusoidal AC or one of its variants is a logical choice.
Unsurged 50 Hz AC is sometimes used for a counter irritant effect. Counter-irritation
has been dismissed as treating a patient with a sore right thumb by hitting the
opposite, left thumb and producing more pain. Suddenly, the patient finds the right
thumb more comfortable! The point which is ignored in this simplistic argument is
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 90

whether the pain relief persists, in which case counter-irritation stimulation is


vindicated. Unfortunately, no properly documented studies seem to have addressed
this question. Low frequency AC might thus have some potential in clinical practice.
The evidence base has yet to be established.
Medium Frequency Alternating Current
Medium frequency alternating currents are defined as currents in the frequency range
1 kHz to 100 kHz. Above 100 kHz, alternating current is not able to excite nerve fibres Alternating current at high
and the only effect is one of tissue heating. Currents above 100 kHz are classified as (>100 kHz) frequencies does
'high frequency'. have a part to play in
physiotherapy, but not
In clinical practice, currents with frequencies between 1 kHz and 10 kHz are commonly transcutaneous electrical
used. Frequencies above 10 kHz are not. The reason is that above 10 kHz or so, the nerve stimulation. Rather the
nerve fibre response diminishes while the power dissipated in tissue increases. At tissue-heating effects are
frequencies above 10 kHz, nerve sensitivity becomes lower while the electrical energy exploited. This is discussed
dissipated in tissue, and consequently the heating rate, increases. 10 kHz to 100 kHz in the later topic 'Fields'.
is evidently the transition zone between direct electrical stimulation and tissue
heating.

As noted previously, nerve-fibre firing rates are well below 100 Hz during most
voluntary activities, including strenuous exercise and generally less than a few tens of
Hz on a sustained basis. With electrical stimulation at higher frequencies and
sufficiently high intensity, firing rates approaching 1 kHz can be produced. The
absolute refractory period places the limit on the maximum firing rate.

If nerve is stimulated with AC at frequencies above 1 kHz, action potentials are


produced with every second, third or fourth succeeding AC pulse. The fibre firing rate
will thus be a sub-multiple of the AC frequency. If, for example, 4 kHz AC is used, the
induced firing rate might be 100 Hz at intensities just above threshold. In this case the
firing rate is determined by the relative refractory period. At higher intensities, higher
firing rates are induced as action potentials are produced during the relative refractory
period. At the highest intensities the firing rate might approach 1 kHz i.e. fibres firing
immediately after the absolute refractory period.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 91

With AC stimulus frequencies above 10 kHz or so, the physiological response of nerve
fibres become less and less while the power dissipated, and heating rate, become Higher frequency AC (above
larger and larger. The decreased nerve fibre response is because the membrane 10 kHz) thus has less direct
capacitor has less and less time to charge during a pulse, so less depolarization is effect on the nerve-fibre
produced. The higher tissue heating rate is because skin impedance decreases with membrane and more effect
increasing frequency (chapter 3 previously) so the current flow is higher for a given on the sensory receptors
stimulus voltage and the power dissipation is correspondingly higher. which detect heat.
INTERFERENTIAL CURRENTS

Hans Nemec popularized interferential currents in the


1950s. Although Nemec published a number of
articles describing and reporting on the effect of
interferential currents, these were in German. Only
one English language article exists. It was translated
from German and published in the British Journal of
Physiotherapy in 1959. In it, Nemec described
interferential currents and made claims of therapeutic
benefits. The claims, judged in terms of modern
criteria, were inappropriately speculative i.e. were not
adequately documented. They are, however,
intriguing and not without some credence. Here we
focus on the less speculative aspects.
An interferential stimulator has two separate,
electrically isolated circuits for applying current to the
patient. The currents are applied using two diagonally
opposed pairs of electrodes as shown in figure 4.11.
The idea is that the two currents 'interfere' within the
tissue volume, reinforcing each other and producing a
greater effect at depth than would be possible using a
single circuit. In the region of intersection (the cross- Figure 4.11
hatched area in figure 4.11), the resultant intensity is Application of interferential currents
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 92

high as it is the sum of the contributions of each current.


Each circuit (A and B) supplies an AC signal of constant amplitude to the patient. If
current spreading is not great, as is assumed in figure 4.11, the region of maximum
stimulation is the cross-hatched area (the region of diamond shapes) in figure 4.11.
This contrasts with the regions of maximum stimulation when only one circuit is used.
In this case maximum stimulation is produced immediately under the electrodes.
Figure 4.12 illustrates the difference.
In practice, current spreading will
make the difference shown in figure
4.12 less marked. The
superimposition of the two currents
will, however, help to counteract the
reduction in stimulus intensity with
depth, thus increasing the depth
efficiency of stimulation.
The original interferential machines
produced a sinusoidal waveform
with a frequency around 4 kHz: thus
the stimulus pulse width was
1/8000 sec or 125 µs. Some
modern machines offer a choice of
AC frequencies and use a
rectangular pulsed AC waveform,
rather than a sinewave. There is some evidence that a rectangular pulsed waveform Figure 4.12
is more comfortable than its sinusoidal counterpart and also evidence that optimal Depth efficiency of (a) bipolar
comfortable stimulation is achieved at a frequency of about 9 kHz. and (b) quadripolar stimulation.
Beat or Modulation Frequencies
A key feature of interferential currents is that the two circuits produce current of slightly
different frequency. The difference is normally between 1 Hz and 150 Hz. When

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 93

applied to the patient the two currents interfere and produce a 'beating' effect in the
patient's tissue. The interference or 'beat frequency' effect is illustrated in figure 4.13.
Figures 4.13(a) and (b) show two sinusoidal waveforms applied to the patient via
diagonally opposing pairs of electrodes as shown in figure 4.11. The total current at a
particular point in the patient's tissue is the sum of the currents from each pair of
electrodes. At points where the two currents are of equal amplitude the sum of the two
signals will be an AC waveform which is amplitude modulated as shown in 4.13(c).

Figure 4.13
The surge or modulation frequency is equal to the difference in frequency of the two Interference of two sinusoidal
currents. The frequency, f, of waveform (a) might be 4000 Hz and the frequency (f-δ) currents of different frequency.
of waveform (b) might be 4000-10 = 3990 Hz. In this case the value of δ, the
modulation frequency is 10 Hz.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 94

To make clear which frequency we are talking about, the


terms 'carrier frequency' and 'beat frequency' are used. In
this example, the carrier frequency is 3995 Hz and the beat
frequency is 10 Hz.
In figure 4.13, the currents are assumed to be of equal
amplitude. In regions of tissue where the two currents are
not the same size, an interference effect will still be
produced, but the resulting waveform will not drop to zero
midway between the maxima. Figure 4.14 shows the effect
of adding two currents of slightly different frequency when
one current is twice as big as the other. An interference
effect is still produced but the depth of modulation of the
waveform is less.
Figure 4.14
Depth Efficiency and Localization Interference of two sinusoidal
currents of different frequency
As noted earlier in this chapter, for maximum stimulation efficiency, current should and different amplitude.
flow parallel to the nerve fibres when there is a single current flow through tissue.
When there are two intersecting currents of equal amplitude, maximum stimulation
occurs along lines midway between the current paths. The reason is that the net
current flow is the vector sum of the two currents.

Consider first the situation where two current pathways are at right angles and the
currents are equal. Nerve fibres aligned parallel to one of the current pathways will
experience an unmodulated AC stimulus as shown in figure 4.13(a) or (b). Fibres
aligned along lines midway between the current paths will experience a modulated
stimulus (figure 4.13(c)) of higher intensity. Those fibres aligned in other directions
will experience a partially modulated stimulus, similar to figure 4.14, with a depth of
modulation which depends on the fibre orientation.
Figure 4.15 shows the net current flow in different directions for the simple
configuration in figure 4.11. The length of the black arrows is proportional to the

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 95

current intensity. In the horizontal and


vertical directions, the net current is
maximum and the modulation is 100%.
In directions at 45 o , there is no
modulation and the intensity is some
30% lower.

The pattern of stimulation is clearly more


complex with interferential currents than
with current applied using a single pair of
electrodes. We can, however, draw some
important conclusions:
* nerve fibres aligned in directions
which bisect the angle between the
current pathways (horizontally and
vertically in figure 4.15) will Figure 4.15
experience the greatest stimulation The variation in current intensity
intensity and the stimulus will be a and amount of modulation
modulated AC signal. with direction when using
interferential currents.
* fibres aligned parallel to the direction of the individual current flows will
experience a lower, but still relatively high, stimulation intensity. The stimulating
current will not be modulated.

* nerve fibre firing rates will be much higher than with stimulation using single
pulses applied at low frequency. Fibres aligned parallel to the direction of the
individual current flows will fire at a rate determined by how far above threshold
is the local stimulation intensity.

* Fibres aligned in directions which bisect the angle between the current
pathways will fire in bursts. The bursts of activity will be at the beat frequency
and the number of action potentials per burst will depend on how far above
threshold is the local stimulation intensity.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 96

A widespread misconception is that with interferential currents, the nerve fibre firing
frequency is equal to the beat frequency. This would only be the case for fibres
stimulated at, or just above, their threshold. As noted previously, for stimulation
intensities above threshold, nerve fibres will fire at much higher rates. When the
stimulus intensity is modulated at low frequency, nerve fibres will fire in bursts, with
each 'beat' of the current intensity. The beat frequency only determines the burst
frequency of the action potentials. The number of action potentials per burst
depends on how far the stimulus intensity is above threshold.

Thus if a beat frequency of 50 Hz is chosen to produce repetitive, forceful muscle


contractions, the rate of fatigue will be higher than if 50 Hz single-pulses were used
as the average firing rate will be much higher.
Another widespread misconception about interferential currents is that the pattern of
stimulation is in the shape of a clover-leaf (a four-leafed clover) rather than the
rounded-diamond shape shown in figures 4.11, 4.12 and 4.15. The misconception
seems to have originated from the idea that nerve fibres are insensitive to an
unmodulated AC stimulus i.e. that modulation at low ('biological') frequencies is
necessary to produce a physiological response. Were this true, then fibres aligned
parallel to the current paths (figure 4.15) would not be excited while those aligned
along lines bisecting the angle between the current paths would be excited
maximally. The pattern of stimulation would have four lobes, each lobe pointing to a
corner of the rounded diamond shape.
In fact, the clover-leaf pattern shows the areas of maximum interference, not
maximum stimulation. The pattern applies to every small diamond shaped
segment in the region of interference. It indicates the direction in which the stimulus
intensity is greatest. It does not, in any way, represent the area of maximum
stimulation. Within each diamond-shaped segment, a clover-leaf pattern can be
drawn, showing the directions of maximum interference: in other words, the
directions in which nerve fibres must be aligned to experience maximum
stimulation. A misleading implication of the pattern is that no stimulation is
produced if the nerve fibres are aligned along either of the current paths.

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 97

Premodulated Interferential Current


Most interferential machines make provision for stimulation using either two pairs or a
single pair of electrodes. Two pairs are needed for true interferential stimulation. The
term 'premodulated interferential current' refers to a current waveform as shown in
figure 4.13(c), which is produced inside the interferential machine and applied to the
patient using a single pair of electrodes. 'Premodulated interferential' is thus
something of a misnomer, as there are no currents interfering in tissue.
Premodulated current has the advantage that it is easier to apply, as only two
electrodes are needed. The disadvantage is that there is no reinforcing at depth so
maximum stimulation is produced immediately beneath the electrodes (figure
4.12(a)).

RUSSIAN CURRENTS
Russian currents are a particular form of
electrical stimulation which became
popular as a result of a talk given by Dr Y M
Kots of the Central Institute of Physical
Culture, Moscow, at a conference hosted
by Concordia University, Montreal in 1977.
He claimed strength gains of up to 40% in
elite athletes as a result of this form of
electrical stimulation.
The term 'Russian currents' refers to
sinusoidal AC of frequency 2.5 kHz which
is burst-modulated at 50 Hz. The wave-
form is shown in figure 4.16. It consists of Figure 4.16
10 ms bursts of AC separated by 10 ms Russian currents: 2.5 kHz
'off' periods. The waveform repeats every sinusoidal AC, burst
20 ms (1/50th sec) so the burst or modulated at 50 Hz i.e. 10 ms
modulation frequency is 50 Hz. 'on' and 10 ms 'off'.
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 98

Kots and co-workers measured the maximum force which could be elicited using AC
in the frequency range 100 Hz to 5 kHz. Current was applied either using either two
equal-sized electrodes placed over the muscle belly (referred-to as 'direct' stimulation)
or using a small 'active' electrode over the nerve trunk supplying the muscle and a
larger 'indifferent' electrode placed elsewhere, so as to avoid excitable tissue
(referred-to as 'indirect' stimulation). They established that maximal force at the pain-
tolerance threshold was obtained at 2.5 kHz if the muscle was stimulated directly or 1
kHz if the muscle was stimulated indirectly.

Kots also advocated a '10/50/10' treatment regime i.e. 10 seconds of stimulation


followed by a 50 second rest period, repeated 10 times. His argument was that to
produce strengthening, the electrical stimulation should be non-fatiguing. He
reported that with intense stimulation for periods over 10 sec, fatigue is evident,
whereas no force decline is seen if the duration is 10 sec or less. To avoid a force
decline from one 10 sec stimulation period to the next, a rest period of 50 sec is
needed. If this rest period is allowed, no force decline is seen over the 10 repeats.

The validity of Kots' argument for the '10/50/10' treatment regime is questionable. The
quoted findings were obtained using low frequency monophasic pulsed current, not
kHz frequency AC. With AC bursts, the nerve firing rates would be expected to be
higher and, as a consequence, the rate of fatigue would be higher. The strength
gains reported by Kots are supportive, but whether the '10/50/10' treatment regime is
optimal with AC burst stimulation remains open to question.

EXERCISES
1 Briefly explain what is meant by the following terms:
(a) threshold potential
(b) absolute refractory period
(c) relative refractory period
(d) hyperpolarization

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 99

2 What is meant by the term 'accommodation' as applied to nerve fibres? Explain


the significance of accommodation as far as stimulation by very low frequency AC
is concerned.

3 Consider the strength-duration curve shown in figure 4.6. Explain why:


(a) greater stimulus amplitudes are needed to elicit a muscle contraction
when very short pulses (less than about 0.1 ms) are used.
(b) a muscle contraction is produced with the same stimulus voltage for all
values of pulse duration above a few milliseconds.

4 It is observed that the sensitivity of nerve fibres to stimuli changes as the


stimulus frequency is increased above about 100 Hz.
(a) Describe the change and briefly explain why it occurs.
(b) Why does the effect become more pronounced at frequencies above about
1 kHz?
5 (a) Compare figures 4.6 and 4.8 and explain why the chronaxie for denervated
muscle is much greater than that of typical nerve fibres.
(b) Does this also account for the rheobase of denervated muscle being lower
than that of nerve? Explain.
6 Consider the strength-duration curves for sensory, motor and pain responses
shown in figure 4.10(b). What range of pulse duration should be used for
producing:
(a) A maximum sensory response with minimum motor involvement?
(b) A maximum motor response with minimum physical discomfort?
(c) A pain response with a minimum motor response?
What is a motor point and what relevance has it to (a), (b) and (c) above?
ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 100

7 Consider DC pulses used for stimulation of denervated muscle.


(a) What range of pulse width and frequency is most useful?
(b) What is meant by the term 'selective' stimulus? Give an example and
explain why the waveform you have nominated is selective.
(c) Apart from pulse width and frequency, what other characteristic of a
'selective' waveform should be adjustable by the therapist?

8 Consider rectangular pulsed waveforms used for stimulating nerve fibres.


(a) What is the most useful range of pulse width and frequency?
(b) How does the depth efficiency of stimulation vary with pulse width and why?
(c) When is surging of a pulse train useful? Why?
9 (a) What is the principal disadvantage of 50 Hz sinusoidal AC when the
objective is to stimulate muscle?
(b) Describe one useful practical application of 50 Hz sinusoidal AC in therapy.

10 (a) Describe the result of combining two medium frequency (interferential)


currents in tissue. List the characteristics (carrier frequency, beat
frequency, period and shape) of the resulting waveform.
(b) What are the differences in depth efficiency of short duration pulsed current
and interferential currents? Draw diagrams to illustrate. Why do
interferential currents have greater depth efficiency?

11 Consider interferential currents flowing through tissue as in figure 4.15.


(a) Why is the stimulation intensity greater in the regions between lines
connecting electrode pairs rather than along lines connecting the
electrodes?
(b) Assuming that the stimulus intensity is high enough to excite nerve fibres
regardless of their orientation, what differences in fibre firing rates would

ELECTRICAL STIMULATION OF NERVE AND MUSCLE 101

exist between fibres aligned parallel to the current pathways and those
aligned along lines bisecting the angles between the current paths?
12 Describe the similarities and differences between Russian currents and
premodulated interferential currents.
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 102

5 Rectification and Amplification


DIODES, TRANSISTORS AND VALVES
The humble electric light bulb is such a commonplace item that we take it for granted.
Yet its development marked a turning point in human societal development. No
longer were we constrained by daylight hours. Although fire, the candle and later, gas
lighting had enabled people to extend their daytime activities, the light bulb (and the
establishment of a statewide system for providing electricity) virtually eliminated
human dependence on daylight.
The development of the light bulb also signalled the birth of electronics, an area of
science which has transformed the world in which we live. The radio, TV, mobile
phone and desktop computer are but a few examples of developments in electronics.
Electronic technology led to the development of the neuromuscular stimulators used
by physiotherapists and also enabled scientists to better study the workings of the
human body, in particular the nervous and neuromuscular systems.

So what is so special about an electric light bulb, that it can lay claim to the birth of
electronics? A common electric light bulb consists of a filament mounted inside an
evacuated glass envelope. The filament is a coil of resistance wire, usually tungsten.
The glass bulb has virtually no air inside as oxygen in the air would react with the
tungsten at high temperatures, forming tungsten oxide, which is an insulator so the
filament would no longer conduct. Oxidation is prevented by the vacuum and when Electric light bulbs are very
current from the mains or a suitable power source is passed through the tungsten inefficient. More than 80% of
filament It heats up and glows. Heat and light energy are produced at the expense of the electrical energy is
electrical energy. dissipated in the form of heat.
Less than 20% of the energy
Heat and light production by a metal are fundamentally related to the movement of is released as light.
electrons. The greater the movement energy (principally of the electrons: the atoms
are more locked in place in the crystal structure), the greater the heat energy and the
greater the emission of light. Light is emitted whenever electrons are accelerated
and, in the case of a light globe, electrons are continually accelerated when a current

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 103

flows through the filament.


Acceleration of electrons at red-hot temperatures and above, results in emission of
electrons from the surface of the hot filament. The phenomenon of electron emission Some electrons are given so
accompanying heating is given the name thermionic emission. The relationship much energy as a result of
between heat, light and movement will be considered further in later chapters. For collision that they can escape
the moment consider the electrons emitted by a glowing filament. In the normal run the confines of the metal
of things these electrons, having left behind positively charged ions from the parent surface.
metal, will be attracted back to the filament. The filament of a light globe is thus
continually emitting and recapturing electrons in the process of emitting light.

If heat and light production were the only physical phenomena associated with light
bulbs then this, in itself, would be justification for their importance. the history of
electronics would, however, would be quite different to the one we know. Electronics
has its origin in a device based upon a simple light globe and invented by the English
physicist J. A. Fleming in 1904. The device is a valve diode. Fleming's diode
resembled an electric light bulb with an extra part, a metal electrode called the plate,
included inside the glass envelope. The construction is illustrated in figure 5.1(a).

By including the plate Fleming was able to capture some of' the electrons emitted by
the filament. This is achieved by making the plate positively charged so that
electrons are attracted to the plate more strongly than to the filament. Thus the diode
allows a flow of current with electrons moving from filament to plate, providing the
plate is sufficiently positive with respect to the filament.

Notice, however, that a diode is asymmetric. Electrons can move from filament to
plate but not from plate to filament even when the filament is made positive with
respect to the plate. This is because the plate is not heated and so does not
spontaneously emit electrons. The diode allows current to flow in one direction but
not the other.
Valve diodes require the plate to be at a potential some tens of volts higher than the
filament for conduction to occur. Semiconductor diodes (figure 5.1(b)), their modern
day counterparts, require potential differences of only a few tenths of a volt tor
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 104

conduction to occur and their energy efficiency is much higher i.e. less
electrical energy is dissipated as heat.
Fleming's diode was an extremely important development but the next step
was even more important. By adding a 'grid' (actually a fine wire grid or mesh)
between the filament and metal plate of a diode a device which could amplify
electrical signals was invented. The development of this device (the triode
valve) is generally credited to an American, Lee de Forest. This was in 1906.
The construction of a triode valve is shown in figure 5.2. The mechanism by
which it amplifies electrical signals will be described shortly.
The triode valve, because of its ability to amplify very weak signals from a
microphone and then apply them to a transmitter, started a revolution in
science and technology. Although transmissions of signals across the Atlantic
Ocean had been made by Marconi in 1901 these transmissions strained to the
limit the detection facilities available. With amplifying valves it became
possible to transmit and receive over much greater distances and even to
amplify the signals so that they could be clearly heard without headphones,
through a loudspeaker!
By 1920 the valve had transformed wireless transmission from an extension of
electrical and telegraph practice into a new and fascinating technology.

In the 1940's when valves were a familiar part of the fields of home
entertainment, communications and science the growing pressures of
developments in science and technology had pointed up the limitations of the
valve - high power consumption, large size and excessive heat generation.
These factors became more and more critical as scientists and engineers
attempted to apply electronics to more sophisticated tasks. The first
computers were constructed using hundreds of valves, fully occupying large
rooms and requiring elaborate ventilation and cooling systems in addition to
enormous quantities of electrical power.

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 105

Fortunately science again came to the rescue with the development in 1947 of the
first functional transistor. Developed by physicists Shockley, Brittain and Bardeen the
device revolutionized future developments in technology. The computers could be
drastically reduced in size and power consumption. Printed circuit boards became a
possibility so resistors, capacitors and inductors were miniaturized to suit. The
computer occupying a large room could now be assembled as a device the size of a
filing cabinet.
More was still to come - the pressure was on for smaller and lighter components to
build the apparatus used in navigation, guidance and communication in aeroplanes,
missiles and satellites - to perform increasingly complex scientific tasks.
Engineers quickly realized that transistors could be scaled down in size to fit many
devices in the same volume which one previously occupied - they could even be
interconnected in the one device in the kind of circuit arrangement equipment
engineers might require. The same fabrication techniques could be adapted to
produce resistive or capacitive interconnections between the transistors -
microscopic versions of the familiar resistors and capacitors used in everyday
circuits. Thus was the first integrated circuit (IC) produced. Early IC's, introduced in
1964 contained up to about 10 components in one tiny package. By 1968 this figure
had risen to about 500. Today it numbers in the millions. Nowadays, large scale
integration (LSI) permits many hundreds of transistors and diodes together with the
necessary interconnections of components to fit into a package not much bigger than
a postage stamp.

A good example of LSI technology is the pocket calculator. Because they are based
upon one or at most a few large scale integrated circuits, they can be cheaply mass
produced. Most of the fabrication, testing and assembly is performed by automated
apparatus under the control of minicomputers, themselves the product of IC
technology. Many more examples of the impact of modern electronics are to be found
in everyday life - digital wrist watches and clocks, the desktop computer and video
games are a few which spring to mind. Watch for others - they are evident in virtually
all aspects of life, art and science.
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 106

DIODES AND RECTIFICATION


Valve diodes are rarely used nowadays. They have been superseded by
semiconductor diodes, their solid-state equivalent. Semiconductor diodes are
smaller, more efficient and generate less heat. The first semiconductors were
fabricated from crystals of germanium. Nowadays silicon is the semiconductor of
choice because of its superior physical properties. Both germanium and silicon are
elements which fall midway between the good conductors and the good insulators.
We now consider the properties of a silicon diode but you should bear in mind that
other kinds of diode (selenium or germanium diodes, vacuum tube diodes) have
similar though not identical properties. In addition there are diodes specifically
tailored for somewhat different roles to those we will examine in this section (zener
diodes and light emitting diodes are examples). These have distinct circuit symbols
of their own which are variations on the normal diode symbol. Figure 5.3 shows the
circuit symbol of a simple diode. Note the naming of the different sides of the diode.

The circuit shown in Figure 5.4 can be used to demonstrate the conduction
properties of a diode. With the circuit arrangement shown we would find that the
potential difference across the diode is about 0.7 volt and the current flowing about
110 mA (0.11 amp).
The resistance of the diode, calculated using Ohm's
law, is thus
V 0.7
R= = = 6.4 ohms
I 0.11

Figure 5.4
Circuit for demonstrating the conduction
properties of a diode

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 107

This arrangement, with the anode (the arrow in the circuit symbol) connected to the
positive terminal of the power supply and the cathode (the straight line) to the
negative terminal, is called forward biasing of the diode. When forward biased, the
diode has a very low resistance.
With the diode reversed in the circuit, that is anode and
cathode reversed, the diode is reverse biased. The
voltage across the diode would be measured as 12 volts
and the current about 0.5 microamp or 5 x 10-7 amp - too
small to register on most ammeters. For all intents and
purposes, the reverse current flow is negligible, meaning
that the resistance is close to infinite.

The diode resistance calculated from the measurements


quoted is
V 12
R= = = 24 x 106 Ω = 2.4 x 107 Ω or 24 MΩ.
I 5 x 10-7

An ideal diode has zero resistance in the forward direction (when forward biased)
and an infinite resistance in the reverse direction (when reverse biased). Silicon
diodes come reasonably close to his ideal.
Half Wave Rectification
This unique conduction property of diodes makes them
well suited to the task of' rectifying alternating current, that
is converting alternating current to direct current. The
circuit shown in figure 5.5 illustrates one way of doing
this.

Figure 5.5
Rectification by a diode
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 108

The AC source produces a sinusoidal alternating voltage, as shown in figure 5.6(a).


This means that the diode will be forward biased when the voltage is positive i.e.
during the positive half-cycles then reverse biased during the negative half-cycles.
Only when the diode is forward biased will current flow through the resistor so a
graph of current in the resistor will resemble figure 5.6(b). A graph of potential
difference across the resistor would also resemble 5.6(b).

Figure 5.6
(a) sinusoidal alternating voltage
produced by the AC source in
figure 5.5 and (b) the resulting
current flow through the resistor, R.

The current through the resistor is DC: not like the DC produced by a battery to be
sure, but DC nonetheless because the current flow is only in one direction. A more
accurate description of this half-wave rectified current would be pulsed DC.

By placing a capacitor in parallel with the resistor as shown in figure 5.7


we can 'smooth' the pulsed DC to provide a more even flow of current.

Figure 5.8 shows the waveforms which are obtained when different size
capacitors are connected in parallel with the resistor, R.

Figure 5.7
Smoothing rectified AC with a capacitor

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 109

As the capacitor is made


larger the waveform
becomes more like the
straight line graph
obtained with a battery.
The voltage becomes
more nearly constant.
The reason that the
capacitor has this effect is
that the capacitor stores
electrical energy. While
the diode is conducting,
current will flow through
the resistor and at the
same time the capacitor
will charge to the peak
voltage of the waveform.
When the diode ceases to
conduct the capacitor will Figure 5.8
discharge through the resistor (we discussed capacitor discharging in chapter 2). Smoothing using a capacitor.
The rate at which the capacitor discharges depends on the size of the capacitor and The effect of different size
also the resistance through which it discharges. The larger the capacitance and the capacitors.
larger the resistance, the slower the rate of discharge will be and the smoother will
be the waveform.
If we replaced the resistor in figure 5.7 with a higher value resistor then the
waveforms shown in figure 5.8 would be obtained with capacitors of lower value.
Conversely, if the capacitors remained the same, smoother waveforms would result.
The amount of smoothing is determined by the RC time constant (chapter 2). For
mains supplied electricity, where the AC frequency is 50 Hz, the time between pulses
in figure 5.8(a) is 1/50th sec or 20 ms. For efficient smoothing, the RC time constant
should be greater than 20 ms. Thus if R is large, meaning that the amount of current
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 110

drawn from the supply is small, C can be relatively small. If R is small and a lot of
current is drawn from the supply, C would need to be relatively large to produce
adequate smoothing.
Full Wave Rectification
The half wave rectifier circuit is very simple but rather inefficient. Only half of' the
original AC waveform is being used. The power supply is virtually switched off for half
the time as no current flows during negative half cycles. The full wave rectifier circuit
shown in figure 5.9 is a more efficient rectifier. The arrangement is called a bridge
rectifier.
The positioning of diodes ensures that current will always
flow through the resistor in one direction and both halves of
the AC waveform are used.

Consider what happens when terminal A of the AC supply is


positive - that is, on the positive half-cycle of the waveform.
Current flows through diode 2 but not diode 1 (because of
their polarity). It then flows through the resistor through diode
3 and back to terminal B of the transformer. It can not flow
through diodes 1 or 4 because their opposite terminals are
at a higher potential - remember there is a relatively large
potential difference across the resistor.

On the negative half cycle of the waveform, terminal A is at a


lower potential than terminal B. Current flows from B through
diode 4 through the resistor in the same direction as before,
through diode 1 to terminal A. Current can not flow through Figure 5.9
diodes 2 or 3 as the voltage is higher at the opposite full-wave rectification using
terminal. The net result is that the current through the a diode bridge.
resistor or potential difference across the resistor resembles
figure 5.10(a).

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 111

Full-wave rectified AC can be smoothed with capacitors in the same way as the Figure 5.10
half-wave rectified AC. A smooth waveform is more easily obtained with the full-wave Current flow through the
rectifier because the capacitor is recharged 100 times per second rather than 50 resistor in figure 5.9 (a) without
times per second with half-wave rectified AC. Compare figure 5.10(b) with the a capacitor and (b) with a
half-wave rectified waveform of figure 5.6(c). The R and C values are the same but capacitor as in figure 5.9(c)
the waveform in 5.10(b) is smoother because the pulses of rectified current are
closer together.

AMPLIFICATION
The Triode Valve
The triode valve (figure 5.2) was the first electronic device capable of amplification. If
a relatively high voltage is applied to the plate, electrons emitted by the filament will
be attracted to, and accelerated towards, the plate, so a current will flow. The grid can Athough the grid, when
control the flow of current. If a (relatively small) negative voltage is applied to the grid, positive, attracts electrons,
electrons will be repelled and the flow of current will be reduced. If a small positive most shoot straigh through
voltage is applied to the grid, electrons will be attracted and the flow of current will be
increased. The grid of the valve is placed closer to the filament than to the plate, with the empty spaces in the grid
the result that very small changes in grid voltage produce very large changes in the and add to the current flowing
current through the valve. The valve thus functions as an amplifier. between filament and plate.

If a small alternating voltage is applied to the grid, the result is a large fluctuation in
the current flowing through the valve. Again the small voltage applied to the grid
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 112

results in a large change in the current flowing through the triode. If a resistor is
connected in series with the triode, the large fluctuations in current through the triode
produce a large change in the potential difference across the resistor. A small
alternating voltage applied to the grid produces large fluctuations in the voltage
across the resistor. Thus the small signal is amplified.
The Transistor
The transistor is the semiconductor equivalent of the triode valve. It is used today in
preference to valves in almost all electrical equipment, either in the form of a discrete
component or as a part of an integrated circuit. A transistor has no filament and
hence no heating requirements, is much smaller than a valve and consumes less
power. It is more suited to low power applications, and so is used almost exclusively
in electronic stimulators and many other pieces of apparatus.
Figure 5.11 shows a transistor and its circuit symbol. The transistor (like the triode
valve) has three terminals - called the collector, base and emitter (abbreviated c, b
and e in figure 5.11). The names were given to indicate that the emitter 'emits'
electrons which are 'received' or collected by the collector. The base controls the flow
of current between emitter and collector. The arrow in the circuit symbol for the
transistor is used in the same way as for a diode (figure 5.3). It points in the direction
of easy current flow. The base-emitter junction in fact behaves just like a diode: the
resistance to current flow in the direction of the arrow is very low, the resistance in the
opposite direction is extremely high.
Figure 5.11
The resistance between collector and emitter can vary from very low to very high (a) a transistor and (b) its
depending on the current flowing between base and emitter. This 'variable circuit symbol
resistance' property gives the transistor its name. Transistor is an abbreviation of
trans-resistor.
The current flowing between the collector and the emitter is directly proportional to the
base-emitter current. Thus if the base to emitter current is zero, the collector to
emitter current is also zero. If a small current flows from base to emitter, a larger
current can flow between the collector and the emitter. The collector current is always

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 113

many multiples of the base current. The ratio (collector current/base current) is called
the current gain (or amplification) of the transistor. The amplification of the transistor
depends on how the transistor has been made, its size and other factors. Typical
values of current gain lie in the range 50 to 500.

In other words the resistance of' the transistor between collector and emitter
decreases in proportion to the base current. As the base current is made greater the
collector to emitter resistance decreases so that the collector current increases in
proportion to the base current. The transistor is thus a very good current amplifier - if
we pass a certain amount of current through the base-emitter junction a much larger
current will flow from collector to emitter.
Operational Amplifiers
It would be unusual nowadays to find a piece of electronic
equipment built entirely from discrete components. Integrated
circuits are now produced in huge numbers using automated
fabrication techniques and this has reduced their cost to a point
where it is, more often than not, cheaper to use one integrated
circuit in applications where previously several individual
transistors were used.
One of the most common integrated circuits is the operational
amplifier or op-amp for short. The operational amplifier is
comprised of many transistors, resistors and capacitors
fabricated in one tiny package with the components
interconnected to produce an amplifier of very high gain. By
adding a few external components the op-amp can be adapted
to suit a variety of particular applications. Figure 5.12
(a) an integrated circuit containing
Figure 5.12 shows an integrated circuit which contains four, four operational amplifiers and
independent operational amplifiers alongside the circuit symbol (b) the circuit symbol for an
for a single operational amplifier. operational amplifier.
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 114

All operational amplifiers require a power supply. For simplicity, this is not shown in
figure 5.12. Of the 14 pins on the IC shown in figure 5.12, twelve are used for
connection to the four op-amps and the remaining two are used for connection to a
power supply.
The operational amplifier has two inputs, the inverting input (labelled -) and the non-
inverting input (labelled +). When a signal is applied to the inverting input the output An op-amp amplifies the
is a much amplified and inverted version of the input signal. Signals applied to the potential difference between
non-inverting input are amplified without being inverted. If the same signal is applied the inverting and non-inverting
to both inputs, the output is zero. inputs.

The voltage amplification or gain of an op-amp is very high, typically in the range 106
to 1014. More often than not such high gains are not required in practical electronic
circuits. The gain is easily reduced by adding a few external resistors.
Figure 5.13 shows a practical op-amp circuit which acts as an inverting
amplifier. Notice that we have again omitted the power supply connections for
simplicity. The circuit is arranged so that signals are applied to the inverting
input via resistor R1. The non-inverting input is connected to ground (earthed).
A resistor (R2 ) connects from the output, back to the inverting input. This
resistor will allow some of the output signal to feed back into the input. Note
that the output is inverted with respect to the input. This means that the signal
fed back will tend to cancel the input and so reduce both the input and output
of the op-amp. The principle being used here is that of negative feedback.
The gain (G) of the amplifier shown in figure 5.13 is given by the formula
R2
G =
R1 Figure 5.13
For example, if R2 is 20 kΩ and R1 is 4 kΩ , the gain would be 20/4 = 5. An inverting amplifier.
Negative feedback can be used to reduce the gain of an amplifier to any
desired value. For the circuit shown in figure 5.13, if the feedback resistor (R2)
is one hundred times as big as the input resistor (R1 ) the gain is set at 100
times. If, instead, the feedback resistor was ten times as big as the input

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 115

resistor (R1) the gain would be 10 times.


The advantage of using external resistors and negative feedback is that the op-amp
is then a general purpose device. Instead of having to produce a multiplicity of
different op-amps, each with a particular gain, manufacturers need only produce one
device which can be tailored to suit any particular application.
An alternative amplifier arrangement is shown in figure 5.14. This shows a
non-inverting amplifier. In this circuit negative feedback is once again used to set the
gain.
The input signal is applied to the non-inverting input and the inverting input is
connected to ground by a resistor (R1 ). The inverting input cannot be connected
directly to ground otherwise all the feedback current would flow to ground and not into
the inverting input: there would be no feedback.
The gain (G) of this circuit is given by the formula
R2
G = 1 +
R1
Thus if R2 is 50 kΩ and R1 is 2 kΩ, the gain is 1 + 50/2 = 26. If the 50 kΩ resistor Figure 5.14
was decreased to 10 kΩ the gain would be reduced to 1 + 10/2 = 6. A non-inverting amplifier.
Notice that although different inputs are used for the signal to be amplified with
inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, feedback is always applied to the inverting
input to produce negative feedback and reduce the gain to a value determined by the
ratio of two resistors. If the feedback was applied to the non-inverting input we would
have positive feedback and the amplifier would be unstable. Most of us have
experienced the effect of positive feedback when a microphone is moved too close to
the loudspeaker of a public address system or the volume control is advanced too
far. The circuit becomes unstable and an unpleasant howl is generated which can
quickly damage the loudspeaker and/or amplifier and/or listener's ears!
Used properly and carefully positive feedback can be of advantage in electronic
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 116

circuits. We will consider an example later. As a general rule, however, positive


feedback is not used in circuits whose sole purpose is to amplify.
PRODUCTION OF ALTERNATING CURRENT
In chapter 2 we saw that a resonant circuit, consisting of
an inductor and a capacitor connected in parallel, has a
natural (resonant) frequency which can be calculated
using the formula

If electrical energy (i.e. a pulse of current) is applied to


the circuit, it resonates. That is, current flows
backwards and forwards around the circuit and this
alternating current has a particular frequency, the
resonant frequency. As noted in chapter 2, by
appropriate choice of the capacitor and inductor a
resonant circuit can be made to generate any frequency
of sine wave. A resonant circuit alone is not sufficient,
however, to generate a sustained oscillation.

To produce a continuous, steady alternating current we


must arrange for the resonant circuit to be continuously
supplied with energy to overcome the losses in the
components and keep it oscillating. By use of an
amplifier and positive feedback we can provide this
energy.
The circuit alongside shows one way of generating
sustained oscillations using an operational amplifier
with positive feedback.

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 117

L1 and C1 form the resonant circuit and L2 is an extra inductor in close proximity to L1.
The combination of L1 and L2 is, of course, a transformer. The oscillating current in
L 1 will induce a current in L2 . The current induced in L2 produces an AC potential
difference between the two input terminals of the op-amp. The output of the op-amp,
which is an AC signal which is in synchronization with the AC in the resonant circuit,
is fed back to the resonant circuit through R and this compensates for the natural
energy loss and so keeps the resonant circuit oscillating.
A problem with this circuit is that it is unstable. If the amount of feedback is too
small, the oscillations will die-out. If the amount of feedback is too large, the
oscillations will increase out of control. In practice it is impossible to have precisely
the right amount of feedback to generate a steady, sustained oscillation.

The problem is overcome by using a


voltage controlled amplifier whose gain
is controlled by negative feedback.
Figure 5.15 shows how this is
achieved.

The AC potential difference across the


resonant circuit is rectified and
smoothed to produce a DC voltage
which is directly proportional to the AC
signal. This DC voltage is used to
control the gain of the op-amp. If the
AC signal increases, the DC voltage
applied to the op-amp increases and
its gain is reduced. This reduces the
amount of feedback and the AC signal
is reduced. If the AC signal decreases,
the DC voltage applied to the op-amp
decreases and its gain is increased. Figure 5.15
This increases the amount of feedback A circuit for producing steady
and the AC signal is increased. In this continuous AC
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 118

way the AC signal is prevented from either decreasing or increasing appreciably.


Piezoelectric Crystal Oscillators
As indicated in chapter 2, LC resonant positive feedback
circuits tend to drift slightly in frequency
due to factors such as ageing and
temperature change. When extreme R piezoelectric
frequency stability is needed, crystal
piezoelectric crystals are used. These
crystals have the property that when a voltage
potential difference is applied to their rectifier
opposite sides, the crystal resonates controlled with
amplifier output
mechanically. When included in the smoothing
circuit the crystal only permits current to
flow when the frequency of the current
is equal to the natural frequency of
oscillation of the crystal.
In practice crystal resonators consist of negative feedback
a quartz wafer between two electrodes.
The physical dimensions of the crystal
determine the resonant frequency and
if the crystal is maintained at a constant Figure 5.16
temperature a very high order of A circuit for producing stable
frequency stability can be obtained. high frequency AC using a
piezoelectric crystal
Figure 5.16 shows a suitable circuit for the production of stable, high frequency
AC using a piezoelectric crystal. The LC resonant circuit of figure 5.15 is
replaced by a piezoelectric crystal which is connected directly to the voltage
controlled amplifier.
A circuit using a piezoelectric crystal can also be made to produce rectangular
pulses over an extremely wide range of pulse durations and repetition rates.

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 119

Extremely short pulse durations are required for computing and other applications.
For reaction testing in electrotherapy, the shortest duration in use would not normally
be less than 10 microseconds. For muscle therapy the pulse widths in use might lie
in the range 20 microseconds up to a few seconds.
EXERCISES
1 (a) Draw the circuit symbol for a semiconductor diode. Include arrows to
show the directions of high current flow (low resistance) and low current
flow (high resistance).
(b) What is meant by the terms 'forward bias' and 'reverse bias' of a diode?
State typical values for the resistance of a semiconductor diode when
forward biased and reverse biased.

2 The circuit below is used to convert AC from the mains to DC of lower voltage.

(a) Draw a graph of the potential difference across the 1 kΩ resistor versus
time.
(b) Why does this graph represent DC and not AC?
(c) How would the graph be changed if the diode was connected into the
circuit with its terminals reversed?
(d) Describe (with the aid of graphs) the effect of connecting different size
capacitors in parallel with the resistor.
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 120

3 The circuit shown below is used to convert AC from the mains to DC of lower
voltage.

(a) Draw a graph of potential difference across the I kΩ resistor versus time.
(b) In what way is this circuit more efficient than that shown in question 2?
4 Consider the circuit shown in question 3 above.
(a) Draw graphs to show the effect of different size capacitors connected in
parallel to the 1 kΩ resistor.
(b) What is the advantage of full-wave rectification compared to half wave
rectification as regards the size of capacitor needed to smooth the rectified
waveform?
(c) Draw graphs to show the effect of removing one of the diodes from the
circuit.

5 Consider an operational amplifier integrated circuit.


(a) Draw a circuit diagram for an inverting amplifier with a gain of 20.
(b) describe two ways by which the gain of the amplifier in (a) above could be
increased to 50.

RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 121

6 Figure 5.14 shows a circuit diagram for a non-inverting amplifier.


(a) What would be the gain of this circuit if resistor R2 is 50 kΩ and R1 is 10
kΩ?
(b) What value resistor would need to be used instead of the 50 kΩ resistor tor
a gain of 8?
7 What is meant by the term 'positive feedback'? Why does positive feedback
produce instability?

8 Consider the following amplifier circuits.

(a) Which is the inverting amplifier? Which is the non-inverting amplifier?


(b) What is the gain (amplification) of each circuit?
(c) If the 4 kΩ resistor was replaced by a 1 kΩ resistor, what would be the new
value of the gain of each circuit?
(d) Explain, in terms of positive and negative feedback, the arrangement of
resistors in each circuit.

9 The circuit shown in figure 5.15 can be used to produce continuous sinusoidal
RECTIFICATION AND AMPLIFICATION 122

alternating current.
(a) Explain why positive feedback is needed in this circuit. How is positive
feedback produced?
(b) Why is negative feedback needed? Explain how negative feedback is
achieved.
10 Under what circumstances would the circuit shown in figure 5.16 be preferred to
that shown in figure 5.15?
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 123

6 Electric and Magnetic Fields


Pulses or bursts of electric current, delivered at relatively low frequency, have a major
effect on nerve and muscle because the current causes depolarization of the nerve-
fibre membrane and production of action potentials. When sinusoidal alternating The French scientist, Arsenne
current (AC) is used, the physiological effects depend on the AC frequency. This is, at d'Arsonval described, in 1893,
least in part, because each AC sinewave produces a positive and negative pulse of passing a current of 1 Amp AC
current. At higher frequencies (several tens or hundreds of kHz), the pulses of current at a frequency of 500 kHz,
in each sinewave are of short duration and the nerve fibre does not have time to through two human volunteers
respond to the positive pulse before the negative pulse cancels out its effects. In and an electric light bulb
other words, the pulse duration is too short to produce an appreciable change in the connected in series. The light
nerve fibre membrane potential before the effects are reversed. Thus high frequency glowed brilliantly but the
alternating current flow has no direct excitatory effect on nerve fibres. Current flow volunteers felt nothing. Only
when the current was increased
does, however, result in heating of tissue because electrical energy is converted to to 3 Amperes did the subjects
heat energy according to Joule's Law: P = V.I. Any flow of current will result in heat complain of a disagreeable
production. In this and the following chapter we consider how AC current flow induced sensation of heat.
in tissue by high-frequency alternating electric and magnetic fields produces heating
of tissue. We also ask why certain tissues are heated more rapidly by high-frequency
alternating electric and magnetic fields.

Chapters 6 and 7 are both important for an understanding of the principles of


diathermy. Diathermy (which literally translates as 'through-heating') refers to the
heating of deeply located tissues; that is, the heating of tissues lying below both the
skin and superficial fatty tissue. The practical difficulty involved in this form of therapy
is that of minimizing the heating of superficial tissue while raising the temperature of
the deeper structures by a therapeutically useful amount. The objective, then, is to
produce a greater increase in temperature in the tissue layer to be treated. By varying
the dosage, the desired amount of tissue heating can be chosen.

We begin our coverage of diathermy using electric and magnetic fields with some
basic physical principles associated with these fields.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 124

STATIC ELECTRIC FIELDS


It is common knowledge that there are two kinds of electric charge: the negative
charge associated with electrons and the positive charge associated with the nucleus
of an atom. We also know that like charges repel each other and unlike charges
attract.

The quantitative relationship between the forces between charges and their
magnitude and distance apart was first determined by Charles Augustin de Coulomb
in 1785. The relationship is summarized in what we now call Coulomb's law which
states that the force between two charges is directly proportional to the magnitude of
each charge and inversely proportional to the square of their separation.

Coulomb's law is expressed mathematically as:

q1.q2
F α .... (6.1)
r2

where F is the force experienced by two charges q1 and q2 and r is their distance
apart.

If we wish to calculate the force on a charge q due to a large number of charges q1, ....
qn, we could achieve this by using equation 6.1 and calculating the force on q due to
q 1 , the force on q due to q2 and so on and then summing the forces to obtain the
resultant force. Since forces are vector quantities the summation must be by vector
addition.

In practice we do not often come across situations which approximate to two point
charges nor even to simple distributions of charges. More often we encounter
charges spread over surfaces of different shapes where the actual charge distribution
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 125

is unknown (and in practice difficult to measure). Under these circumstances it is


difficult to calculate the force on another charged object. It is usually more convenient
and easier experimentally to measure the magnitude and direction of the force on a
'test charge' placed in the field of influence of the charged object.
By moving a small positive
The concept of a field of influence, the electric field, is an extremely useful one test charge around in an electric
field and measuring the force at
because it is possible to measure forces in the field without any prior knowledge of numerous points, the electric
the arrangement of charges causing the field. field can be mapped-out.
We define the intensity at any point in an electric field, E, to be the force per unit
positive charge at that point. This defines the magnitude of the field and its direction.
If a small test charge is placed in a field the magnitude of the force it experiences
together with the direction of the force determine the electric field intensity at that
point. The field intensity is thus a vector quantity given by the relationship
F
E = .... (6.2)
q'
Where q' is the magnitude of the test charge placed in the field.

Since the units of force are Newtons and the units of charge are Coulombs, the field
intensity has units of Newtons per Coulomb (written N.C-1).

The field surrounding a single positive charge q can be obtained from equations 6.1
and 6.2 as
F q
E = = 2 .... (6.3)
q' r
Where E is the magnitude of the field and its direction is the same as that of the force
(in a straight line between the charges in this case).

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 126

Figure 6.1 shows the pattern of the electric field around point charges and pairs of
charges.

Figure 6.1
Fields of point charges
(a) single positive charge
(b) single negative charge
(c) unlike pair of charges
(d) like pair of charges
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 127

The lines drawn in figure 6.1 indicate the direction of the field and are called lines of
force because they indicate the direction along which the electric force acts at any Positive charge will move
point. along the lines of force in the
same direction as the field,
An important point to note is that electric fields are always produced by separation of negative charge along lines
charges. Electrons are removed from their parent atoms to produce the charge in the opposite direction.
separation so that for every positive charge that is produced, there is a corresponding
negative charge somewhere. The electric field lines thus have their origin on charges
and can only terminate on opposite charges.

By convention we indicate the relative strengths of electric fields by the number of lines
of force going through a unit area perpendicular to them. In figure 6.1 the field lines
are closest together near the point charges so the field intensity is greatest there. In
figures 6.1(a) and (b) it is apparent that at greater distances from the point charges
the field line density is reduced meaning that the field intensity is correspondingly
decreased.

Another point worthy of note is that lines of force represent vector directions. It follows
that no two lines of force can ever cross each other - the fields at the point would
simply add by vector addition. This is just another way of saying that a point charge
placed in a field will only move in one direction it cannot be pushed in either of two
directions.

THE FIELD BETWEEN CAPACITOR PLATES


Consider the case of two large, flat metal surfaces each carrying opposite charges
and parallel to each other. The metal plates are good conductors so charges are able
to move freely in response to electric forces. On one plate we have an accumulation
of positive charges and on the other an accumulation of negative charges.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 128

In this situation electric field lines will originate on the positive plate
and terminate on the negative plate. The field lines so produced will
originate perpendicular to the conductor surfaces (this is illustrated
in figure 6.2). It is generally true that at the surface of a conductor
through which no charge is moving, the field lines are perpendicular
to the conductor surface. If this were not so the lines of force would
have a component tangential to the conductor surface. The effect of
the tangential component would be to move charges, so changing
the field. The charges would continue to move and readjust the field
until there were no longer any field line components tangential to the
surface causing them to move. In insulators, where the charges are
not free to move, this does not apply and the field lines may be at
any angle to the insulator surface.

Figure 6.2 shows the pattern of electric field lines between two
capacitor plates. The field lines originate perpendicular to one plate
and terminate perpendicular to the opposite plate. If the surfaces of
each metal plate were infinitely large, the field lines would all be
straight and uniformly spaced - in other words the field intensity
would be the same at all points, not growing weaker at large
distances from the centre of the plates. In practice the plates cannot
be infinitely large and the field lines curve away from each plate at
the edges.

When the plates are close together as in figure 6.2(a) the field is
relatively uniform - only the outermost areas (near the edges of each
plate) show any curvature, or weakening, of the field pattern. In
6.2(b) the plates are more widely spaced and more weakening of
the field is evident. Only in the central region is the field uniform. Figure 6.2
Clearly, to obtain the most uniform field intensity it is desirable to Electric field between parallel,
have large capacitor plates separated by a relatively small distance. equal size capacitor plates.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 129

Figure 6.3 shows the field patterns expected for different sizes and arrangements of
electrodes.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 130

When interpreting electric field patterns it is important to remember that not only is the
field direction shown by the lines of force but that the field intensity is by convention
indicated as the number of lines per unit cross section area.

Imagine now a small positive charge placed in the field between two capacitor plates.
The charge will experience a force in the direction along the field lines and hence will
accelerate in this direction, thus gaining kinetic energy. The gain in kinetic energy is
offset by a loss of (electrical) potential energy. In other words the charge will lose
potential energy as it moves along field lines. The change in potential energy per unit
positive charge is called the electric potential difference between the points. This
quantity is the same potential difference we have already met in chapter 1 and the unit
is, of course, the volt.
A region of positive charge is a region of high electric potential and a negative charge
region is at a low potential so that going from a positive to a negative region involves a
potential drop, i.e. a negative potential difference.

The electric field also goes from positive to negative so that moving along a field line
in the direction of the field involves travelling across a potential drop. The idea of
charges losing potential energy as they move in an electric field gives us another way Saying that the electric field
of talking about electric field intensity. Clearly an intense electric field will be intensity is 100 newtons per
associated with a large potential difference between two points a certain distance coulomb is the same as
apart. A weak field has a lower potential difference for the same distance. The field saying the intensity is 100
intensity can thus be specified in units of potential difference per unit distance: in other volts per metre.
words in volts per metre (V.m-1). The units of volts per metre are identical to the units
of field intensity mentioned earlier, namely newtons per coulomb.

STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS


The basic groundwork for our understanding of magnetic phenomena was laid
around 1820 by André Marie Ampère when he first studied the forces of attraction and
repulsion between wires which are carrying current. Before these pioneering
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 131

experiments magnetism was regarded as an isolated and puzzling phenomena


associated with a few naturally occurring (magnetic) materials.

What Ampère did was to establish the first links


between electricity and magnetism: essential
groundwork which culminated in the development
of modern electromagnetic theory.

Ampère observed that if two loops of wire were


mounted so that each had one side in close
proximity to a side of the other loop, a force was
produced when a current was made to flow in each
loop. The arrangement is shown in figure 6.4.

Ampère found that when current was passed


through each loop in the same direction the loops
were attracted to each other - this could be seen by
movement cf the pivoted loop. If the current in one
loop was reversed the force was also reversed - a
repulsive force was produced. He also noted that if
current was made to flow in only one loop, no force
was experienced by either loop.

Experiments can be performed to ascertain what


effect the size of the current in each loop has on the
force and what effect have the loop separation, r,
and the length of wire, L. The results are
summarized in what we now know as Ampere's
law for the force between two parallel conductors
(equation 6.4).

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 132

I1.I2.L
F α .... (6.4)
r
In comparing this with Coulomb's law of electrostatics, (equation 6.1) we can see
some similarities and some differences. The table below summarizes the
corresponding features of each kind of force.

Electrostatic Force Magnetic Force

* between two charges. * between two currents


* repulsion of Iike charges. * attraction of 'like' currents.
* depends on size of charges. * depends on size of currents.
* is proportional to 1/r2 . * is proportional to 1/r.
* force in a straight line between * force at right angles to direction of
charges. current.

The two most striking properties of the magnetic force


which contrast with the electrostatic case are the attraction
of 'like' currents, i.e. currents in the same direction (figure
6.5) and the line of action of the magnetic force -
perpendicular to the direction of current flow.

Figure 6.5
Forces between two current-
carrying wires.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 133

Inspection of figure 6.5 leads to the prediction that two current carrying
conductors placed at right angles will experience no force. This is borne out
experimentally.

Remember that the electric field near charged bodies could be mapped by
placing a test charge in the field and observing the direction of the force on the
charge - let us now consider the relationship between magnetic fields and
forces.

The use of a compass or iron filings to visualize the magnetic field around a bar
magnet is an experiment which most of us have carried-out. The compass or
iron filings line up in the direction of the magnetic field and the field lines are
readily apparent.

The same technique can be used to map the field lines around a wire carrying
an electric current. Figure 6.6 shows the sort of pattern which is obtained.
Figure 6.6
It was Ampère himself who first thought of obtaining a more intense magnetic Magnetic field lines around a
field by passing current through a wire wound in a closely spaced spiral. Figure wire carrying current.
6.7 shows the magnetic field expected for a single loop of wire and a number of
loops wound as a solenoid.

Figure 6.7
Magnetic field lines around a
loop and a solenoid.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 134

Now let us return to consider what is happening to a small element of current in a wire
placed near to the straight wire in figure 6.6. Figure 6.8 shows the main features of
such an arrangement.

Here we have the most striking feature of magnetism:


that the force on a moving charge is perpendicular to
both the current and magnetic field directions. This
observation stands in stark contrast to our experience
with gravitational and electrostatic fields, where the
field direction is also the direction of the force
experienced by the mass or charge.

The scope of this book precludes our delving into


theories of the origin of magnetic force: its explanation
was a triumph for relativity theory in modern physics,
when the magnetic force was shown to be simply a result of the movement of Figure 6.8
charges with their associated electric field. The theory indicates that the force Forces on a current element in
between charges in motion is slightly larger than that between stationary charges. a magnetic field (B).
This slight increase in the electric force is, in fact, the 'magnetic' influence of moving
charges on one another.

Although we have, so far, only discussed electric current in the form of charges flowing
through wires, what we have described also applies to isolated charges moving in a
vacuum. A good practical example of this is in the television set. Here a stream of
electrons emitted from a glowing filament (the cathode) is accelerated by an electric
field and impinges on the screen. The phosphor coating on the screen is utilized to
convert the kinetic energy of the electrons to light energy and a visible spot is
produced on the screen. The electron beam is deflected rapidly both horizontally and
vertically by magnetic fields produced by coils or solenoids attached to the neck of the
picture tube. By applying rapidly alternating pulses of current to the coil, impulsive
forces are applied to the stream of electrons and the spot is moved accordingly.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 135

In summary it must be remembered that the movement of charges is central to our


understanding of magnetic phenomena. The movement of charges results in a
The size of the magnetic force
magnetic field and a static magnetic field can only have an influence on a charge
depends on sin(θ ) where θ is
when that charge is in motion. Motion at right angles to the field results in a maximum
the angle between the field
force. Movement of charges along a magnetic field line will result in no force being
line and the direction of
exerted.
charge movement.
Since we know that movement of charge in a static magnetic field is necessary for a
force to be exerted on the charge, we might logically ask such questions as whether
the charges in a conductor will experience a force if the conductor is moved in a
magnetic field, or whether a force is exerted on a stationary charge by a moving or
changing magnetic field.
We will discuss the answers to these questions later in this chapter.

ELECTRIC FIELDS AND DIELECTRICS


In talking about the electric field between charged bodies and the magnetic field
associated with moving charges we have not considered what effect, if any, the
surrounding medium has on the fields in each case.
Let us consider the electrostatic case first. When a material is given an electric
charge, the charge may remain localized in the region of generation for some
considerable time or it may spread over the surface almost instantaneously. In the
first case the material is called an insulator or dielectric, and in the latter case a
conductor.
An ideal insulator would retain a charge indefinitely and materials such as glass,
plastics and waxes come very close to this ideal. Pure metals such as gold and
copper are close to being ideal conductors. Of course the line of demarcation
between conductors and insulators is not sharp and many substances, particularly

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 136

those of biological origin, are neither good conductors nor good insulators.

Dielectric Constant
It was found by Henry Cavendish, and later independently by Michael Faraday, that the
capacitance of a capacitor - its ability to store charge - can be increased by placing a
dielectric material between the plates. If Co is the capacitance when measured in a
vacuum and C the capacitance when the region between the plates is filled with a
dielectric, the ratio of C to Co, is found to be independent of the shape and size of the
capacitor. This ratio is dependent only on the dielectric medium itself and is called
the dielectric constant (ε) of the material. We thus have
C
ε = C .... (6.5)
o
Capacitance is defined as the amount of charge the capacitor will acquire (and store)
for each volt of applied potential difference. Mathematically this is written:
q
C = .... (6.6)
V
where the symbols have their usual meaning. This equation tells us that if the
capacitance is changed by inserting a dielectric between two capacitor plates either
the charge will be increased or the potential will be decreased. If the capacitor plates
are connected to a battery or other power source capable of maintaining a constant
potential difference then the charge on the plates will be increased.

The increase in capacitance is very small in the case of gases at normal pressure,
but for materials such as oil the capacitance is doubled. Values of ε determined in
this way range from very close to 1 for gases up to 81 for pure water. Table 6.1 gives
values of ε for a representative range of materials.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 137

Notice that the dielectric constant of petroleum oil is similar to that of


polythene. Although these materials are quite different in some
properties, most notably physical appearance, they have the same basic
molecular composition. Each is made up of a long hydrocarbon chain.
The chains in polythene are longer and the subunits have many chain
crosslinks but the elemental compositions of the two materials are very
similar. Compare these with ethyl alcohol and then water.
The dielectric constant is closely correlated with an intrinsic property of
the molecules making up a substance - the polarity. Of the substances
in table 6.1 the most polar is water, then ethyl alcohol. The principal
constituents of air, namely oxygen and nitrogen, are non-polar. The
remaining substances in the table are of intermediate polarity.
We consider the effect of dielectrics on an electric field next but it is
worthwhile to pause and note at this point the distinction between
insulating properties and dielectric properties. Table 6.1
Dielectric constants of materials
The terms insulator and dielectric are used almost synonymously to
describe a particular group of materials - those with poor conduction
properties. The terms 'good insulator' and 'good dielectric', however,
mean two different things.
* A good insulator is a substance which offers a very high resistance to the flow of
current. This refers to how easily charges can move through a material and says
nothing about the dielectric constant.
* A good dielectric is a substance with a high dielectric constant. This depends on
the polarity of the molecules in the substance, not on its conduction properties.

Though good dielectrics must be reasonably good insulators the best dielectrics are
not necessarily the best insulators. For example water in table 6.1 is the substance

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 138

with the highest dielectric constant. Although pure water is a reasonably good
insulator the other substances in this table are all better insulators.

Dielectrics In An Electric Field


Consider what happens when we put a material made up of polar molecules between
two charged capacitor plates; that is, in an electric field. For simplicity we assume that
the polar molecules are dipoles having a single 'slightly negative' region and a
corresponding 'slightly positive' region. In the absence of a field the molecules will be
randomly aligned as shown in figure 6.9(a).

In an electric field the dipolar molecules will-align


themselves as shown in figure 6.9(b) with the
positive and negative ends pointing in directions
along the field lines. The material is then said to
be polarized.

The alignment of the molecules has an effect on


the applied electric field. This is because each
dipole has its own field comprised of field lines
which spread from the positive end of the
molecule to its negative end. The field of a single
dipole is shown in figure 6.10.

Although the field around a single dipolar


molecule is extremely weak, when a dipolar
material is polarized and the molecules are Figure 6.9
aligned as in figure 6.9(b) the net effect of all of the (a) Unpolarized dielectric and
dipoles can have a significant effect on the (b) polarized dielectric
externally applied field.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 139

Consider first the effect of a single dipole on the external field. The central field line in
figure 6.10 points in the direction of the externally applied field (from left to right). The
remaining field lines, however, curve around above and below the dipole and the
arrows point in a direction opposing the external field (from right to left). The net result
is that these field lines cancel part of the externally applied field and so weaken it.

When we take into account the fields surrounding all of the dipoles in a polarized
material the net result is a weakening of the externally applied field within a dielectric.
The field inside a dielectric will be less than the externally applied field: this is
because each of the dipoles aligns to produce a field opposing the externally applied
field.

Why then should there be any effect with 'non-polar' molecules such as oil or bakelite?
The origins of the effect with these materials can best be understood by considering a
single non-polar molecule such as the one shown in figure 6.11.
Figure 6.10
In the absence of a field the electron 'cloud' around the molecule is Electric field of a dipole
symmetrical: the molecule is non-polar. If now an electric field is
applied the electron cloud can distort giving rise to an induced dipole.
The molecule becomes polarized and will remain so as long as the
external electric field is maintained. Non-polar molecules will polarize
and so have the same effect on an externally applied field as polar
molecules. The dipole field produced will oppose the external field and
so weaken it. Generally the effect of non-polar molecules on an electric
field is not as great as those of polar molecules. This is because the
induced dipoles are not as strong as those of naturally polar
substances.

We thus have the general result that the field within any dielectric is less Figure 6.11
than the field that would exist without the dielectric being present. The Polarization of a molecule
next question we must ask is how the pattern of field lines is affected.
in an electric field

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 140

For simplicity we take the single dipole shown in figure 6.10 and
consider what happens when it is placed in a uniform field. The
original field must be added (vectorially) to that of the dipole. The
result is the field pattern shown in figure 6.12.

The most significant thing to note from figure 6.12 is that the field
lines converge towards the dipole. The field is made more intense
immediately in front of the faces perpendicular to the field direction.
Above and below the dipole the field lines are more spread out;
that is, the field here is weaker.

If now we wish to consider a large object of high dielectric constant Figure 6.12
in an electric field we can apply the same ideas.
The effect of a dipole on a uniform electric field
Take the case of a simple cube of dielectric. We can add the
contribution to the field from each dipole using the arrangement
shown in figure 6.9(b). The result will be similar to figure 6.12 but
now we have many dipoles joined head to tail and stacked above
and below each other. The net result is shown in figure 6.13.

Again we observe the field lines converging towards the dielectric,


so increasing the field intensity near faces perpendicular to the
field. The field intensity near the remaining faces of the cube is
correspondingly decreased.

Figure 6.13 also shows why, even though field lines converge on
the cube, the field within the dielectric is weak. It is because some
field lines terminate on charges on the surface of the dielectric.
The origin of the surface charge can be seen by inspection of
figure 6.9(b). Within the polarized dielectric, dipoles are aligned in Figure 6.13
a head to tail pattern so that for each positive 'head' there is an Effect of a dielectric cube on a uniform electric field
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 141

adjacent negative 'tail'. The opposite charges so cancel each other. On the faces
perpendicular to the field, however, there is a charge imbalance. One surface has an
excess positive charge and the opposite surface has an excess negative charge. It is
on this surface charge of polarization that field lines will terminate.
The amount of surface charge produced in an electric field will
depend on the dielectric constant of the material. For a material
with a high dielectric constant the surface charge of polarization will
be high and a large proportion of field lines will terminate on the
dielectric surface. When the dielectric constant is low the
proportion of field lines which terminate will be small. This means
that the field within a dielectric is reduced in proportion to the
dielectric constant. The higher the dielectric constant, the lower is
the field within the material. In the limiting case where the
dielectric constant is extremely high the field within the material is
close to zero.

Figure 6.14 shows what happens when either a spherical or


cylindrical dielectric is placed in an electric field. Note the regions
in which the field is intensified (more field lines per unit area) and
Figure 6.14
where the field is reduced.
Effect of a dielectric sphere on a
REFRACTION OF FIELD LINES uniform electric field

Inspection of figures 6.13 and 6.14 reveals certain


discontinuities. Two things are apparent. First we notice that some field lines
terminate at the dielectric interface. Second we notice that the lines which do not
terminate impinge on the interface at one angle and leave it at a different angle. The
change in direction at an interface is called refraction. Field lines are refracted at a
dielectric interface. The phenomenon is not restricted to dielectrics but also applies to
conductors. In this section we consider how the dielectric constant and conductivity of
materials determines the extent of refraction at an interface.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 142

Refraction and Dielectrics


First let us consider the refraction of field lines as they pass from one dielectric
medium to another. We ask the question 'what are the constraints on field lines
crossing a dielectric boundary?'

There are two constrains, or boundary conditions, on the electric field at an interface.
The first is that the tangential component of the field (the component parallel to the
boundary) should be continuous. That is, the tangential component of the field must
be the same on each side of the boundary. This is illustrated in figure 6.15.

The tangential component of E 1 is E1 .sinθ 1 and the tangential


component of E2 is E2.sinθ2. These are equal so we have

E1.sinθ1 = E2.sinθ2 .... (6.7)

The second boundary condition is that the normal component of the


field in each dielectric (the component at right-angles to the boundary)
is decreased in proportion to the dielectric constant.

We have seen previously that the field within a dielectric is decreased.


The second boundary condition states this precisely. Since the normal
component of the field is decreased in proportion to the dielectric
constant the product of dielectric constant and the normal component
of the field is the same in each medium.

Mathematically this is written Figure 6.15


Refraction of an electric field line at a
ε1.E1.cosθ1 = ε2.E2.cosθ2 .... (6.8) boundary between two dielectrics
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 143

Dividing equation 6.8 by equation 6.7 and cancelling the E1s and E2s, we obtain
cosθ1 cosθ2
ε1. sinθ = ε 2.
sinθ 2
1
or
ε1.cotθ1 = ε2.cotθ2 .... (6.9)

An Example. Suppose that in figure 6.15, medium 1 is air with a dielectric constant of
1.0 and medium 2 is water with a dielectric constant of 81 (table 6.1). The field line
shown for E1 strikes the boundary at an angle θ 1 of 20o . We wish to calculate the
angle θ2 at which the field line leaves the boundary.

Rearranging equation 6.9 we have


ε1 1.0 1.0
cotθ2 = ε .cotθ1 = .cot20o = .2.75 = 0.0399
2 81 81
which gives A similar calculation for an
incident angle θ1 of 10 o gives
θ2 = 88o
an angle of refraction θ2 of
For an angle of incidence θ1 of 20o, the angle of refraction, θ2, is predicted to be 88o. 86 o.

In this example the angle of refraction is always considerably greater than the angle of
incidence. This is because medium 2 has a much higher dielectric constant than
medium 1.

The implication is that field lines are refracted greatly on entering a medium of high
dielectric constant. For a moderate angle of refraction the angle of incidence must be
very small: in other words the field lines must enter the medium of high dielectric
constant almost at right angles.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 144

Dielectrics Between Capacitor Plates


Now consider what happens when we place a material of high dielectric constant
between two capacitor plates. The result is shown in figure 6.16. To explain the
effects shown here we must remember the main points of the preceding discussion.

Two important effects are evident in figure 6. 16.

An increase in field strength between each plate


and the dielectric surface. This is predicted by
equation 6.6.

The capacitance is increased in the presence of


a dielectric. This means that the charge on the
plates must increase and consequently the field
strength between the plates and the dielectric
must increase if the potential difference between
the plates is kept constant.

A decrease in field strength within the dielectric.


Two factors contribute to this effect. The first is
the surface charge of polarization which allows
field lines to terminate on the dielectric surface, Figure 6.16
so reducing the field intensity within. The second Change in the electric field pattern
is the refraction of field lines at the dielectric in the presence of a dielectric.
interface (equation 6.9). Notice that the field lines
in figure 6.16 enter the dielectric with a small
angle of incidence and are refracted greatly.
Refraction spreads the field lines and so reduces
the field in the dielectric.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 145

Refraction and Conductors


So far we have talked about dielectrics in an electric field. We dealt with dielectric
properties alone and made no mention of the effect of conductivity on the electric field
pattern. In the case of good insulators such as plastics, glass and oil it is reasonable
to treat them as ideal, non-conducting dielectrics. In the case of water and materials
containing water, this approximation cannot be made. Hence for biological materials
which generally have a high water (and ion) content we must also consider the effect
of conductivity on the electric field pattern.

Here then we consider the effect of conductors on an electric field. We will not be so
concerned with the ideal or perfect conductors, which must have field lines
perpendicular to the conductor surface, but with non-ideal conductors which are much
more commonplace in biological and in everyday situations.

For ideal conductors two conditions apply:

* the field lines must be perpendicular to the conductor surface.

* all field lines must terminate on the surface of the conductor. In this sense an
ideal conductor can be considered to be 'infinitely polarizable'. This means that
the field within a perfect conductor is zero.

For non-ideal conductors these constraints do not apply. What then are the properties
of a non-ideal conductor and what are the laws governing its behaviour? The field within a non- ideal
conductor is not zero, nor do
We have already met one of the properties of a conducting medium in a previous all the field lines terminate on
chapter. This is Ohm's law which states that the current in a conductor is proportional the conductor surface.
to the potential difference between the conductor ends. The constant of proportionality
is 1/R where R is the resistance. Ohm's law was covered in chapter 1.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 146

Mathematically, Ohm's Law is written:


V
I = .... (1.3)
R
When we are interested in the bulk flow of current within a material it is more
convenient to use a different expression for Ohm's law. The alternative
expression is
E
i = ρ or i = σ.E .... (6.10)
Where E is the electric field intensity in volts per metre and i is the current
density in amps per square metre passing through a surface perpendicular to
E (figure 6.17). For an area A, with a current I flowing through it, the current
density is I/A amperes per square metre (A.m-2).

The resistivity, ρ, is defined as the resistance of a one metre length of


conductor with a cross sectional area of one square metre. The unit of
resistivity is the ohm.metre. The conductivity, σ, is simply the reciprocal of
resistivity and thus has units of (ohm.m-1) which are called siemens per metre
(S.m-1).

We now ask what happens to the electric field lines (and hence the direction of
current flow) on passing from one conductive medium to another. Figure 6.18
shows the refraction which occurs when a field line crosses to a medium of
higher conductivity. The angle of refraction is greater than the angle of
incidence in this case.

The conditions applying to the electric field lines are analogous to those which
apply in dielectric media. When a field line crosses into a medium of higher Figure 6.17
conductivity, the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence. Electric field and current in a
Conversely, when a field line crosses into a medium of lower conductivity, the conductor
angle of refraction is less than the angle of incidence.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 147

Compare figure 6.18 with figure 6.15. The first condition on the electric
field is that the tangential components of the field be equal on both
sides of the boundary i.e.

E1.sinθ1 = E2.sinθ2 .... (6.11)

The second condition is that the flow of current normal to one side of
the boundary should be equal to that normal to the other side i.e.

i1.cosθ1 = i2cosθ2
This makes sense since the net current flow into the boundary from
side 1 must equal that entering side 2 from the boundary.

Using equation 6.10 to eliminate i1 and i2 from this last equation we


have:
Figure 6.18
σ1.E1.cosθ1 = σ2.E2.cosθ2 .... (6.12) Refraction of electric field line at a
boundary between two conductors.
Combining 6.11 and 6.12 we obtain:
σ1.cotθ1 = σ2.cotθ2 .... (6.13)

Compare these equations with 6.7, 6.8 and 6.9. The close analogy between current
flow in conductors and polarization in a dielectric is quite evident from these
equations.

The implications of equation 6.13 for conductors are similar to those we found using
equation 6.9 which applies to dielectrics. Electric field lines are refracted significantly
on passing from a poor conductor to a better conductor.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 148

Equation 6.13 predicts that when the conductivity of medium 2 is extremely high (when
medium 2 comes close to being an ideal conductor) the field lines in medium 1 will
enter the boundary between the two conductors almost normally (almost at right
angles). In other words, if material 2 is an ideal conductor the field lines in medium 1
will impinge on the boundary at an angle of 90o.

The similarity of equations 6.9 and 6.13 lead to the general conclusion that field lines
are refracted greatly when entering a medium of high dielectric constant or
conductivity. To obtain an equation which takes account of both factors
simultaneously the dielectric constant and conductivity of the media must be
combined to calculate their electrical impedances. The amount of refraction then
depends on the impedance of each medium and the refraction equation has a similar
form to equations 6.9 and 6.13.

It turns out that for biological materials there is a good correlation between the The reason that high σ values
insulating properties (hence the conductivity) and the dielectric properties (dielectric accompany high ε values is that
constant). Tissues with high dielectric constant are poor insulators. In general, the tissues of high water content
higher the value of ε, the higher the value of σ. Hence if both of ε and σ increase by a have a high ion content. A high
factor of 10, say, on going from one medium to another equations 6.9 and 6.14 predict water content results in a high ε,
the same relationship between angle of incidence and angle of refraction. In this a high ion content results in a
case both equations correctly predict the angle of refraction and the complexity of high σ.
combining ε and σ in a single equation is avoided.

Electric Fields in Tissue


Table 6.2 gives values of dielectric constant and conductivity for some body tissues
measured at 37oC. Also included for comparison are data for water, oil and metals.
The fields used in therapy are not static but alternate at very high frequencies
(normally 27.12 MHz). At high frequencies the dielectric constant is lower and the
conductivity higher than in the electrostatic case.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 149

The results in table 6.2 were obtained with an


alternating electric field of frequency 50 MHz -
the values of conductivity would be about 20%
lower at 27 MHz (the frequency normally used
for therapy) and the dielectric constant some
20% higher. Both quantities depend quite
strongly on the frequency of alternation of the
field.

From table 6.2 it is apparent that at this


frequency tissues with high water content
(muscle, spleen and kidney) have very similar
dielectric and conduction properties to saline
solution. This is not surprising as the tissues
contain about 80% by weight of water with the
remaining 20% being tissue protein. The
lower water content of fatty tissue and bone
marrow is also reflected in their dielectric
constant and conductivity values. Table 6.2
Dielectric constants and conductivities
Now let us apply what we have found so far to a more practical situation and at 37o C and 50 MHz.
ask what the pattern of field lines would look like for a patient's arm or leg
placed between circular capacitor plates. Figure 6.19 shows a highly
simplified representation of the arm or leg in (a) longitudinal and (b)
perpendicular cross-section.

It can be seen that the field intensity is highest in the air space and
decreases markedly on entering the fatty tissue. A further reduction occurs
when the field lines enter the muscle.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 150

In figure 6.19(a) the reduction in field intensity within the arm or leg is due to two
factors: (a) refraction of field lines at the air/fatty tissue and fatty tissue/muscle
boundaries which spreads the lines apart, so reducing the field intensity and (b)
termination of some of the field lines on surface charge of polarization of the fat and
muscle.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 151

Note that in figure 6.19(a), in bone there are more field lines than in muscle. This is
because bone has a lower dielectric constant and conductivity than muscle and so
does not polarize to the same extent. Its electrical properties are similar to fatty tissue.

Figure 6.19(b) also shows the effects of refraction and termination of field lines.

We will return to consider the implications of these field patterns. For the moment it is
sufficient to note the diminished field intensity in materials of high dielectric constant
due to the polarization of the material and consequent termination of some field lines.
Note also the refraction of field lines on entering a material of high dielectric constant
or conductivity which can result in a focussing of the field (figure 6.19(b)) or
defocussing (figure 6.19(a)).

MAGNETIC FIELDS IN MATERIALS


We saw previously that the dielectric constant of a material could be measured by the
increase in capacitance which occurs when the material is placed between the plates
of a parallel plate capacitor.

An analogous situation is found with magnetism. When different materials are placed Iron-cored electromagnets
along the axis of a solenoid or inductor (figure 6.7), the inductance changes. There is can generate fields up to
also a proportionate change in the strength of the magnetic field around the inductor. several thousand times as
The effect can be seen in the dramatic increase in magnetic field strength which strong as would be produced
occurs when a bar of iron is placed in a solenoid to make an electromagnet. without the iron core present.
Iron is, however, a member of a small group of elements which show such an effect
on the magnetic field. Nickel and cobalt are two others. The materials in this group
are said to be ferromagnetic. An extremely small effect on the magnetic field is found
with other substances.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 152

By analogy with the electrostatic case we define the permeability of a material by its
ability to change the inductance of a solenoid. The permeability, µ, is the ratio of the
inductance L, to the inductance without the material being present, Lo, i.e.
L
µ = .... (6.14) Substances with µ less than
Lo
one are termed diamagnetic
The permeability of most materials is found to be extremely close to unity. Unlike the while substances with µ
electrostatic case (where ε is always greater than unity) µ may be less than or greater greater than one are called
than unity. paramagnetic.

Table 6.3 lists values of µ for a number of different materials.

Certainly for biological materials we can consider µ to be sufficiently close


to one to make no difference. In other words the magnetic field lines will
be virtually unchanged on passing through biological materials: tissues
are 'transparent' as far as the magnetic field is concerned.

Ferromagnetic materials will influence a magnetic field in the same way


that dielectrics influence an electric field. While an electric field will
polarize a dielectric a magnetic field will magnetise a ferromagnetic
material. The analogy could be carried further with discussion of the field
in and around a ferromagnetic material. Figures 6.13 and 6.14 would be
appropriate if we replaced the electric field E with the magnetic field B and
substituted µ for ε. However since the effects are negligible for biological Table 6.3
materials we will not pursue this topic further. Permeability of various materials.

Magnetic Fields and Induced EMF


We now return to the questions left unanswered earlier and further
examine the effect of magnetic fields on charges. We have already
considered electric charge moving in a magnetic field and found that the
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 153

charge experiences a force in a direction perpendicular to both the magnetic field and
the current direction (figure 6.8). This applies both to current flowing along a wire, as
in figure 6.8 and to current flow in a vacuum or near vacuum, as in a television picture
tube.

Consider the following experiments which can be performed with two loops of wire.
Figure 6.20 shows the arrangement of the apparatus which is needed. Loop 2 is
connected, through a switch, to a battery. Loop 1 is connected to a sensitive current
meter or galvanometer.

If the switch were in the closed position,


current is flowing through loop 2 and a
magnetic field exists. Since the electrons
in loop 1 are not moving, we know from
Ampere's law that there is no force on them
and hence no force on the loop.

What happens if now we move loop 1 away


from loop 2? In moving the loop upwards
we find that the galvanometer deflects
indicating a flow of current in loop 1. As
soon as we stop moving loop 1, the current
flow ceases.

If we use the three dimensional axes of


figure 6.8 and regard the direction of Figure 6.20
movement of the loop as the current An experiment with moving wire loops.
direction we predict a force on the electrons
in loop 1 in a direction along the wire. This
then is the explanation for the induced
current in loop 1.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 154

If now we fix loop 1 in figure 6.20 and instead move loop 2 downwards what is the
effect? In this instance instead of moving electrons through a magnetic field we have
left the electrons alone and moved the field. The net result is the same as we found in
the first example: the galvanometer deflects indicating a flow of current in loop 1.
Clearly it is only the relative motion of the conductor and field which is important in
determining whether current is induced.

When moving the conductor in a fixed field or moving the field with the conductor fixed,
the essential process occurring is that charges are crossing magnetic field lines.
Whenever this happens the charges experience a force. v in the diagram above is the
direction of movement -
What happens then if we keep both loops fixed and suddenly switch off the current in either of the field, the wire or
loop 2? As far as loop 1 is concerned one of two things could have happened. Either electrons (current).
the magnetic field disappeared because the current causing it was stopped or the
loop responsible for the field was suddenly accelerated away from the vicinity. The net
effect is the same - current is induced in loop 1 because of the changing magnetic
field.

The observation can be explained by picturing the magnetic field collapsing on loop 2.
With current flowing in loop 2 a magnetic field, represented by concentric circles
around the wire, is present (figure 6.7). When the current is switched off the circular
field lines can be visualized as shrinking; converging on the wire and disappearing
into it. Thus the field direction is in concentric circles but the direction of movement of
the field is radially inwards towards the wire of loop 2. This is illustrated in figure 6.21.

Figure 6.21
Magnetic force acting on charges when
current in in loop 2 is switched off.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 155

Closing the switch in figure 6.20 causes current to flow in loop 2 and a field
builds up around the wire. The increasing field is represented by a series The experiments described
of expanding concentric rings emanating from the wire. The direction of demonstrate the principle of
increase of the field is radially outwards (opposite to v in figure 6.21). electromagnetic induction. A current
Experimentally we observe a flow of current in loop 1, in the opposite is induced in loop 1 either by moving
direction to that when the switch was opened (i.e. F is reversed when v is the loops or by switching the current
reversed in figure 6.21) and so causing the field to change. In
each instance the charges in loop 1
Once the current flow is steady, the magnetic field is constant and current is are crossing magnetic field lines.
no longer induced in loop 1. This results in a force on the charges
and hence charge movement. The
Now consider what happens if, instead of switching the current in loop 2 of direction of the induced current is at
figure 6.20 on or off, we pass an alternating current through it. By the right angles to both the field direction
principles outlined above we would expect to find an alternating current and the direction of movement.
produced in loop 1. This process, as you may have realized, forms the
basis of transformer action: a process described in chapter 1.

When an alternating current flows in the primary winding of a transformer, an


alternating magnetic field is produced around the primary and an alternating current is
thus induced in the secondary. The secondary circuit need not be closed. If no
ammeter or other components are connected to the secondary, current will still be
able to flow to the ends of the secondary winding. This will result in a difference in
charge between each end of the winding and thus a potential difference between the
endings.

A major point that should be noted here is that although we have talked about the
current induced in a conducting wire loop, we need not have restricted the discussion
to conductors. Although insulators have their electrons tightly bound to the molecule
and current will not flow, the charges will still experience a force and this force will
polarize the molecules.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 156

Since electric field strength is defined as the force per unit charge we could include
both insulators and conductors in our discussion by referring to the induced electric
field or electromotive force (EMF) arising as a result of changing magnetic field.

The principle of electromagnetic induction applies to any material placed in a


changing magnetic field. An electric field is always produced as a result of the change
in a magnetic field. If a conductor is in the changing magnetic field, a current will be
induced whereas if an insulator is in the changing magnetic field only polarization will
result.

When an alternating current is induced in a slab of conducting material


rather than a wire the currents are given the special name 'eddy currents'.
The term arises because the most common geometry, a conducting
cylinder placed in a solenoid as in figure 6.22, gives rise to circular current
paths at right angles to the magnetic field. Provided that the magnetic field
of the solenoid is changing i.e. the field lines are moving, force will be
produced on charges in the conductor, resulting in current flow. An
alternating current in the solenoid will result in an induced alternating
current flow in the conductor.

To understand why the induced current follows circular pathways we need


to think about the direction of the magnetic field lines and their direction of
movement. A force will be produced with a direction at right-angles to each
of these. Figure 6.7 shows the magnetic field pattern around a solenoid. Figure 6.22
Magnetic field lines inside the solenoid run parallel along the central axis. Current induced in a conductive
material placed in a solenoid.
If alternating current flows though the solenoid, the magnetic field will
build-up then collapse, build-up in the reverse direction then collapse in
repetitive cycles. As the field builds-up, the field line loops in figure 6.7 will
grow larger as new loops form. This is illustrated in figure 6.23.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 157

Figure 6.23
Note the movement of the field lines. One field line is highlighted in red to Movement of field lines as the current
show how the line moves towards the central axis as the current flow (and through a solenoid increases.
field intensity) increases. For field lines inside the solenoid, the field line
movement is always radially inwards as the field increases and radially
outward as the field decreases.

Figure 6.24 shows the conductive cylindrical object in figure 6.22, viewed end-
on. The magnetic field lie (B), direction of movement (v) and resulting force (F)
vectors are shown at different points. The B arrows point out of the page,
directly towards you and are shown as blue circles.

Because the field, B, is always pointing out of the


page (along the cylinder axis) and v is always radially Figure 6.24
inwards, the resulting force (EMF) always acts Direction of force and induced
around the circumference of a circle. This is why the current as a result of an increasing
induced current follows circular pathways. magnetic field intensity.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 158

The force, F, acts clockwise when v points inwards i.e. when the current and,
consequently the magnetic field is increasing, When the current decreases, the When the current through the
magnetic field collapses and loops shrink towards the coil (the reverse of that shown coil is increasing, the induced
in figure 6.23) so the direction of v in figure 6.24 is reversed. The consequence is that current flows in an anti-
the direction of F is reversed and the induced current flow reverses direction. Thus an clockwise direction. When the
alternating current is induced in the conductor as a result of the alternating magnetic current flow is decreasing, the
field. induced current flows in a
clockwise direction.
The important conclusion to draw from figures 6.22 to 6.24 is that an alternating
current in the solenoid gives rise to an alternating magnetic field. This, in turn, gives
rise to an alternating EMF in the material within the solenoid. If the material is a
conductor a current will be induced which follows a circular path parallel to the current
in the solenoid. If the material is an insulator the molecules will polarize in alternating
directions along arcs parallel to the solenoid loops. In either case an induced electric
field is produced with the field direction parallel to the wires in the solenoid. The
actual amount of induced current flow will depend on the dielectric constant and
conductivity of the material.

Magnetic Fields in Tissue


From the previous discussion it should now be apparent that three factors determine
the effect of an alternating magnetic field on a material:

the permeability, µ, which is a measure of the 'magnetizability' of a material. This


determines the magnetic field strength around and within a material placed in the
field. The permeability is very close to unity for most biological materials: only
ferromagnetic substances have a significant effect on the field strength.

the conductivity, σ , which determines the amount of current flow in response to the
applied (alternating) magnetic field. The higher the conductivity the greater will be the
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 159

induced current.

the dielectric constant, ε , which measures the 'polarizability' of a material. The


higher the dielectric constant the greater will be the amount of charge movement as a
result of polarization of the material.

A significant difference between electric and magnetic fields in tissue is that biological
tissue is 'transparent' in a magnetic field. The permeability, µ, is close to 1.000
meaning that the magnetic field is virtually unaffected by the presence of biological
tissue. This contrasts with biological tissue in an electric field, where the field
intensity varies according to the electrical properties of different tissues. While the
electrical properties of fat, muscle and bone are quite different, the magnetic
properties are almost identical.

This means that for a body segment in an electric field, the field within tissue will vary
according to tissue type. The field in muscle is lower than in the fatty tissue or bone
(figure 6.19). In a magnetic field, no such variation occurs. The field intensities in fat,
muscle and bone are virtually identical. Thus if, for example, a limb segment is
exposed to a magnetic field by a surrounding coil as in figure 6.22, the magnetic field
intensity (and consequently the induced EMF) within fatty tissue, muscle and bone will
be the same.

The differences between current induced by an alternating electric field and that
induced by an alternating magnetic field will be discussed further in chapter 7.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 160

EXERCISES
1 Two oppositely charged spheres are separated by a distance d as shown.
The force of attraction between the spheres is measured as 50 N. What would
this force be if:
(a) the distance d was halved.
(b) the distance d was doubled.
(c) the charge q1 was reduced by one half.
(d) both charges were halved.
(e) both charges were halved and the distance doubled.

2 The quantitative relationship between charge and electrostatic force is:


q .q
F = k. 12 2 .... (6.1)
r
where k has the value 9 x 109 N.m2.C-2. Calculate the magnitude of the force of
attraction between:
(a) one coulomb of negative charge and one coulomb of positive charge
separated by a distance of 1 m.
(b) two opposite charges, both of magnitude 1 microcoulomb separated by a
distance of 1 mm.
(c) a sodium ion (Na+ ) and a chloride ion (Cl- ) in crystalline NaCI. The
distance between ions in the crystal is 0.3 nm and the charge of each ion is
1.6 x 10-19 coulomb.
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 161

3 The magnitude of the electric field around a single positive charge q is:
q
E = k. 2 .... (6.3)
r
where k has the value 9 x 109 N.m2.C-2 (see equation 6.3). Calculate the field of:
(a) one coulomb of positive charge at a distance of 1 m.
(b) one coulomb of positive charge at a distance of 1 km.
(c) one microcoulomb of positive charge at a distance of I m.
(d) a sodium ion (charge 1.6 x 10-19 C) at a distance of 0.3 nm.

4 The electric field of a single positive charge is measured as 1.5 V.m-1 at a


distance of 0.3 m. Use equations 6.1 and 6.3 to calculate:
(a) the magnitude of the charge
(b) the force which would be experienced by a charge of 2 µC placed at a
distance 0.3 m from the first charge.
The constant of proportionality in equations 6.1 and 6.3 is 9 x 109 N.m2.C-2.

5 Consider the electric field patterns shown in figure 6.3. Draw diagrams to show
the effect on the field when:
(a) the small plate in figure 6.3(a) is made smaller
(b) the angle between the plates in 6.3(b) is made greater
(c) the plates in 6.3(c) are offset further.

6 Two current carrying wires are separated by a distance, d, as shown. The force
of attraction between the wires is 50 N.

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 162

What would be the force if:


(a) the distance d was halved
(b) the distance d was doubled
(c) the current, I1, was reduced by one half
(d) both currents were halved
(e) both currents were halved and the distance doubled
(f) I1 was reduced to zero.
(g) I1 was reversed in direction.

7 The quantitative relationship between current and magnetic force is:


I .I .L
F α k. 1 2 .... (6.4)
r
where k has the value of 10-7 N.C -2.s2 (see equation 6.4). Calculate the force
between two parallel wires of length 0.8 m. The wires each carry a current of 0.5
ampere and are separated by a distance of 2 cm.

8 Two metal plates separated by a thin air space are found to have a capacitance
of 15 pF. The plates are connected to a power supply and charged to a potential
difference of 200 V.
(a) Use equation 6.6 to calculate the resulting charge on each plate.
(b) The power supply remains connected and the space between the plates is
filled with petroleum oil. What is the charge on each plate? What is the
potential difference between the plates?

9 If the power supply in question 8(b) above was disconnected before the oil was
introduced what would be:
(a) the charge on each plate
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 163

(b) the potential difference between the plates after introduction of the oil?

10 (a) Define the terms 'good insulator' and 'good dielectric'.


(b) Which of the substances listed in table 6.2 are good insulators and which
are good dielectrics?

11 Briefly describe how the dielectric constant and conductivity of a material will
change if there is a change in proportion of:
(a) polar molecules
(b) non- polar molecules
(c) ions.

12 (a) Draw a diagram similar to figure 6.13 to show the effect of a rectangular
dielectric on a uniform electric field. Label your diagram to show clearly
regions where the field intensity is increased and where it is decreased.
(b) Explain the origin of the charges shown on the dielectric surface in figure
6.13. What effect do the charges have on the field intensity within the
dielectric?

13 An electric field line crosses from medium I (air) to medium 2 (water) as shown
in figure 4.15. Use equation 4.9 and values of s from table 4.1 to calculate the
angle of refraction for an incident angle of:
(a) 1o
(b) 5o
(c) 15o
What general conclusion can be drawn about field lines crossing into a medium
of high dielectric constant?

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 164

14 Draw a diagram similar to figure 6.16 to show the effect of a dielectric on the field
between capacitor plates.
(a) Label the diagram to show clearly regions where the field intensity is
increased or decreased.
(b) Briefly explain the origin of the changes in field intensity.

15 A cylindrical block of material of conductivity 0.8 S.m-1 carries a current of 0.2


amps along its length. The block has faces each of area 10 cm2 and a length of
25 cm.
(a) What is the current density in the material?
(b) Use equation 6.11 to calculate the electric field intensity in the material.
(c) What is the potential difference between the two faces?

16 A rectangular length of material of resistivity 25 Ω.m has a potential difference of


5 V between its ends. The material has a length of 30 cm and a cross-sectional
area of 2 cm2.
(a) What is the field intensity within the material?
(b) What is the current density within the material?
(c) What is the total current in the material?

17 An electric field line crosses from medium 1 (conductivity 0.05 S.m-1) to medium
2 (conductivity 0.8 S.m-1) as shown in figure 6.18. Use equation 6.14 to calculate
the angle of incidence for a refraction angle of:
(a) 40 o
(b) 80 o
(c) 89 o
ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 165

18 Figure 6.19 shows the pattern of field lines in a model for an arm or leg
(longitudinal section) placed between capacitor plates. Explain the pronounced
difference in field intensity in fat and muscle tissue in terms of refraction of field
lines and surface charge of polarization in each tissue.

19 Figure 6.20 shows the pattern of field lines in a model for an arm or leg
(perpendicular cross-section) between two capacitor plates. Explain why:
(a) the field intensity in air close to the fatty tissue is greater than that without
the limb present.
(b) the field in muscle tissue is lower than without the limb present and lower
than that in fatty tissue.

20 Consider a length of wire wound as a solenoid as shown in figure 6.7. Draw a


diagram of the solenoid and the associated magnetic field when a current flows
through the wire. Is the magnetic field changed by the introduction of biological
materials (for example, an arm or leg) within the coil? Explain.

21 (a) What is meant by the term 'electromagnetic induction'?


(b) Describe the effects of electromagnetic induction on conductors placed in a
magnetic field.

22 Consider a material placed within a coil of wire wound as a solenoid as shown


in figure 6.24(a). Describe the effect of an alternating magnetic field on the
material if the material is:
(a) a good conductor
(b) a good dielectric.

23 Figure 6.22 shows the pathway of induced current when a conductive material is
placed in a solenoid through which alternating current is flowing. Explain why the

ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 166

induced current follows circular paths, parallel to the coil.

24 Consider a loop of wire positioned parallel to the surface of a conductive


material as shown.
(a) Draw a diagram showing the magnetic field produced by the loop.
(b) Suppose the current through the loop is alternating so that current is
induced in the conductor. Draw a diagram showing the pathways of the
induced current. Explain why the current flows follows these particular
pathways.
(c) where, in the conductive material, is the induced current greatest?
Why?
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 167

7 Therapeutic Fields: Shortwave Diathermy


'Shortwave diathermy' refers to heating of deeply located tissue using electric or
magnetic fields which alternate at high frequency. The term 'shortwave diathermy', is While shortwave diathermy
something of a misnomer as the contribution of waves, as such, to the treatment is units do radiate waves with a
negligible. The physiological effects are a result of electric and magnetic fields frequency of 27.12 MHz, this
generated by the shortwave diathermy apparatus. Shortwave radiation plays little or is a side-effect. The
no role in the therapy. physiological effects are due
to the powerful electric or
magnetic fields generated by
The apparatus used by physiotherapists generates alternating electric and magnetic the apparatus.
fields with a frequency of 27.12 MHz. Since radio waves with frequencies in the range
10 MHz to 100 MHz are termed short waves the term has been, rather inappropriately,
applied to this therapeutic modality.

PRODUCTION OF THE FIELD


Shortwave diathermy apparatus consists of a
sinewave generator circuit which produces
alternating current with a frequency of 27.12
MHz and a resonant circuit which can be
tuned to exactly the same frequency. The
sinewave generator supplies energy to the
resonant circuit by transformer action. Figure
7.1 illustrates the arrangement.

Figure 7.1
Shortwave diathermy
apparatus (schematic).

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 168

The sinewave generator consists of a power supply (chapter 5), an oscillator with
good frequency stability (chapters 2 and 5) and a power amplifier (chapter 5). The
power supply converts AC from the mains (of frequency 50 Hz) to DC which is needed
to power the equipment. It consists of a transformer (to convert the 240 V AC from the
mains to the voltage needed by the rest of the circuitry), and a rectifier to convert the AC
to DC. The DC is used to power a sinewave generator; a resonant circuit which
oscillates at 27.12 MHz and an amplifier, which boosts the current produced by the
resonant circuit to higher levels, as needed for patient treatment.

Electrical energy produced by the sinewave generator is coupled to the patient tuning
Any mains-frequency AC
circuit by transformer action (figure 7.1). Two inductors are placed close together so produced by the apparatus is
that energy produced by the power amplifier is transferred to the patient circuit. This also not conducted
method of coupling ensures that DC in the apparatus is unable to reach the patient appreciably to the patient
and the risk of electric shock is minimized. circuit as the resonant
frequency (27.12 MHz) is
A variable capacitor, C, is included in the patient circuit so that the resonant frequency vastly different to the mains
of the patient circuit can be made equal to the frequency of the oscillator. This frequency (50 Hz).
ensures maximum efficiency of energy transfer (chapter 2) and reliable operation of
the apparatus. A power meter or indicator lamp shows when resonance is achieved
and maximum power is transferred. In older machines, the variable capacitor, C, was
manually adjusted with the operator adjusting a knob while observing the power
meter and adjusting for maximum power. Modern machines use electronic control of
the variable capacitor and are described as 'auto-tuning'. The principal advantage of
automatic tuning is that if the patient should move during treatment the machine will
adjust to keep the patient circuit in resonance. With manual tuning machines,
movement of the patient or electrodes can result in de-tuning and a drop in output of
the machine.

The output of the apparatus is coupled to the patient via electrodes (in the capacitor
field technique represented in figure 7.1) or via an induction coil. The coil or
electrodes are connected directly to the output of the machine and the part of the
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 169

patient to be treated is positioned in the electric or magnetic field. In figure 7.1, the
area highlighted in yellow is circuitry inside the machine.

The part of the patient to be treated would be positioned between the external
capacitor plates shown in figure 7.1. The plates are normally in the form of two metal
disks, each inside a clear plastic container or envelope. The electrical characteristics When an induction coil is
of the patient's tissue affects the capacitance of the patient circuit, as does the used, the presence of
electrode size and spacing. For this reason it is necessary that the apparatus be biological tissue in the field is
tuned (by adjusting C in figure 7.1) with the patient positioned in the field. Similarly, if irrelevant but the tissue
an induction coil is used rather than capacitor plates, tuning will be necessary. This is volume to be treated will
because when the coil is wrapped around the part of the patient to be treated, the influence the number of turns
inductance of the coil will depend on the number of turns of the coil and their radius. of the coil and their radius.

MOLECULES IN AN ELECTRIC FIELD


In shortwave diathermy treatment a high frequency AC electrical signal is produced
and applied to the patient via an induction coil or electrodes. The high frequency
signal will produce a corresponding high frequency alternating electric or magnetic
field in the patient's tissue. We now consider what effect this has on the tissue.

Since an alternating magnetic field gives rise to an induced alternating electrical field
(as described in chapter 6) we first examine the effects of an alternating electric field
on the different molecules found in human tissue.

Charged Molecules
The conductivity of tissue is determined by the number of free ions in the tissue fluid.
In the presence of an electric field these ions will migrate along field lines and so
constitute an electric current. The process is not unlike electrical conduction in
metals. Metallic conduction results from the movement of free electrons. In
electrolytes the charge carriers are not electrons but ions; these are tens of

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 170

thousands of times more massive than electrons.

Under the influence of the electric field ions will be


accelerated along field lines - but they will not travel far before
colliding with other molecules and losing their acquired
kinetic energy. The repeated sequence of accelerations and
collisions is the way in which electrical energy is converted to
heat energy, which is the random-motion energy of the
molecules. At the frequencies associated with shortwave
diathermy the field alternations are so rapid that the ions
oscillate about a mean position rather than undergoing any
large scale movement, but the alternations are not so rapid
that movement is prevented and heat generation is not
impaired.

Dipolar Molecules
Dipolar molecules such as water will orient themselves in an
electrical field and if the field is alternating this will result in
backwards and forwards rotation of the dipoles. In a liquid
the molecules are continually in motion (due to their thermal
energy) and are loosely associated with each other
(coupled); thus some of the rotational energy of the
molecules will be converted to heat energy by what can be
thought of as a frictional drag between adjacent molecules.

Non Polar Molecules Figure 7.2


Response of molecules to a high
Though not normally polar these molecules will undergo a frequency alternating electric field.
distortion of their electron 'clouds'; that is, they will polarize in
an electric field. In an alternating field the electron clouds will
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 171

oscillate back and forth to each end of the molecule. Since this kind of motion does
not involve transport or rotation of the molecule as a whole it can only be coupled
indirectly with the gross molecular movement associated with heat energy.

Figure 7.2 summarizes, by illustration, the response of ions, polar molecules and
non-polar molecules to a high frequency alternating electric field. In each case there
is a net back and forth movement of charge: in other words, an alternating flow of
current.

REAL AND DISPLACEMENT CURRENT


From the previous discussion it is apparent that the different kinds of molecule in a
material will each respond differently to an applied electric field. The back and forth
movement of ions and the consequent collisions will result in a very efficient
conversion of electrical energy into heat energy. The rotational movement of polar
molecules provides a less efficient mechanism of energy conversion. The electron
cloud distortion of non-polar molecules represents the least efficient means of heat
production. Nonetheless each kind of molecule responds to an alternating electric
field in a way which results in movement of charges and hence an alternating current.
The difference is in the proportion of electrical energy converted to heat energy when
the alternating current is produced. With this in mind we distinguish real and
displacement current.

* Real current is that associated with heat production. When real current flows
through a material the rate at which electrical energy is converted to heat energy
is given by Joule's law:

P = V.I .... (1.4)


where V is the potential difference and I is the real current flowing through the
material. P is the power dissipated (in watts), in other words the amount of
electrical energy dissipated per second (1 watt (W) = 1 joule per second (J.s-1)).

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 172

* Displacement current is current flow which does not produce any heating.
In this case the power dissipated, and hence the heat generated, is zero.

Ionic materials are associated principally with real current and hence substantial
heat production. Polar substances are associated with both real and
displacement current and hence less heat production. Non-polar materials are
principally associated with displacement current and hence minimal heat
production.

An example which serves to illustrate the distinction between real and


displacement current is given in figure 7.3. Here we have a resistor and a
capacitor connected in series to a source of alternating current. In this case we
suppose that the capacitor is ideal - it comprises two metal plates separated by
a perfect insulator which can polarize and depolarize with no loss of electrical
energy to heat energy.

The magnitude of the current flowing in this circuit will depend on the voltage of
the AC source and the total impedance of the resistor/capacitor combination.
The actual impedance of the capacitor is calculated using equation 2.5. The real
current (Ir) flowing through the resistor will result in power dissipation according
to equation 1.4 and hence heat production in the resistor. The displacement Figure 7.3
current (Id ) flowing through the capacitor (assumed ideal) gives no power Real and displacement current
dissipation and hence no heat production as the material between the plates is in an AC circuit.
able to polarize and depolarize with no energy loss.

In this case, then, the current flowing from the AC source appears as real current
in the resistor R and displacement current in the (ideal) capacitor C. Charges
move and heat is produced in the resistor while the charge movement
(displacement current) in the capacitor produces no heating. The two currents,
which are different forms of the same thing, are necessarily the same size.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 173

For a capacitor to be ideal the material between the plates must be an ideal dielectric
- a substance capable of polarizing in an electric field and depolarizing on its removal
without any dielectric absorption. In other words, with no conversion of electrical Most gases come close to
energy to heat energy. being ideal dielectrics, as do
some oils. Water being a
Biological materials, particularly those with high water and ion content are far from highly polar molecule, falls
being ideal dielectrics. When placed in an electric field the induced current will be a short of this ideal and
combination of real and displacement current. The proportions of each kind of current dielectric absorption results
will depend on the proportions of ionic, polar and non-polar molecules. in significant heating at any
frequency below about 1010
We now consider biological tissue exposed to an electric or magnetic field which Hz.
alternates at a frequency of 27.12 MHz, the frequency licensed for use in shortwave
diathermy. As we have seen, shortwave diathermy may be applied using capacitor
plates (which produce an electric field) or an inductive coil (which generates a
magnetic field).

CAPACITOR FIELD TREATMENT


Consider first the situation depicted in figure 6.19(a), where an arm or leg is
positioned between two capacitor plates. Figure 6.19(a) shows the electric field
pattern, which is affected by refraction and termination of field lines. The total current
flowing through the tissue will be determined by the total impedance of the tissue plus
the air space between tissue and capacitor plates. Current will flow in the direction of
the field lines and the proportions of real and displacement current will depend on the
electrical properties of the particular tissue.

The amount of heating in any tissue layer will be determined by two factors: the field
intensity within the layer and the amount of real, rather than displacement, current.

Calculation of the proportions of real and displacement current in a particular tissue is


not difficult. Measured values of dielectric constant and conductivity are all that are

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 174

needed. Calculation of the field pattern is much more difficult and has only been done
using simplified models: even simpler than the somewhat idealized geometries
shown in figure 6.19. The conductivity determines
the amount of real current
flow, the dielectric constant
Useful qualitative pictures are nonetheless obtained by combining diagrams such as determines the amount of
those shown in figure 6.19, with calculated values of real and displacement current in displacement current.
each tissue layer.

At a frequency of 27.12 MHz the current flow in fatty


tissue and bone is approximately 50% displacement.
In muscle and tissues of high water content the
proportions are approximately 80% real current to 20%
displacement current.

Figure 7.4 shows a revised view of figure 6.19(a) which


takes into account the two kinds of current flow which
occur. In the air spaces the current flow is entirely
displacement current. In fatty tissue and bone the
current is assumed to be one half real current and one
half displacement current. For simplicity, muscle is
shown as having entirely real current.

Figure 7.4
Current type and directions in
a model for an arm or leg.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 175

When viewing diagrams such as these, bear in mind the simplifications made. The
pictures can be misleading if interpreted too literally. You should also bear in mind
that even a single tissue layer may be inhomogeneous at both the microscopic and
macroscopic level. An example of the complications introduced by tissue
inhomogeneity is seen with fatty tissue in the shortwave field.

Fatty Tissue
A practical limitation on the amount of heat which can be produced in deeply
located tissue is the heat production in fatty tissue. When using capacitor
plates the rate of heating of fatty tissue is always greater than that of the
underlying muscle tissue. Part of the reason is that fatty tissue is
inhomogeneous. The tissue is not a uniform distribution of cells but a
complex structure incorporating regions of high conductivity and dielectric
constant: the lymphatic and blood vessels.
The high conductivity and dielectric constant of the vessels will result in field
lines being focussed or channelled into them with a resulting high local field
intensity and corresponding high rate of heating in and near the vessels.
The phenomenon is illustrated in figure 7.5.
The localized high heat production will result in greater temperature
elevation of the vessels than the fatty tissue as a whole and a greater
sensation of heat than would be expected if the tissue layer was Figure 7.5
homogenous. Focussing of electric field lines in blood
and lymphatic vessels in fatty tissue.
INDUCTIVE COIL TREATMENT
We now consider application of the shortwave field with an induction coil. The
objective is to induce an electric field and hence a flow of current as a result of the
alternating magnetic field produced by the coil. In the example illustrated in figure 7.6
a cable carrying the shortwave frequency current is wrapped around a patient's lower

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 176

limb. Figure 7.6(a) shows the inductive coil wound as a solenoid around the patient's
lower limb and figure 7.6(b) shows the current pathways in the different tissues.

The current pathways shown are predicted assuming that the alternating magnetic
field gives rise to an induced EMF in the patient's tissue. In this case the current will
follow circular paths parallel to the turns of the coil in figure 7.6(a). Note that in figure
7.6(b) the current through the fatty tissue is shown as half displacement current and
half real current while muscle is assumed to have real current only. As indicated
previously, this is only an approximation: while the proportion of real current in fatty
tissue is about 50%. in muscle it is about 80%.

If the coil in figure 7.6 had a large number of closely spaced turns and the coil
diameter was small compared to its length, then the magnetic field inside the Figure 7.6
coil would be uniform and the induced EMF would be the same throughout the Current flow induced in a limb by
tissue volume. Were this the case, the relative amounts of current flow in each inductive coil treatment.
tissue would simply depend on the tissue impedance (which is determined by
the dielectric constant and conductivity).
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 177

A complication is that with more widely spaced turns and a relatively large diameter,
the magnetic field inside the induction coil will be non-uniform. In an arrangement
like that shown in figure 7.6(a), the magnetic field would be strongest close to the coil This means thaqt a greater
and decreasing in intensity towards the centre. The highest field intensity is thus in EMF will be induced in the
the superficial tissues of the limb. superficial tissues and
consequently there will be a
greater current flow.
Another Kind of Coil
Most manufacturers of shortwave diathermy apparatus offer accessories which
include a compact coil mounted in a plastic housing. This device is called a monode.
The monode is pointed at the part of the patient to be treated so that the coil is in a
plane parallel to the skin surface. With this arrangement (figure 7.7), currents are
induced which flow in circular paths parallel to the skin
surface.

The cable supplied with the shortwave machine can, of course,


also be wound into a spiral and positioned to produce a
similar distribution of induced current.

The spiral coil placed parallel to the skin produces more


superficial heating than the solenoidal coil (figure 7.6). This is
because the magnetic field intensity decreases rapidly with
distance from the coil, as the field lines diverge, spreading
apart and looping round to the opposite side of the coil. The
field spreading is similar to that which occurs at the ends of
the coils in figures 6.7 and 7.6. Magnetic field lines become
more separated, indicating a weaker magnetic field further
from the coil and consequently less induced EMF and less
induced current. Hence although the current induced in
muscle is mostly real current, the amount of current at depth is Figure 7.7
much less than with a solenoid (figure 7.6). Induced currents with a spiral coil mounted
parallel to the skin surface.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 178

Capacitative Effects
A practical complication which occurs with inductive coil treatment,
whether with a solenoid or a spiral coil (monode), is that in addition
to the currents induced by the magnetic field there is also a
pronounced electrostatic effect.
There is a certain capacitance between the loops of the coil. In fact
whenever a cable or wire is folded back on itself or coiled we have
produced a situation where there are two conductors separated by a
space; thus we have produced a capacitor. Although in the case of a
cable wound as a coil the capacitance is very small, the effect is
quite significant at MHz frequencies. The inductive coil behaves as
an inductor in parallel with a capacitor.
At the high frequencies used for shortwave diathermy the inductance
of the coil results in a high impedance to current flow in the cable
(equation 2.4). The capacitance associated with the coil presents a
lower impedance pathway for current to take (equation 2.5). In
consequence the induced current patterns are not as simple as
those shown in figure 7.6(b). The electric field between adjacent
turns (Figure 7.8(a)) results in current flow along the field lines
shown in blue. Because the electric field is stronger closer to the
coils, greater current flows and this adds to the current induced by
the magnetic field. The consequence is greater current flow in, and
greater heating of, superficial tissue (figure 7.8(b)).

The electric field between adjacent loops is similar to that between


two small electrodes (figure 6.1(c)). The field is most intense close Figure 7.8
to the cable. A consequence is that there is a risk of burning the Electric field pattern (blue lines) between
superficial tissues with the electric field of the coil rather than adjacent turns of an inductive coil.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 179

heating deeper tissue with current induced by the alternating magnetic field.

A similar argument applies for a spiral coil. An electric field is produced between
adjacent turns within the loop. Close to the coil, the electric field is intense and
greater current flows. This adds to the current induced by the magnetic field so there
is greater current flow in, and greater heating of, superficial tissue.

Superficial heating due to the electric field can be minimized in three ways: (a) by
winding the turns of the coil close together, (b) by keeping the cable away from the When the adjacent turns are
patient's skin using towelling and/or rubber spacer designed for this purpose and (c) closer together, the electric
by using an electrostatic shield. field is actually greater, but it
is also more localized to the
Electric field heating effects can also be minimized, in the case of a solenoid, by space between the turns of
positioning an earthed metal cylinder between the coil and the patient's limb. If a the coil.
monode is used, a flat metal plate between the monode and the patient's tissue
would be needed. The plate will screen-out the electric field while having little effect
on the magnetic field of the coil. The electric field inside the metal cylinder or behind
the metal plate would be almost nil because the metal is a good conductor and field
lines will terminate on its surface. Most metals are, however, transparent as far as
magnetic fields are concerned so the magnetic field is virtually unchanged. Some, but
not all, inductive coil applicators are supplied with an inbuilt electric field screen.
Screening is an important feature when depth efficient heating is required.
In summary, the options with inductive coil treatment are a coil wound around the part
of the patient to be treated or a flat coil (monode) positioned over the body part. The
difference is the depth efficiency of treatment. A solenoidal coil (figure 7.6) has greater
depth efficiency as far as tissue within the coil s concerned. A flat spiral coil (figure
7.7) has greater effect on superficial tissues.
With either method of application, there is the risk of excessive superficial heating due
to the electric field between adjacent turns of the coil or spiral. the risk is minimized by
spacing the coil or spiral away from the patient's superficial tissues.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 180

ELECTRODE PLACEMENT - CAPACITOR FIELDS


With capacitor field treatment, the therapist has more control over the field intensity in
different areas than with inductive coil treatment. We have discussed previously how
the combination of tissue layers in the part of the patient being treated alters the
shape of the electric field. The other factors influencing the field pattern involve the
placement of the electrodes. Each factor listed below must be taken into account in
the practical application of shortwave diathermy using capacitor field treatment.

* The shape of the part of patient in the field. Compare Figure 6.19(a) with 6.19(b).
In addition, if the electrodes are placed over any prominence an undesirable
concentration of the field can result.
* The arrangement of tissues layers in the treated structure. As discussed
previously, this factor plays a significant role in determining the final shape of the
field.
* The size, spacing and orientation of the electrodes. Some examples of the
electric field in the absence of any object were shown in figures 6.2 and 6.3. We
consider below the effect when the patient is in the field.

Electrode Size
In general, it is preferable to use electrodes which are somewhat larger than the
structure to be treated. This results in the central, more uniform, part of the field being
used (figure 6.2).

The dielectric constant and conductivity of tissue are much higher than those of air
(table 4.2). Thus, with large electrodes, the field lines are bent towards the limb and
spreading of the field is minimised. The effect is illustrated in figure 7.9 where the
effect of the different tissue layers is ignored for simplicity.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 181

Compare these with figures 4.19 and 4.20. The use of


small electrodes results in an undesirably high field
intensity in the superficial tissues.

Unequal size electrodes (figure 5.10(c)) can be used to


selectively heat tissue located closer to one surface of a
limb. Large differences in electrode size, however, can
sometimes lead to difficulty in tuning or instability in
machine operation.

Electrode Spacing
The electrode spacing should normally be as wide as
possible. In this way the problems associated with a
non-uniform field pattern are minimised. The machine
itself, however, sets the limit on the maximum spacing
which can be used. As the electrodes are moved further
apart the capacitance of the two plates decreases. In
addition the field intensity (and consequently the rate of heating) will Figure 7.9
decrease. A point will be reached where the machine can no longer be tuned Effect of electrode size: (a) correct
or insufficient power is available for adequate heating: this sets the limit on electrode size (b) electrodes too small
the separation of the electrodes. (c) arrangement for selective heating.

By use of a wide spacing the electrical properties of the tissue have a smaller
effect on the overall field pattern and the electrical properties of air play a
greater role. Thus the field pattern is more uniform and less subject to
variation with movement of the patient in the field.

Figure 7.10 illustrates the effect of electrode spacing. In 7.10(a) the electrode
to surface distance varies considerably resulting in a local high field intensity

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 182

in the limb. In 7.10(b) the electrode to surface


distance does not vary greatly and the field within
the limb is more uniform. Clearly, if a relatively
uniform field pattern is required the arrangement
shown in 7.10(b) is to be preferred. The
arrangements shown in 7.10(c) and 7.11(c) are
both suitable if we wish to selectively heat one
surface of a limb. They would also be suitable for
heating a structure which is located close to one
surface of a limb or trunk - for example, the hip
joint.

Electrode Orientation
In the examples considered previously the
electrodes were placed parallel to each other in
order to obtain a relatively uniform heating pattern.
However if one part of the surface of a structure is
closer to an electrode, the field lines will be
concentrated in that region. Figure 7.10
Effect of electrode spacing: (a) narrow
Figure 7.11 shows electrodes applied to the shoulder. Compare this with spacing, (b) wide spacing and (c)
figure 6.16. Electrodes which are parallel to each other as in figure 7.11(a) do unequal spacing.
not give a uniform field because the air spacing varies considerably. The
dielectric constant and conductivity of each field-line pathway varies
considerably, resulting in variation in the field intensity. In figure 7.11(b) the
distance between the plates varies but the electrical characteristics of each
pathway are similar: thus the field is relatively uniform. Clearly the
arrangement shown in figure 7.11(b) is preferred when uniform heating is the
objective.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 183

In all of the examples discussed previously the arrangement


of electrodes is contraplanar: that is, electrodes are placed
over opposite sides of a structure. Such an arrangement is
needed if deeply located tissue is to be heated.

In some circumstances it is preferable to use a coplanar


electrode arrangement. For example superficial structures,
such as the spine, which are too extensive for contraplanar
treatment may be treated in this way. Figure 7.12 shows a
coplanar arrangement of electrodes.

When using a coplanar arrangement it is very important to


ensure that the spacing between electrodes is greater than
double the skin to electrode distance. This results in the
majority of field lines passing through tissue rather than the
air space between the electrodes.

Figure 7.11
Effect of electrode orientation. (a) and
(c): incorrect orientation (b) correct
orientation.

Figure 7.12
A coplanar arrangement of electrodes.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 184

Even when using a contraplanar arrangement of electrodes


considerable heating occurs in the superficial tissues closest to the
electrodes. This effect can be minimized by using the cross-fire
technique of treatment shown in figure 7.13.
Half of the treatment is given with electrodes in one position (figure
7.13(a)). The electrodes are then moved so that the new electric field
is at right angles to the old one (figure 7.13(b)) and the treatment is
continued. In this way deeply located tissue receives treatment for
twice as long as the skin. The cross-fire treatment may be used, for
example, on the knee joint or pelvic organs. It is also particularly
useful for treating the walls of cavities within a structure, for example
the sinuses. Figure 7.14 shows the field pattern obtained with an Figure 7.13
The cross-fire technique.
object of high dielectric constant which has an air-filled hollow at its
centre.

The field lines are concentrated in the dielectric resulting in uneven heating of the
walls of the cavity. Cross-fire treatment ensures that all of the cavity wall area is
treated.

HEATING OF TISSUE
Earlier we discussed qualitatively and in molecular terms, the heating effect of a high
frequency alternating electric field. We now consider heat production and temperature
Figure 7.14
rise and take a larger scale view of matter: a view at the level of tissue rather than
A hollow dielectric between
molecules.
capacitor plates.
We saw in chapter 1 that the power dissipated by a resistor, the rate at which
electrical energy is converted to heat energy, is given by equation 1.4:

P = V.I .... (1.4)


SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 185

This expression relates the current, I, flowing through a resistor to the total power, P,
dissipated in the resistor. For resistors the current, I, is entirely real current and thus
produces heat. When we consider biological tissues we must distinguish between
real current and displacement current since only the real current results in heat
production. In additional, we are usually more interested in the rate of heating at a
particular point in the tissue rather than in the tissue as a whole. In this case a more
useful expression of equation 1.4 is equation 7.1.

Pv = E.ir .... (7.1)

Here Pv is the power dissipated per unit volume of tissue at a particular point. The
units of Pv are thus watts per cubic metre. E is the field strength (in volts per metre)
and ir is the real component of current density (in amps per square metre) at that
point.

The power dissipated, Pv is equal to the rate of heat production. Hence, in order to
determine the rate of heating at a particular point in tissue we need to know the
electric field strength and the real current density. We begin by considering fields and
currents produced using capacitor field treatment.

Capacitor Field Treatment


Whether electrodes are positioned in a coplanar arrangement (figure 7.12) or in a
contraplanar arrangement (figures 7.9 to 7.11) the current flow in muscle will be
determined by the total impedance of the tissue combination plus the air space
between the tissue and capacitor plates.

Figure 7.15 shows electrical equivalent circuits for the two electrode/tissue
arrangements. The quantities Za, Zf, and Zm refer to the electrical impedances of air,
fat and muscle respectively.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 186

Figure 7.15
Electrode/tissue configurations and their
electrical equivalent circuits. (a) coplanar
arrangement, (b) contraplanar arrangement.

In figure 7.15(a) we ignore (displacement) current flow through the air directly between
the electrodes. We also ignore current flowing directly through the fatty tissue and
bypassing the muscle. If the electrode spacing is at least twice the electrode to tissue
spacing this will be a reasonable approximation. The impedance presented by each
alternate pathway will be sufficiently high to make these currents negligible.
In figure 7.15(b) we ignore current flow through the bone, directly around the fatty
tissue or through the air around the tissue. Again this is because these pathways
have very high impedance compared to the ones shown.

With these approximations the electrical equivalent circuits in 5.16(a) and (b) are the
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 187

same. Each of the electrode/tissue arrangements are equivalent to a series


combination of impedances.

Just as with resistive circuits (described in chapter 1), when impedances are
connected in series the current in each impedance is the same. We thus have the
following relationship:

displacement displacement displacement


current = + real current = + real current
in air in fatty tissue in muscle

As mentioned earlier, the proportion of real current in fatty tissue is approximately 50%
The real current density in
while in muscle the proportion is about 80%. Thus the amount of real current flow in muscle may be increased or
muscle is 80/50 or about one and one half times greater than in fatty tissue. decreased if the electric field
lines converge or diverge.
Let us take the simple case where current spreading is minimal and estimate the This depends on the
relative rate of heating in fatty tissue and muscle. We need to know both the real tissue/electrode geometry -
current density and field strength in each tissue. The field strength is estimated see figure 6.19 for example.
below.

When resistors are connected in series the current flow in each is the same but the
voltage across each resistor will, in general, be different. The largest resistor will
have across it the greatest potential difference. The equivalent statement for tissues
of different impedance is as follows:

When tissues are arranged in series the field intensity will be greatest in the tissue
with highest impedance.

Inspection of table 6.2 shows that muscle has a higher conductivity and dielectric
constant than fatty tissue: both figures are several times higher. Now a high
conductivity and dielectric constant means a low impedance. Combining the two

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 188

figures from table 6.2 we calculate that fatty tissue has an electrical impedance some
ten times larger than muscle.

The rate of heating of each tissue is given by equation 7.1:

Pv = E.ir .... (7.1)

The real current density in muscle is as we have seen, about one and a half times
greater than in fatty tissue, however the field intensity in fatty tissue is approximately
ten times higher. Hence the rate of heating of fatty tissue is predicted to be
approximately 10/1.5 times higher than muscle.

We thus have the general conclusion that if spreading or converging of the field is
minimal the rate of heat production in fatty tissue will be about seven times higher
than in muscle.

If the electrode/tissue configuration permits spreading of the field in muscle the


current density will be reduced and the rate of heating of muscle correspondingly
reduced. Conversely if the geometry produces convergence of the field lines in
muscle the current density will be increased and the relative rate of heating will be
increased accordingly.

Inductive Coil Treatment


With capacitor field treatment tissues are effectively in a series electrical arrangement.
The current flow in muscle is thus limited by the impedance of the fatty tissue layers.
When inductive coil treatment is used such is not the case.

Consider the coil and tissue arrangement shown in figure 7.7. Currents are induced
in the plane of the fatty tissue and in the plane of the muscle. The current loops are
complete electrical pathways in the one tissue. For this reason the current flow in
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 189

muscle is not limited by the fatty tissue but depends only on the strength of the
induced electric field and the electrical characteristics of the muscle tissue. In other
words the induced currents flowing in each tissue layer are independent of each
other.

The real component of the current density, the current density which determines heat
production, is given by equation 6.10, which can be written:

ir = σ.E .... (6.10)

Substituting this formula into equation 7.1 we obtain an alternate expression for the
power dissipated per unit volume:

Pv = σ.E2 .... (7.2)

Table 6.2 shows that the conductivity, σ, of muscle is some sixteen times greater than
that of fatty tissue. Hence, for the same induced electric field strength, both the real
current density and the power dissipated in muscle will be sixteen times greater than
in fatty tissue.

How large is the magnetically induced electric field? The intensity of the induced field The intensity of the induced
is determined by the rate of change of the magnetic field and the permeability, µ, of the electric field is determined by
material. The permeability is close to one for biological materials (see table 6.3) so the rate of change of the
fatty tissue and muscle are alike in this regard. magnetic field and the
permeability, µ, of the
For the same strength of alternating magnetic field then, both fatty tissue and muscle material. It does not depend
will have the same strength of induced electric field. Thus the rate of heating of on the electrical properties, σ
muscle in this situation will be about sixteen times greater than that of fatty tissue. and ε, of the tissue.

In practice such a degree of selective heating is difficult to achieve. This is for two
reasons:

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 190

* Muscle is located beneath fatty tissue and so is further from the induction coil.
Thus the magnetic field is weaker in muscle and the strength of the induced
electric field is correspondingly smaller.

* Fatty tissue, being closer to the induction coil may also experience an
appreciable electric field due to the capacitance between adjacent turns of the
coil. This effect was described earlier (see figure 7.8).

These two factors combine to increase the heating of fatty tissue relative to muscle so For more information on
that a sixteen to one advantage is rarely obtained. Nonetheless efficient selective relative heating rates see the
heating is achieved with close spacing of the turns of the coil and a sufficiently large book 'Therapeutic Heat and
coil to patient distance. One would also expect good discrimination with applicators Cold' J F Lehmann (ed)
which incorporate an electric field screen in front of the inductive coil. (1982) chapters 6 and 10.

HEAT AND TEMPERATURE RISE


Having described the factors determining the rate of heating of tissue we now
consider the relationship between rate of heating and rate of increase of temperature.

The rate of heating per unit volume is given in terms of electric field intensity and real
current density by equation 7.1. Hence the amount of heat produced per unit volume,
∆Qv, in a time interval ∆t is given by equation 7.3.

∆Qv = E.ir.∆t .... (7.3)

∆Qv has units of joules per cubic meter (J.m-3).

In considering the therapeutic effects of diathermy it is not the heat produced, as such,
which determines the physiological response but the resulting temperature rise.
Temperature is a key factor in determining the rates of chemical reactions and hence
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 191

physiological processes.

The SI unit of temperature is the kelvin (symbol K). It is related to the perhaps more
familiar degree Celsius (oC) by the expression
oC = K - 273.15
To convert from degrees
Notice that from this definition the size of the degree Celsius is the same as the kelvin. Celsius to Kelvin's, simply
In other words a change in temperature of five degrees Celsius is precisely the same add 273.15 to the Celsius
as a change of five Kelvin's. When we are talking about increases in temperature temperature.
brought about by diathermy treatment the terms kelvin and degrees Celsius can be
used interchangeably to describe the increase.

When a fixed amount of heat is supplied to different substances the increase in


temperature of each will, in general, be quite different. The factor which determines
the resulting temperature increase is the specific heat capacity of the substance.

The specific heat capacity is defined as the amount of heat required to raise 1 kg of a
substance through one kelvin. The units of specific heat capacity are thus joules per
kilogram per kelvin. This can be measured experimentally by supplying a certain
amount of heat (∆Q) to a known mass (m) of the substance an measuring the
resulting temperature increase (∆T). The experiment must be arranged so that all of
the heat supplied is used to increase the temperature of the substance. If the loss of
heat is negligible then the specific heat capacity (c) can be calculated using equation
7.4:
∆Q Alternatively, when the
c= .... (7.4) specific heat capacity of a
m.∆T substance is known, equation
7.4 can be used to calculate
When we consider the heating of tissues by diathermy, heat transfer between tissues the temperature increase
and to the bloodstream will have a large effect on the temperature distribution during resulting from the heat
treatment. supplied.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 192

Prior to the start of treatment the body tissues are in a state of dynamic equilibrium.
Cellular activity, metabolism and muscle contraction result in the steady production of
heat and the circulation of blood and tissue fluids provide an efficient means of heat
transfer. The net production of heat is balanced by net transfer of heat from the tissue
and a stable temperature is maintained.

Once treatment is started heat is produced in the tissue according to equation 7.3 and
the temperature starts to increase. An expression for the initial rate of increase in
temperature is obtained below.

Rearranging 7.4 we have ∆Q = m.c.∆T


Dividing this expression by volume we obtain:
∆Qv = ρ.C.∆T .... (7.5)
where ρ is the mass per unit volume or density of the tissue.

Dividing 7.5 by ∆t gives:


∆Qv ∆T
= ρ.c. .... (7.6)
∆t ∆t
where ∆Qv/∆t is the volume rate of heating (in Joules per cubic metre per second) and
∆T/∆t is the rate of increase in temperature (in Kelvin's per second).

This equation can be used to compare the initial rate of temperature increase in fatty Note that this conclusion is a
tissue with that of muscle. The densities of the two tissues are similar but the heat general one. It applies not
capacity of muscle is some 50% greater than that of fatty tissue. Thus if the rate of just to shortwave diathermy
heating of each tissue is the same, the initial rate of temperature increase in muscle but to any diathermic
will be only two thirds of that of fatty tissue. To produce the same initial rate of modality.
increase in temperature in each tissue the rate at which heat energy is produced in
muscle must be 50% greater.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 193

An equation specifically applicable to shortwave diathermy is obtained by solving


equations 7.5 and 7.3. We then have: ρ.c.∆T = E.ir.∆t, which on rearranging gives:
∆T E.ir
= .... (7.7)
∆t ρc
Equation 7.7 shows that the initial rate of increase in temperature (∆T/∆t) in shortwave
diathermy depends on four factors:

* E, the field intensity at the point


* ir, the magnitude of the real current density at the point
* ρ, the density of the tissue
* c, the specific heat capacity of the tissue

Once the temperature of any tissue has increased appreciably two things happen:

* The body's temperature regulation mechanism responds. Blood vessels dilate,


circulation is increased and more heat is transferred from the tissue.

* Heat is transferred by the blood and tissue fluids to adjacent cooler tissues.

Both of these effects lower the rate of increase in temperature. Eventually, the stage is
reached where the temperature ceases to increase. A new dynamic equilibrium is
achieved where the net production of heat is once again balanced by the net transfer
from the tissue.

Figure 7.17 illustrates the temperature variation during treatment. There is a transient
period during which the tissue temperature increases, followed by a steady state
where a constant (elevated) temperature is produced. The transient period for tissue
volumes of interest in physiotherapy is typically of the order of twenty to thirty minutes

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 194

(see Lehmann (1982), chapter 10). Thus for treatment times of up to several minutes,
equation 7.7 gives a reasonable approximation to the real physical situation.

Application of equations 7.1 and 7.7 to quantitative prediction of


the rate of heating and rate of temperature increase in different
parts of tissue is difficult. The difficulty arises in the calculation
of the field intensity in a particular area. For a review of results
obtained using various approximations see A. W. Guy in J F
Lehmann (1982).

In patient treatment, shortwave diathermy remains something of


an art as well as a science. The physiotherapist must use a
knowledge of anatomy together with knowledge of the electrical
properties of tissues to determine the optimum placement of
electrodes or coil to give the required field pattern. Once the
field pattern is selected, the physiotherapist uses a knowledge
of the relative heating of the tissues and the patient's report of a
sensation of warmth to adjust the intensity of the applied field to
an appropriate level. With this procedure it is not possible to
accurately monitor dose or dose rate for the individual tissues.
Since this is a problem common to all diathermic modalities we
will defer further discussion of dosage until chapter eleven.
Figure 7.16
Physiological Effects A simple model for tissue temperature
variation during treatment.
The therapeutic value of shortwave diathermy arises from the
physiological response of tissues to an increase in
temperature. A number of physiological responses are found:

* at the cellular level an increase in temperature increases the rate of biochemical


reactions. Thus cellular metabolism is increased - there is an increased
demand for oxygen and nutrients and the output of waste products is increased.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 195

* blood supply is increased. A number of factors determine this response. The


increased output of cellular waste products triggers dilation of the capillaries and
arterioles. The temperature increase itself causes some dilation, mainly in the
superficial tissues where heating is greatest. In addition, stimulation of sensory
nerve endings (again mainly in the superficial tissues) can cause a reflex
dilation.

* a rise in temperature can induce relaxation of muscles. If there is abnormal


muscle activity caused by pain, for example, repeated treatment with shortwave
diathermy can be beneficial. The treatment helps to interrupt the vicious circle of
pain producing muscle activity which in turn produces more pain and so on. A
number of factors may contribute to relaxation: the direct effect of heat on muscle
tissue, the removal of any accumulated metabolites due to increased circulation
and the sedative effect of heat on sensory nerves.
* the response of sensory nerves to heat is useful for the relief of pain generally.
Mild heating appears to inhibit the transmission of sensory impulses via nerve
fibres. In addition, when pain results from inflammation of tissue an increase in
the rate of absorption of exudate with increase in temperature can result in a
secondary pain-relief effect.

Some claims have been made that additional non-thermal effects can be produced
under the conditions used for therapy. As yet there is no clinical evidence for these
claims. Non-thermal effects seem to have been demonstrated using pulsed
shortwave treatment when the peak power level is significantly higher than used for
diathermy. The few published comparative studies indicate little or no nonthermal
effect at the low continuous power levels of conventional shortwave field treatment.
These points are considered further in chapter 8 following.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 196

EXERCISES
1 Figure 7.1 shows a schematic diagram of shortwave diathermy apparatus.
(a) Briefly explain how the apparatus produces a high-frequency alternating
electric or magnetic field.
(b) What is the function of inductors L1 and L2?
c) Why is the capacitor in the patient tuning circuit a variable one?

2 (a) Why is it necessary to tune shortwave diathermy apparatus with the patient
coupled to the machine?
(b) What is the advantage of automatic versus manual tuning of shortwave
diathermy apparatus?

3 Figure 7.2 illustrates the response of ions, polar molecules and non-polar
molecules to a high-frequency alternating electric field.
(a) Briefly describe the movement of each kind of molecule in the field.
(b) How is the movement related to heat production in a material?
(c) Which kind of movement is associated with greatest heat production and
which with least heat production?

4 (a) What is meant by the terms 'real current' and 'displacement current'?
(b) Consider the movement of ions, polar molecules and non-polar molecules
in an alternating electric field. Describe the relationship between each kind
of movement and real and displacement current.

5 (a) Consider each of fatty tissue, muscle and bone in the shortwave diathermy
field. Is current flow in each tissue best described as real or displacement
current?
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 197

(b) On the basis of your classification which tissue would be associated with
maximum heat production?
(c) Describe the complications (as far as prediction of heat production is
concerned) caused by the presence of Iymphatic and blood vessels in fatty
tissue.

6 Figure 7.4 shows current pathways in a model for an arm or leg. Describe
the principal factors determining the relative rate of heating of each tissue
layer.

7 A patient's lower limb is enclosed in a solenoidally wound coil as shown in figure


7.6.
(a) Describe the motion of polar, non-polar and ionic molecules when a high
frequency alternating current flows through the coil.
(b) Indicate (with a diagram) the direction of movement of molecules in the
limb.

8 If the solenoidally wound coil in question 7 was replaced by a pair of capacitor


plates (one above the knee, one below the sole of the foot), what would be the
new directions of molecular motion? Draw a diagram to illustrate.

9 Figure 7.8 shows the electric field associated with two adjacent turns of an
induction coil
(a) what is the practical significance of this electric field in patient treatment?
(b) how can the effects of this electric field be minimized?

10 For shortwave diathermy it is common practice to use electrodes which are


somewhat larger than the structure to be treated (figure 7.9). Explain in terms of:
(a) the field pattern produced

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 198

(b) the pattern of heating of tissue.


What are the advantages and disadvantages of using unequal size electrode
(figure 7.9(c) )?

11 (a) It is normal practice to space electrodes as far apart as possible (figure


7.10(b)) in shortwave diathermy treatment. Why is this the case?
(b) What is the practical limitation on the electrode spacing which can be used?
(c) Is there any advantage in positioning one electrode close to the patient's
tissue as shown in figure 7.10(c)?

12 Consider the electrode arrangements shown in figure 7.11. Explain why the field
intensity is non-uniform in diagrams (a) and (c). Under what circumstances will
the field intensity be uniform, as in (b)?

13 (a) Draw a diagram showing a coplanar arrangement of electrodes over tissue


and the resulting field pattern.
(b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of coplanar electrode
arrangements?
(c) What practical limit is there on the spacing of coplanar electrodes?

14 Consider the hollow dielectric between capacitor plates which is shown in figure
7.14.
(a) Explain where heat production is greatest and why.
b) What technique can be used to produce more uniform heating of the
dielectric? Explain.
SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 199

15 When coplanar electrodes are used for patient treatment the tissues can be
considered to be in series electrically (see figure 7.15(a)).
(a) what approximations are implicit in this statement?
(b) draw an electrical equivalent circuit similar to that in figure 7.15(a) for the
situation where the electrodes are close together.
(c) how would bringing the electrodes closer together affect the relative heating
rate of muscle and fatty tissue? Justify your answer.

16 (a) Explain why, in principle, it is easier to produce selective heating of muscle


with an inductive coil rather than capacitor field electrodes.
(b) what practical constraints limit the selective heating of muscle with an
induction coil?

17 (a) Explain the meaning of each of the terms in equation 7.6.


(b) The initial rate of temperature increase in fatty tissue in an experiment is
found to be double that of muscle. Assume that the densities of each tissue
are the same and that muscle has a 50% greater heat capacity and
calculate the relative rate of heating of the tissues.

18 The relationship between heat production (∆Q) and current flow (I) in a conductor
is given by Joule's law: ∆Q = V.I.∆t where V is the potential difference across the
conductor and ∆t is the time interval for which current I flows.
(a) Show how equation 7.3 can be obtained as an alternative form of Joule's
law.
(b) An electric field intensity of 100 V.m-1 in a conductor results in a current
density of 50 A.m-2 . Use equation 7.2 to calculate the amount of heat
produced in a 30 second time interval. You may assume that the current is
entirely real.

SHORTWAVE DIATHERMY 200

19 (a) Explain the meaning of each of the terms in equation 7.7.


(b) An electric field of intensity 200 V.m-1 in a material results in a real current
density of 50 A.m-2. The mass density of the material is 900 kg.m-3 and its
specific heat capacity is 4.0 kJ.kg-1.K-1. Calculate the initial rate of increase
in temperature (∆T/∆t) of the material.

20 A block of conducting material is placed in an electric field. The field intensity in


the material is 300 V.m-1 and the resulting real current density is 120 A.m-2. If the
material has a density of 1000 kg.m-3 and it has a specific heat capacity of 3.8
kJ.kg -1 .K -1 , calculate the initial rate of increase in temperature of the material
(using equation 7.7).

21 Equation 7.7 describes the initial rate of increase in temperature of tissue in


shortwave diathermy treatment. Describe the physiological response to the
initial temperature rise and the effect this has on the subsequent rate of increase
of temperature (figure 7.16).
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 201

8 Non-Diathermic Fields
PULSED SHORTWAVE APPARATUS
Most shortwave diathermy machines offer the option of pulsed or continuous output.
With continuous output, tissue heating is maximized as energy is transferred
continually from the apparatus to the tissue. With pulsed output, energy is delivered in
brief bursts with a long off-time between the bursts, so the average energy transferred
is low.

Pulsed shortwave is classed as non-diathermic in


that the average power dissipated in the patient's
tissue is too low to produce the appreciable
temperature rises associated with traditional
(continuous) shortwave treatment. For this reason it
is described here rather than in the previous chapter
where the emphasis was on the use of electric and
magnetic fields to produce deep heating.

Consider an example. If a burst of high frequency AC


with a duration of 1 ms is generated at a burst
frequency of 50 Hz, the period of each repetition ('on'
time + 'off' time) is 1000/50 = 20 ms so 'on' time is 1
ms and the 'off' time is 19 ms and consequently the
average energy is 1/20th of the peak energy (figure
8.1).

Figure 8.1
(a) continuous and (b) pulsed output
from shortwave machines.

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 202

It is asserted, though it has not been demonstrated, that pulsed shortwave is clinically
beneficial because there are physiological effects of a 'non-thermal' nature which are
produced by the bursts of electromagnetic energy.

Figure 8.2 shows the essential features of pulsed shortwave apparatus. It is the
similar to figure 7.1 but with the addition of a gating circuit to control the output of the
27.12 MHz sinewave generator. The gating circuit switches the sinewave generator
on and off at the operator-chosen frequency (50 Hz in the previous example). It also
controls the burst duration (1 ms in the previous example). Some machines have a
predetermined burst duration, others allow operator selection.

Components and subsections within the yellow


rectangle in figure 8.2 are inside the apparatus. The
functions of each subsection are as follows:

* The sinewave generator produces a sinusoidal


AC signal at the internationally approved
frequency of 27.12 MHz [see chapter 5 and
chapter 7].

* The gating circuit generates rectangular pulses


to control the gain of the sinewave generator.
The pulse frequency can normally be adjusted
in the range approximately 1 Hz to 200 Hz.

* A power amplifier in the sinewave generator


circuit amplifies the signal to a level suitable for
driving the patient circuit. The pulse power is
high but the average power is low. Figure 8.2
Pulsed shortwave diathermy
* The resonant circuit (the patient tuning circuit) apparatus (schematic).
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 203

couples energy generated by the apparatus to the patient. Its operation was
described in chapter 7. Output from the apparatus is applied to the patient using
electrodes or an induction coil, in the same way that conventional (continuous-
mode) shortwave diathermy is applied.

* A power supply is needed to convert mains supplied 50 Hz AC to DC of whatever


voltage is required to power the gating circuit, sinewave generator and amplifier.

Pulsed shortwave is described as 'non-diathermic', meaning that it does not produce


deep heating. The rationale is as follows. Consider and compare two pulsed
shortwave machines. A difference between them is in the pulse frequencies which
can be selected and the pulse width. Both have a peak power output of approximately
1000 watts. Machine 1 has a pulse width of 65 microseconds and a pulse frequency
selectable between 80 Hz and 600 Hz. Machine 2 has a pulse width of 400
microseconds and a frequency range from 15 Hz to 200 Hz.

Suppose machine 1 was set to a frequency of 80 Hz. The pulse width is fixed, in the 5.2 W is not a high power
machine, at 65 microseconds so the output is on for a total of 65 x 80 = 5200 level. Imagine shining an
microseconds each second. When the intensity control is set to deliver a maximum ordinary battery-operated
output of 1000 W pulses the average power output is only: torch at your skin from a short
5200 x 10-6 distance. The heat and light
x 1000 W = 5.2 W energy produced by the torch
1 has little impact on your
This is a tiny fraction, approximately 0.5%, of the peak power. tissues.

At a frequency of 600 Hz the average power at maximum output rises to:


65 x 600 x 10-6
x 1000 W = 39 W
1
This is 39/1000 W which is still only 3.9% of the peak power.

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 204

The average power is low and is only a small fraction, between 0.5% and 4%, of the
peak power per pulse.

Machine 2, with a pulse width of 400 microseconds, has a frequency range of 15 Hz to The calculation of average
200 Hz and a peak power output of 1000 W. Calculations similar to the previous power is left as an exercise
examples show that the maximum average power varies between 6 watts (at 15 Hz) for the reader. It is the same
and 80 watts (at 200 Hz). Again, the average power is low and is only a small fraction, as the previous calculation,
between 0.6% and 8%, of the peak power per pulse. but with different frequencies
and burst durations.
The low power levels of pulsed shortwave ensure that gross heating effects, due to an
appreciable increase in tissue temperature, do not occur.

Effects of Pulsed Shortwave Fields


Pulsed shortwave treatment is advocated as therapeutically beneficial due to non-
thermal effects. Unfortunately, the advocates seem, in the main, to be the
manufacturers of the equipment, rather than independent researchers who have
carried-out proper studies.

The few studies which have been undertaken include human and laboratory animal
observations at the tissue level. Healing of experimentally produced skin wounds and
haematomas in laboratory animals has been shown, in one study, to be promoted by See chapter 10 of JF
pulsed shortwave treatment. Another study showed that human soft tissue injuries Lehmann (Ed) 'Therapeutic
responded more rapidly in comparison to control (untreated) groups and groups of Heat and Cold'. Williams &
patients receiving a similar dose (but not dose rate) of continuous shortwave Wilkins (1982) for more
treatment. Some promising results have also been obtained in studies of rate and details of these studies.
extent of nerve regeneration in laboratory animals. These results are indicative of
therapeutic benefit but, due to their small number, are by no means conclusive.

Proponents of pulsed shortwave have argued that another diathermic modality,


ultrasound (chapter 10, following), has been shown to be useful when applied in
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 205

pulsed mode for the treatment of a number of conditions where heating as such is
either contraindicated or of dubious value. The argument is that if ultrasound can
used to advantage in pulsed mode, where non-thermal effects are the explanation for
any therapeutic benefits, then pulsed shortwave should also be beneficial. This
arguments is based on two questionable premises. First that 'non-thermal' benefits
of ultrasound treatment actually exist and second (perhaps more importantly) that
non-thermal effects will also be produced by pulsed shortwave treatment.

Biophysical Mechanisms
Although the evidence base for pulsed shortwave treatment is small, a biophysical In the absence of such
argument can be made for possible non-thermal effects of pulsed shortwave. effects, pulsing the output so
that tissue heating is a
The response of ions, polar molecules and non-polar molecules to an applied electric minimum would be of little
or magnetic field is well understood (chapter 7) and heat production in the applied therapeutic value.
field is readily explained. What is not known is how these same molecules
responding in a biological environment can produce non-thermal cellular effects of
therapeutic value.

When electromagnetic energy is applied in brief bursts, the ions, polar molecules and With pulsed shortwave, the
non-polar molecules will respond equally briefly, with vigorous movement during the instantaneous temperature
burst and a dying-down of activity between bursts. During the bursts, we would expect increase is high but the
considerable molecular movement which would not increase the average average temperature
temperature appreciably but which would markedly increase the instantaneous increase is low.
temperature.

One could reasonably speculate that the transient excitation might affect concentration
gradients, movement of molecules across the cell membrane and changes in
membrane permeability in either or both of excitable cells and non-excitable cells.
There may also be transient thermal effects on the synaptic junctions of nerve cells.
These ideas remain speculative in the absence of appropriate experimental studies.

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 206

Optimum Treatment Parameters


The operating frequency of pulsed shortwave apparatus is 27.12 MHz. This particular
frequency is used because there is international agreement that it be allocated for use
in diathermy and it is known to produce heating at depth. There is no evidence to
suggest that 27.12 MHz is the most appropriate frequency for clinical use. Another This limitation, of course,
frequency might be optimum in terms of depth efficiency of heating. As yet, only applies to both pulsed and
limited experimental work has been conducted on the effect of different frequencies in continuous shortwave.
the high frequency range.

The burst frequency range from 10 Hz to 100 Hz or more may well turn out to be a
clinically useful range as it overlaps the 'biological' frequency range. That is, the range
of frequencies associated with best response from excitable cells. Unfortunately,
comparative studies of the effect of different pulse frequencies (and burst durations)
have yet to be conducted.

The value of pulsed shortwave is thus questionable. Despite the long history of
commercial availability and use, the question of therapeutic benefit remains to be
answered. Therapeutic benefits seem possible but have not been adequately
demonstrated.

LOW FREQUENCY PULSED MAGNETIC FIELDS


During the 1980s, low frequency pulsed magnetic field (PMF) apparatus gained some
popularity as a therapeutic modality. The apparatus consists of a signal generating
circuit (a pulse or sinewave generator), an amplifier circuit, a patient circuit and a
power supply (figure 8.3). Subsections within the apparatus are shown in the yellow
rectangle.
* The signal generator circuit produces either low frequency sinusoidal AC or DC
pulses of low frequency. The selectable frequencies are in the 'biological'
frequency range up to about 100 Hz.
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 207

* Current from the signal generator circuit is


amplified and delivered to an induction coil,
creating an intense, pulsed magnetic field.

* A power supply converts mains-frequency AC to


the DC which is needed to power the signal
generator and the amplifier circuit.

The part of the patient to be treated is placed within


the induction coil. Large coils are used to enclose
the trunk for treatment of, for example, low back pain.
Smaller coils are used to treat smaller regions such
as parts of the limbs As with pulsed shortwave, the
advocacy and the recommendations for treatment
seemed to come from the manufacturers of the Figure 8.3
equipment, rather than independent researchers. Low-frequency pulsed magnetic
field apparatus (schematic).
An argument has been presented that pulsed magnetic field (PMF) therapy is of
benefit for the treatment of musculo-skeletal disorders in general and bone-healing
in particular. The evidence of value for the treatment of musculo-skeletal disorders
is lacking. The evidence for promotion of bone-healing is more convincing.

Promotion of Bone Healing


In the mid 1960's it was found that hydrated living bone is a piezo-electric material:
when stressed the bone becomes charged. The phenomenon is illustrated in
figure 8.4.

When a bending load is applied, one surface of the bone is subject to a


compressive stress (the top surface in figure 8.4) and the opposite surface is
subject to a stretching or tensile stress. The bone responds by becoming

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 208

negatively charged on the surface under compression and positively charged


on the surface under tension. This observation provides the basis for an
explanation of the biological phenomenon of stress remodelling; the
mechanism by which bones or areas of bone respond to stress by growing in
size and load bearing capability. It was reasoned that tiny current produced as
a result of the piezoelectrically induced potentials can stimulate bone growth or
resorption.

Subsequent experiments demonstrated that small (microampere range) Figure 8.4


currents applied by implanted electrodes could also promote bone formation. The piezoelectric effect in bone.
Direct current promoted bone formation near the cathode, alternating current
promoted bone formation near both electrodes.

Two problems associated with the use of implanted electrodes are the risk of Extensive case studies have
infection and the localization of bone formation in the vicinity of the electrodes. These established the effectiveness
problems are overcome by inducing current flow in tissue using a pulsed magnetic of pulsed magnetic fields for
field. As the magnetic field increases and decreases, eddy currents (chapter 6) are the treatment of non-united
produced in the tissue. fractures.
Induced Current in Tissue
When considering the effects of low frequency pulsed magnetic fields it is important to
make the distinction between the voltage waveform produced by the apparatus, the
current waveform in the induction coil and the current induced in the patient's tissue.

If a rectangular voltage waveform is applied to an induction coil the current waveform


will not be perfectly rectangular, but more rounded. This is because when the voltage
suddenly changes it takes a finite time for the current through the coil and the
magnetic field around the coil to change correspondingly. The larger is the
inductance of the coil, the longer it takes for the change to be complete. Figure 8.5
shows the relationship between voltage and current in the coil for different values of
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 209

inductance. The larger is the inductance, the longer it takes for the
current to increase to maximum.

The rate of increase in current intensity in the coil is important because


this determines the induced current in tissue. Eddy currents are
produced in tissue as a result of a changing magnetic field (chapter 6).
When the magnetic field is constant, no current will be induced. Thus
when the current in the coil is changing, and only when it is changing, a
current will be induced in tissue. Figure 8.6 shows the relationship
between induced current and current in the coil for the two waveforms
shown in figure 8.5.

When the coil current suddenly starts to increase, the rapid rate of
increase (figure 8.6a) results in a high induced current. The magnetic Figure 8.5
field around the coil builds-up rapidly so the induced current is large. Voltage and current waveforms for (a) small
The rate of increase then drops rapidly and the induced current drops and (b) large value inductances.
accordingly. A current spike is induced in tissue. When the coil current
suddenly decreases, a current spike of the opposite polarity is induced
due to the decreasing magnetic field intensity. The more rapidly
changing coil current in 8.6(a) induces large current spikes but these
are of short duration as the coil current rapidly reaches a steady value.
The more slowly changing coil current in 8.6(b) induces current spikes
which are smaller in amplitude but of longer duration.

Figure 8.6
Current in an induction coil and resulting
current induced in tissue for (a) small and
(b) large value inductances.

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 210

The size of the induced current depends on the rate of change of the
magnetic field and thus on the rate of change of current in the coil.

If a sinusoidal current is applied


to an induction coil the induced
current will have the same
shape but be shifted in phase.
This is because the rate of
change of a sine waveform is
another sine waveform phase-
shifted by one quarter of a
wavelength; in other words a
cosine waveform. This is shown
in figure 8.7(a).

Figure 8.7(b) shows the


rectangular current waveform
induced when triangular
waveform is passed through an
induction coil. A rectangular Figure 8.7
waveform is induced because Induced current waveforms for (a) sinusoidal
the triangular waveform is alternately increasing at a constant rate and (b) triangular currents in an induction coil.
then decreasing at a constant rate. The induced current is alternately
constant and positive then constant and negative.

Treatment Parameters
No definite statements can yet be made regarding the most
appropriate current waveform for magnetic field therapy. Even in the
case of bone repair, where the clinical evidence of effectiveness is
substantial, there is uncertainty as to the best waveshape and
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 211

frequency. Excellent results seem to have been obtained using a burst of high-
frequency pulses (frequency approximately 4 kHz) in 5 millisecond bursts repeated at
a frequency of 15 Hz. Similar success has been achieved using single pulses and
more intense fields wit a pulse frequency of 1 Hz. Optimum treatment parameters are
yet to be established.

Since heating appears to play no role (the energies involved are too low) one cannot
predict effectiveness on the simple basis of total energy transfer. Nor can optimum
frequencies be deduced without adequate knowledge of the cellular mechanisms
involved.

A conclusion is that chronic non-union of fractured bone can be successfully treated


with low-frequency pulsed magnetic fields but that its value for the treatment of soft
tissue injury remains open to question.

EXERCISES
1 Figure 8.2 shows a schematic diagram of pulsed shortwave diathermy
apparatus.
(a) Briefly explain the function of each subsection.
(b) What range of output pulse widths and pulse frequencies are normally
provided?

2 Suppose the peak power output of a pulsed shortwave machine is 900 W and
the pulse width is 300 ms.
(a) What is the maximum frequency which can be used if the average power
output is not to exceed 50 W?
(b) For a pulse frequency of 200 Hz, what is the average power output?

NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 212

3 One justification which is often invoked for pulsed shortwave treatment is that
certain biological responses are 'non-linear' and exhibit a 'threshold effect'.
(a) What is meant by the terms 'non-linear' and 'threshold effect'?
(b) The average power output may be increased either by increasing the pulse
frequency or by increasing the peak power output. If threshold effects are
important, which of these adjustments would have the greatest biological
effect?

4 Suppose it was established that for pulsed shortwave therapy an optimum pulse
frequency was 100 Hz and a desirable peak to average power ratio was 50 to 1.
What pulse width would be necessary?

5 (a) What is a piezo-electric material?


(b) It is known that direct current promotes bone formation near the cathode. If
bone, in vivo, is loaded as in figure 8.4, in what region will bone formation be
promoted?

6 Figure 8.3 shows a schematic diagram of low frequency pulsed magnetic field
apparatus. Briefly explain the function of each subsection.

7 Consider figures 8.5 and 8.6.


(a) Explain why the current waveforms in figure 8.5 are rounded versions of the
voltage waveforms.
(b) Explain why the induced current waveforms in tissue have the shapes
shown in figure 8.6.

8 The diagrams below show current waveforms in an induction coil placed near
tissue.
NON-DIATHERMIC FIELDS 213

Draw diagrams to show the waveforms of the induced current in tissue for each
of waveforms (a), (b), (c) and (d).

9 Draw diagrams showing the pathways of the induced current for biological tissue
placed (a) adjacent to an induction coil (b) within an induction coil.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 214

9 Sound and Electromagnetic Waves


Many kinds of wave motion are found in nature - in this chapter we examine only two -
sound waves and electromagnetic waves. The two are very different in character but
share a number of common properties and it is these common properties which we
first consider. We look at how waves are produced in more detail in later chapters.
DIFFERENT KINDS OF WAVES
Any kind of wave motion, be it the ripples on a pond, sound or light has four
characteristics which are fundamentally associated with the wave. These are: the
wavelength, frequency, velocity of propagation and amplitude (or size). Figure 9.1
shows one kind of wave motion; a sinusoidal oscillation travelling in a finely coiled
spring.
As the spring is shaken up and down,
transverse oscillations are produced which
travel along the spring at a characteristic
velocity, v, determined by the physical
properties of the spring. The wavelength, λ,
is the distance between peaks of the waves,
that is the distance over which the wave
repeats itself.

The (peak) amplitude is the maximum


displacement of the spring from the mean
position. Sometimes the peak-to-peak
amplitude (which is double the peak
amplitude) is specified.
In order to sustain the oscillations, one end of Figure 9.1
the spring must be moved up an down with Transverse oscillations in a spring.
an appropriate frequency, f. The velocity,

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 215

wavelength and frequency are related by the wave equation:


v = f.λ .... (9.1)
The wave shown in figure 9.1 is a transverse sine wave - so called because the
displacement of the spring is perpendicular or transverse to the direction of
propagation. When the oscillations are along the direction of propagation the wave is
called longitudinal. Figure 9.2 shows a longitudinal wave generated in a spring. For a
longitudinal wave, the wavelength and velocity are easy to determine. The wavelength
is the distance between two regions of compression. The velocity is determined by
measuring how far a region of compression moves along the spring (∆x) in a known
time interval (∆t). One region of compression, moving to the right, is coloured in figure
9.2. The velocity is calculated using the formula v = ∆x/∆t. The amplitude is less
apparent but, in the case of a spring, it can be determined by attaching a marker to a
point on the spring and measuring how far the marker oscillates back and forth from
its mean position.

Sound waves are longitudinal


compressional waves. By their very
nature they require a material medium for
their existence as they are displacements
of the material medium - solid, liquid or
gas - about some mean position.

The human ear can detect only a


restricted range of sound frequencies,
from the lowest tones of an organ, around
16 Hz, up to some 12 to 20 kHz. The
upper frequency limit of audibility
diminishes with age. Frequencies
greater than 20 kHz are termed ultrasonic,
although some animals can hear
frequencies up to 100 kHz. Figure 9.2
Longitudinal waves in a spring.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 216

Figure 9.3 is a pictorial representation of a sound wave.

Lines drawn close together represent regions of high


pressure. Widely spaced lines represent regions of low
pressure (rarefaction). These regions move through any
particular medium at a fixed velocity. For example, all
sound waves travel at 340 m.s-1 in air, regardless of the
sound frequency. In water, the velocity of sound waves is
close to 1100 m.s-1.

Electromagnetic waves are a very special kind of


transverse wave. They consist of a transverse sinusoidal
electric field together with a transverse magnetic field.
Light, radio waves, microwaves and X-rays are all Figure 9.3
electromagnetic waves with different frequencies, but the Diagramatic representation of
same velocity. The frequency and wavelength can vary a sound wave.
but, in a particular medium, the velocity is constant. The
speed of propagation of electromagnetic waves in empty
space is a universal constant on which much of the
structure of modern physics is based.

A convenient representation of an electromagnetic wave


is shown in figure 9.4. The sinusoidal electric field E, is
transverse to the direction of propagation (arrow labelled
v) and also perpendicular to the magnetic field, B.

The existence of electromagnetic waves was not


suspected until 1864 when the Scottish scientist, James
Clerk Maxwell published a theoretical paper in which their
existence was predicted. The velocity predicted for these
waves turned out to be extremely close to that measured
experimentally for light, which led Maxwell to conclude that Figure 9.4
light itself was an electromagnetic wave. Prior to this Diagramatic representation of
scientist since Newton's day had puzzled over the nature an electromagnetic wave.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 217

of light: whether it was corpuscular or a wave motion, and if a wave, a wave in what?
In many way Maxwell's work formed the keystone of 19th century physics.
Maxwell had set himself the task of generalizing all of the accumulated knowledge of
electrostatics, electric current, magnetism and electromagnetism: to write a few
simple laws from which everything else could be derived. He summarized his
findings in a set of four equations which expressed the relationship between electric
and magnetic fields. In writing the equations he noticed they had a certain symmetry
about them, but that the symmetry could only be made complete by assuming the
existence of a hitherto unobserved experimental result: that a changing electric field
gives rise to a changing magnetic field. This assumption, together with other known
facts of electricity and magnetism gave rise to the four equations which bear Maxwell's
name.
Not only did Maxwell's equations account for all that was known of electricity and
magnetism, they also made one startling prediction: whenever charges are The mathematics of
accelerated, an electromagnetic wave is produced. It was previously known that a Maxwell's equations can be
moving charge produces a magnetic field which disappears when the charge stop found in most textbooks on
moving. The equations predict that in addition an electromagnetic wave is produced if electromagnetism and will
the charge accelerates and once the wave is produced its continued existence and not be discussed here.
propagation is independent of what subsequently happens to the charge. Rather the focus is on the
implications of his equations.
It is not a great step from this to the conclusion that all electromagnetic waves have
their origin in the accelerated motion of charges.
Since Maxwell's time electromagnetic waves with frequencies ranging from 5 Hz to
1024 Hz have been produced and used. Although they are produced an detected by
seemingly different means and given different names, they all have essentially the
same nature. A range of frequencies of electromagnetic waves is referred-to as an
electromagnetic spectrum. Figure 9.5 shows such a spectrum and its most familiar
regions.

Electromagnetic waves with frequencies up to 1012 Hz can be generated electrically.


For example the normal AM or FM waves received by a radio are produced by
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 218

generating an oscillating electrical current in the transmitting aerial. Electrons are


accelerated back and forth along the wire and the result is that electromagnetic waves
are produced, radiating from the wire.

Figure 9.5
The electromagnetic spectrum.
Production of current by electronic circuitry becomes increasingly difficult at higher
frequencies and above 10 12 Hz it is necessary to use alternative methods for There are limits to the speed
accelerating charges and producing the waves. with which charges can move
through electronic (silicon
Infrared radiation, sometimes referred-to as 'radiant heat' is emitted by all matter. chip) circuits. This limits the
This is because the atoms and molecules are continually moving. In a solid, for frequency of electromagnetic
example, the atoms are constrained but are able to vibrate about their mean position. waves which can be
It is this movement energy which we call the heat energy of an object. The atomic produced by such means.
jiggling means that charges (negative electrons and positive nuclei) are continually
accelerating, so they radiate electromagnetic waves. At normal temperatures, most of
the electromagnetic radiation has frequencies in the infrared portion of the spectrum.
When something is heated, the molecules within it are given more energy and they
move or jiggle more vigorously. A consequence is that the electromagnetic radiation
produced has a higher average frequency. For example, if a piece of metal is heated
from room temperature it first emits only infrared radiation, but as the temperature is
increased, the metal becomes red-hot, then white, then blue hot. This is because the

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 219

average frequency of the emitted radiation increases.


Higher frequency (visible light) radiation can also be produced by movement the Infrared, visible and
outer-shell electrons of an atom - hence the different colours produced when, for
example, different chemicals are introduced into a bunsen flame. ultraviolet light can be
produced by heating of
If atoms are bombarded with high energy electrons, inner shell electrons can be materials and temperature
knocked from their orbitals, producing electromagnetic waves in the ultraviolet and X- elevation is the major factor
ray parts of the spectrum. Higher frequency gamma and hard-X radiation can not be in determining the frequency
produced by knocking electrons from their orbitals, but are produced when atomic distribution of the waves.
nuclei are split, as in a nuclear reactor or nuclear explosion. The spontaneous decay
of naturally occurring radioisotopes also results in production of gamma and hard-X
radiation, due to the massive acceleration of the fragments when the nucleus is split.

Electromagnetic Waves and Safety


Any form of electromagnetic radiation can pose a biological hazard but higher
frequencies are more dangerous. A distinction is made between ionizing and non-
ionizing radiation. Electromagnetic waves with frequencies somewhat higher than
those of visible light constitute ionizing radiation. When these higher frequency waves
are absorbed by matter, electrons are knocked from their orbitals producing ions. If
the displaced electrons are involved in bonding atoms together in a molecule, the
bond will be broken and the molecule will be damaged, sometimes split. Thus higher
frequency electromagnetic waves can cause molecular disruption.
In most instances, molecular disruption will not harm cells or tissues as the damaged
molecules can be removed and replaced. But if the disrupted molecule is DNA, a Mutation may result either in
mutation can result. This is why exposure to ionizing radiation is associated with cell cell death, cells with
mutation and tissue tumours (cancer). suboptimal function or
daughter cells which are
The medical use of ionizing radiation involves a risk/benefit analysis. X-radiation is cancerous (replicate
very useful for diagnostic imaging but there is no 'safe' level of exposure - rather the uncontrollably).
risk is proportional to the dose. Ultraviolet radiation is useful for treating certain
conditions (see chapter 11), but again there is no 'safe' level of exposure. In
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 220

assessing what is an acceptable level of exposure or dosage, normal environmental


exposure is a consideration. If the treatment does not add appreciably to the natural
burden then it may well be considered acceptable. The question is,. what is an Low levels of naturally
'appreciable' increase and how does this weigh against the benefits of treatment? occuring ionizing radiation
are ever present. Sources
In contrast to ionizing radiation, non-ionizing radiation does have safe levels of include sunlight, cosmic
exposure. At frequencies less than those of visible light, the principal effect of wave
absorption is heating, so the risks are simply those associated with temperature radiation and naturally
elevation. Thus provided the temperature increase is within the physiological range, occuring radioisotopes.
no harm will normally occur. In this sense, exposure to non-ionizing radiation is no
more harmful than any other form of heating.
It is no coincidence that
A potential hazard with exposure to non-ionizing radiation is that it could stimulate visible light is close to the
cell proliferation in malignant tissue, simply as a result of heating. It is for this boundary between ionizing
reason that any form of therapeutic heating is contraindicated when tissue and non-ionizing radiation.
malignancy is known or suspected. A second potential hazard is focussing of a Vision relies on light sensitive
beam of electromagnetic waves, which will result in concentration of the wave energy molecules (opsins) which
in a particular region, producing a local 'hot-spot'. This is discussed further in split in a particular way when
chapter 11. they absorb light. The
'damage' is, however,
A general conclusion is that, provided the temperature increase in any region is
below a physiologically harmful level and the tissue is non-malignant, treatment with reversible.
non-ionizing radiation is quite safe.

WAVE TRANSMISSION AND ABSORPTION


Having talked a little about sound and electromagnetic waves and considered some
(but by no means all) hazards, we now address some fundamental questions about
how these waves propagate and how they interact with and are absorbed by matter.
Here the emphasis is on wave transmission and absorption. Hazards associated
with particular frequencies of sound and electromagnetic waves are considered in
more detail in later chapters.
One striking difference between sound and electromagnetic waves is that a sound

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 221

wave, being a periodic vibration of atoms or molecules, relies on a material medium


for its existence and propagation. Electromagnetic waves on the other hand, require
no material medium for their transmission. Thus we can see our sun, the stars and
distant galaxies but cannot (even in principle) hear them! In applications to therapy
this difference need not concern us. We examine what happens to both kinds of
wave in a material medium.

From everyday experience we know that sound and light are absorbed as they pass
through materials. Ordinary window glass absorbs very little visible light - though it
certainly absorbs some - but absorbs ultraviolet and infrared radiation quite strongly.
Sound is absorbed by brick walls. In this case we find that low frequency sound is
not absorbed as readily as higher frequencies. Absorption is related to the amount
of absorbing material so it must be related to the density of the absorber. But it is
also related to some other property of the material - otherwise why does glass
transmit light while cardboard or paper does not?

Molecular Motion in Matter


To gain some insight into the absorption process we consider the
motion of molecules making up a material. At any temperature
above absolute zero the molecules will be in a state of agitation -
oscillating back and forth and rotating. In addition, for molecules of
more than one atom, vibrations of atoms relative to each other is
possible. Figure 9.6 illustrates some of these modes of movement.

Each of these three kinds of motion has a certain average frequency


associated with it. For example if we consider a rotating molecule in
a liquid, then as a result of its motion and the motion of other
molecules it will suffer frequent collisions. In many instances the
collisions will result in a change in the frequency of rotation of the
molecule. Thus when we specify an average frequency of rotation Figure 9.6
we know that at any one instant some of the molecules will be (a) translational oscillation (b)
rotating with frequencies much higher than the average, and some rotation and (c) Internal vibration
with frequencies much lower. A molecule may have a high of a diatomic molecule.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 222

frequency of rotation at one instant, suffer a collision and lose some rotational energy
to the other molecule, thus changing to a lower rotation frequency.
The same is true for vibration of the molecules - there is continual transfer of the
vibrational energy back and forth between molecules.

The motion of molecules within a material is, of course, what we measure as the heat
energy of an object. As we heat up a material the energy we put in results in greater
agitation and thus greater kinetic energy of the molecules. The extent to which energy
is shared between the different modes of movement will depend on whether the
material is a solid, liquid or gas and how many atoms make up molecule. For
example in the case of a large protein molecule with many atom and many bonds, a
significant proportion of the heat energy will appear as internal vibrations of the
molecule.

Sound Waves in Matter


What happens then to a sound (or ultrasound) wave as it travels through a medium?
In generating a sound wave we are producing mechanical vibrations - an oscillating
displacement of the molecules - with a specific frequency. Consider what happens
when the sound frequency is the same as that of some of the molecules. The sound
wave is oscillating the molecules in a particular direction in the medium (the direction
of propagation) while the molecules are naturally oscillating in all directions and these This is analogous to the
directions are continually and randomly changing as a result of collisions. The situation with resonant
tendency is for the collisions to randomize the direction of sound vibrations and so circuits (chapter 2) where if
convert sound energy into heat energy. If any natural oscillation of the molecule two circuits have the same
corresponds in frequency to the sound wave then the sound will be rapidly absorbed resonant frequency, energy
in the medium. can be transferred very
efficiently between them.
Even if the sound frequency differs somewhat from any average frequency of
molecular movement the natural spread of oscillation frequency of the molecules will
enable some energy to be absorbed. In addition if the difference in frequency of two
natural modes of molecular oscillation is equal to the sound frequency, energy can be
absorbed in converting one frequency of oscillation to the other.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 223

Electromagnetic Waves in Matter


What happens as an electromagnetic wave travels through a medium? Since the
wave consists of an alternating electric and magnetic field as in figure 9.4 we would
expect the effect of the wave on the medium to be similar to the field effects discussed Figure 7.2 shows the
in chapter 7. Non-polar molecules will polarize in alternate directions in the response of ions, polar
alternating field, polar molecules will rotate back and forth and ions will try to move in molecules and non-polar
the field direction. The energy losses in these processes - discussed previously in molecules to a high
chapter 7 - will result in electromagnetic energy being converted into heat energy. frequency alternating electric
field.
The absorption of electromagnetic energy as a wave travels through a medium will
thus depend on the frequency of the wave and the electric and magnetic properties of
the material - the dielectric constant, conductivity and permeability. Using this
(somewhat simplified) model we predict that biological tissues with low dielectric
constant and conductivity, such as fatty tissue will absorb electromagnetic energy to a
lesser extent than substances such as muscle and other tissues with a high dielectric
constant and conductivity.
PENETRATION DEPTH
In general, for any kind of wave of a certain frequency, we find that the wave energy
decreases exponentially with distance. Mathematically this is written:

E = Eoe-x/δ .... (9.2)

Where Eo is the original energy and E is the energy remaining after the waves have e, like π is an irrational
travelled a distance x through the medium. The quantity δ is called the penetration number, it cannot be
depth of the waves in the medium. It depends on the frequency of the wave and the expressed as a whole
properties of the medium through which the wave travels. The quantity e is a constant number or a simple fraction.
which crops-up in any mathematical description of exponential increases or Its value, to an accuracy of
decreases, in the same way that π crops-up when we are dealing with circular four significant figures, is
geometry. 2.718.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 224

Figure 9.7 shows a graph of E against x for an exponential decrease.


To see what is meant by equation 9.2 and the term
'penetration depth', try substituting different values for
x into equation 9.2.

* when the distance x is zero, e-x/δ is eo = 1 since


any number raised to the power zero is one.
Thus E is equal to Eo the original energy, as we
might expect.
* when x = δ, e-x/δ is e-1 = 1/e = 1/2.718 = 0.37.
Equation 9.2 then becomes E = Eo x 0.37. In
other words the wave energy is reduced to 37%
of the incident energy at a distance x equal to δ,
the penetration depth.

* when x = 2δ, e-x/δ is e-2 = 1/(2.718)2 = (0.37)2 .


Equation 9.2 then becomes E = Eo x (0.37)2. In
other words the wave energy is reduced to 14%
(37% of 37%) of the incident energy.
The calculations show that as the wave travels through a material the energy is Figure 9.7
progressively absorbed. At a distance δ (the 'penetration depth') the wave energy Graph showing an exponential
is decreased to 37% of the original energy. At a distance 2δ the wave energy is drop in energy, E, with distance, x.
reduced to 37% of 37% of the incident energy and so on. In other words the wave
energy is reduced by 63% every time the wave travels a distance δ in the medium.
The wave energy is never completely absorbed but is reduced by a certain fraction
with every centimetre it travels through the material. Clearly we cannot specify
'depth for complete absorption' of the wave energy as this will never occur.
Instead we specify the penetration depth as the depth required to absorb 63% of
the incident wave energy.
An example. The penetration depth, δ, of 2000 MHz microwaves in fatty tissue is

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 225

5.3 cm. Use equation 9.2 to calculate the energy remaining after travelling a distance
of (a) 2 cm and (b) 10 cm through fatty tissue.
(a) For a distance x of 2 cm the wave energy, E, is given by equation 9.2 as
E
E = Eoe-2/5.3 = Eoe-0.38 = 0.69Eo so = 0.69
Eo
The energy remaining after travelling a distance of 2 cm in fatty tissue is 69% of
the incident energy.
(b) For a distance x of 10 cm the wave energy E is given by
E
E = Eoe-10/5.3 = Eoe-1.9 = 0.15Eo so = 0.15
Eo
The energy remaining after travelling a distance of 10 cm in fatty tissue is 15% of
the incident energy.
Some authors prefer to specify a 'half-value depth' rather than a penetration depth to
describe the rate of absorption of wave energy. The relationship between half-value The half-value depth, d1/2, is
depth and penetration depth can be calculated from equation 9.2 as follows. the thickness of material
required to absorb 50% of the
The half-value depth, the thickness required to reduce the wave energy by 50%, is d1/2 incident wave energy.
where
Eo
= Eoe-d1/2/δ
2
In other words we have substituted E = Eo/2 (50% of Eo) when x = d1/2 into equation
9.2.
1
Cancelling the Eo on each side gives = e-d1/2/δ
2
1 d d d
Taking logarithms to the base e we have In = - δ1/2 i.e. In 2 = δ1/2 so δ = 1/2
2 ln2
hence δ = 1.44 d1/2
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 226

That is, the penetration depth is obtained from the half-value depth simply by
multiplying by 1.44.
Ultrasound and Microwaves
In the frequency range of therapeutic interest, microwave and ultrasound radiation
share two common features:
* their penetration depths in fatty tissue are much higher than in muscle (or other
tissues with high water and ion content).

* as the frequency increases the penetration depth decreases. In other words as


the wavelength decreases so does the penetration depth.

Table 9.1 shows values of the penetration depth, δ, for different frequencies of
ultrasound and microwave radiation in different body tissues.
It is clear from the table that microwaves and
ultrasound are true diathermic modalities; that is, radiation δ (cm) δ (cm) δ (cm)
the waves are able to penetrate deeply into tissue. in fat in muscle in bone
A significant proportion of the wave energy will be
available for heating of muscle and other tissues Ultrasound 1 MHz 7.2 1.7 0.22
Iying beneath the subcutaneous fat. Ultrasound 2 MHz 4.8 1.2 0.15
Ultrasound 3 MHz 2.4 0.6 0.07
In considering which frequencies are most useful
for diathermy we would choose a frequency which Microwave 1000 MHz 7.0 1.6 ) similar
gives adequate penetration of the waves. We Microwave 2000 MHz 5.3 1.2 ) to
would not, however, aim for a maximum Microwave 4000 MHz 4.0 0.6 ) fat
penetration depth since if δ is too large the waves
will penetrate right through the tissue with little
absorption and thus little heating. The choice of 1 Table 9.1
MHz for therapeutic application of ultrasound is a Penetration depth, δ, for microwaves
good compromise between adequate penetration and ultrasound in body tissues.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 227

and adequate heating of underlying tissue. The pattern of heating does not, however,
depend solely on penetration depth - reflection of the waves plays an important role.
We will discuss reflection shortly.
Infrared and Higher Frequency Radiation
At higher frequencies than microwaves we have infrared, visible and ultraviolet
radiation (see figure 9.5). As we go to these 'optical' frequencies the penetration
depth becomes dependent on frequency in a complicated way; there is no longer a
smooth increase or decrease in δ with frequency.
Let us consider, first, infrared radiation. The infrared region of the spectrum extends
from about 3 x 10 11 Hz up to 4 x 10 14 Hz. Traditionally we refer to the wavelength of
these radiations rather than the frequency and the unit in popular usage is the
nanometre which is abbreviated nm. One nanometre is 10-9 metre. We can convert
from frequency in Hz to wavelength in nanometres by using equation 9.1. Since the
speed of electromagnetic waves is close to 3 x 10 8 metres per second in most
materials the wavelength, λ, in nanometres is related to the frequency, f, by
v 3 x 1017
λ = = .... (9.3) To obtain this equation we
f f have substituted v = 3 x 108
m.s-1 into equation 7.1 and
The infrared region of the spectrum extends from 700 nm wavelength up to about 400 multiplied by 109 to convert
000 nm. For therapeutic application, sources of infrared radiation are used which put from metres to nm.
out most of their radiation at the end of the spectrum close to visible light: from about
700 nm to about 15 000 nm. This includes both the so called 'near' infrared region,
from about 700 nm to 4000 nm and part of the 'far' infrared region. The far infrared
region extends from 4000 nm to about 400 000 nm.
The penetration depth of near infrared radiation is very small. A maximum penetration
depth of a few mm is obtained at about 1200 nm wavelength, and this decreases to a
fraction of a millimetre at longer wavelengths. Wavelengths longer than 3000 nm are
absorbed by the moisture on the surface of the skin. You may have noticed that the
red end of the visible spectrum can be transmitted through the full thickness of your
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 228

hand: this property does not extend to the infrared region of the spectrum.

Visible and ultraviolet radiation have frequencies corresponding to natural frequencies


associated with electrons in the outer shells of atoms. Since these electrons are the
ones involved in bonding between atoms it is possible for light and ultraviolet
radiation to cause breaking of chemical bonds.
We may summarize the absorption mechanisms for infrared, visible and ultraviolet
radiations as follows:

* Infrared radiation has frequencies corresponding to molecular and atomic


motion and to differences in vibration frequency between two modes of motion. It
can thus produce heating directly (hence the term 'radiant heat') but has a very
small depth of penetration.
* Visible and near ultraviolet radiation have frequencies corresponding to the
difference in natural frequency between two energy states of bonding electrons in
atoms. Such radiation can initiate chemical reactions and is only indirectly
associated with the production of heat.
* Far ultraviolet radiation, at higher frequencies than visible and near ultraviolet
light, can separate electrons completely from an atom thus producing an ion. For There is no sharp dividing
this reason there is some risk of causing irreversible damage to biological line, but the boundary
molecules. between ionizing and non-
ionizing radiation is between
The absorption mechanism for ultraviolet and visible light means that absorption and the near and far ultraviolet
hence penetration depth, depends critically on frequency. Certain frequencies will be regions of the electro-
rapidly absorbed and have small penetration depths while others will not be absorbed magnetic spectrum.
so readily and hence have large penetration depths.
Clearly ultraviolet therapy is of more value in initiating chemical change than in heating
as such. Infrared radiation would be indicated when heating of superficial tissue is
required.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 229

WAVES AT BOUNDARIES
So far we have discussed the absorption of a wave as it is transmitted through a
medium. A knowledge of the rate of absorption of a wave in different tissues is not,
however, sufficient to predict the amount of heating in a given tissue layer. Not all of
the radiation striking a tissue interface will be transmitted, some will be reflected. In
this section we consider the factors determining the relative proportions of reflection
and transmission which occur in tissues.
Energy and Impedance
First let us ask what determines the energy carried by a wave. The example of a
transverse wave produced in a spring (figure 9.1) is a useful one. If the human The energy E of a wave is
oscillator in this figure were to shake the spring at a higher frequency this would result proportional to the square of
in more work being done and thus a greater energy in the wave. If the spring is the wave amplitude, a. This is
displaced over a larger distance, resulting in a greater amplitude more energy is also written:
produced in the wave motion. Wave energy depends on both the amplitude and E α a2
frequency of the oscillations. It is also proportional to the
square of the wave frequency,
The energy also depends on the properties of the spring itself. A very heavy spring will f, so we can also write:
require more energy to move it: thus the energy depends on the mass of the spring, or
for waves generally on the inertia of the medium. In the case of solids and liquids E α f2
carrying sound waves the property which specifies the inertia of the medium is the
density.

Another property which determines the energy needed to produce oscillations in the
spring is the elasticity. If waves are produced in a spring the energy needed will
depend on its 'stretchiness' or elasticity. If the spring has high elastic compliance it
will stretch easily and the restoring force which returns the spring to its original length
is small.
The two factors of elasticity and inertia together specify the impedance, Z, of a
medium. In the case of sound waves in a solid or liquid the impedance is determined
by the density and elasticity of the medium.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 230

In the case of electromagnetic waves the properties determining the impedance are
the dielectric constant and conductivity. Consider, for example, an ideal dielectric.
The molecules will polarize in the electric field. The electron cloud will alternate about
the atomic nucleus and be drawn back to the normal position by the electrostatic
attraction of negative electrons for the positive nucleus. The polarizing of the atom is
analogous to stretching of a spring, and the polarizability (elasticity) is determined by
the dielectric constant.
For any kind of wave, the relationship between wave energy and the three quantities
amplitude (a), frequency (f) and impedance (Z) is
E α a2.f2.Z .... (9.4)

Impedance and Reflection


We now consider what happens when a wave strikes a boundary between two media.
Although we have used the
The example of two different springs connected together is a useful one. If the first
example of two joined
spring is made to oscillate with a certain frequency then if any energy is transferred to
the second spring, the frequency of the waves in each spring must be identical. This springs, the rule that waves
do not change frequency
must be so since the springs are fastened together so that the oscillations in the
when passing into a new
joined ends of each spring are the same.
medium applies to any kind
How would we arrange things so as to transfer all of the wave energy from one of wave motion.
medium to another? For maximum energy transfer the wave amplitude must be a
maximum in spring 2. It cannot be larger than in spring 1 as the springs are joined.
So for maximum energy transfer the wave amplitudes must be equal. The frequency
is always the same in each medium, so for maximum energy transfer we require both
equal amplitudes and frequencies. The wave energy, however, depends not only on
frequency and amplitude but also on the impedance of the medium (equation 9.4). It
follows that complete energy transfer can only occur when the impedances of each
medium are the same.
If a wave arrives at a boundary between two media of different impedance only part of

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 231

the wave energy can be transmitted: the rest must be


reflected.
Figure 9.8 shows two springs of different impedance
connected together. Spring 2 is of lower impedance
(more elastically compliant and/or lighter) than spring 1.
A pulse travels along spring 1 until meeting the low
impedance boundary. When the pulse hits the low
impedance boundary the end of spring 2 is lifted to the
same height as the incoming pulse. The energy
transferred to spring 2 is given by equation 9.4 as E α
a 2 f2 Z so if the impedance, Z of spring 2 is lower than
spring 1 but a and f are the same, a2 f2 Z is less so the
transmitted energy is lower than the incident energy.
The energy that is not transmitted is reflected, producing
the reflected pulse in figure 9.8. Part of the original
pulse is reflected and part continues in the original
direction. Note that the displacement of the reflected
pulse is in the same direction as the original.

Figure 9.9 shows the opposite scenario, reflection at a


high impedance boundary. In this case spring 2 is
heavier and less compliant (has a higher impedance)
than spring 1.
In this case the stiffness of spring 2 prevents the spring Figure 9.8
junction from moving as high as the crest of the Reflection from a low impedance boundary.
incoming wave. The effect is that a net downward force
is exerted on spring 1 when the pulse reaches the
junction. A reflected pulse is generated with the
displacement downward rather than upward as in figure
9.8.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 232

The relationship between the mismatch in impedance and


the amplitude of the reflected pulse (or wave) is given by
equation 9.5.
ar Z -Z
ρ = = 1 2 .... (9.5)
ai Z1 + Z2
The reflection coefficient, ρ, is defined as the ratio of the
reflected wave amplitude (a r ) to the incident wave
amplitude (a i ) and this depends on the difference in
impedance of the two media. Only when the impedances
are equal (Z1 = Z2 ) will the reflection coefficient be zero
and the amplitude of the reflected wave be zero. If there is
a mismatch in impedance some wave energy will be
reflected.

An example. Suppose that two springs are connected


together as in figure 9.8 and the impedance of spring 1 is
three times the impedance of spring 2. Calculate the
proportion of energy reflected at the junction.

Substituting Z 1 = 3Z2 into equation 9.5 the reflection


coefficient is
3Z2 - Z2
ρ = = 0.50
3Z2 + Z2
This means that the reflected wave has an amplitude one Figure 9.9
half of the incident wave. Wave energy is proportional to Reflection from a high impedance boundary.
the square of the amplitude, thus the fraction of energy
reflected is one quarter.
Although we have talked in terms of pulses or waves in a spring to illustrate the
application of equation 9.5, the equation holds true for any kind of wave motion

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 233

including sound and electromagnetic waves. In the case of sound waves, Z refers to
the acoustic impedance of the medium. In the case of electromagnetic waves, Z is
the electrical impedance.
STANDING WAVES
Consider what happens if a transverse wave rather than a
pulse strikes the boundary between two media. Unless the
impedances of both media are identical a reflected wave will
be produced travelling in the opposite direction. The two
waves will add together, sometimes reinforcing, sometimes
cancelling and the result is a standing wave pattern. Figure
9.10 shows the resultant waveform (in red) when two waves
of equal amplitude and frequency are travelling in opposite
directions The incident wave (blue) travels to the right and
strikes a boundary (not shown). The wave is fully reflected,
generating a wave (green) travelling in the opposite
direction. The waves add together, so that what is actually
observed is no longer two separate waves travelling in
opposite directions but a single resultant. The resultant is a
stationary wave pattern (hence the term 'standing wave').
The wave amplitude varies from instant to instant, changing
from zero to maximum and back again, but the wave crests
do not change position. At certain points (called nodes) the
wave amplitude is always zero while at other points (the
antinodes) the wave amplitude alternates rapidly between
extreme values.

Figure 9.10
A standing wave produced by interference of two
equal size waves travelling in opposite directions.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 234

In figure 9.10(a) the incident and reflected waves are out of phase by one half of a
wavelength. In this case the two waves exactly cancel and the resultant has zero
amplitude. An instant later (figure 9.10(b)) the incident wave has moved 1/8th
wavelength to the right and the reflected wave 1/8th wavelength to the left. Now the
waves are only 1/4 of a wavelength out of phase and the resultant is non-zero. In
figure 9.10(c) the waves have moved further: now they are in phase and the resultant
has a maximum amplitude. See if you can construct the resultant waveform at two
later times when the incident and reflected waves have progressed a further 1/8th You should find that the
wavelength then 1/4 wavelength. resultant is the same as
figures 9.10(b) and 9.10(a)
For waves travelling at high velocity, the variation from (a) to (d) in figure 9.10 would respectively.
occur in a tiny fraction of a second and the resulting variation in amplitude would be so
fast as to be seen as a blur. This is illustrated in figure 9.11. Notice that in figure 9.11
the nodes and antinodes are readily discerned.
The nodes are one half of a wavelength apart (as are the
antinodes). One wavelength is one sinewave cycle, which
is two of the 'beats' in figure 9.11. So half a wavelength is
the distance between two antinodes or two nodes.

An everyday example of standing wave production is seen


with stretched wires or strings (for example guitar strings)
which, when plucked, resonate and produce standing
waves at any frequency for which the string length is a
multiple of half a wavelength. The mismatch in impedance
at each end of the string results in almost complete
reflection and superposition of the waves results in a Figure 9.11
standing wave. The (blurred) standing wave pattern which
would be seen when the incident and
If a wave is not fully reflected at a boundary (ρ < 1 in reflected waves travel at high velocity.
equation 9.5) the incident and reflected waves have different
amplitudes and the resultant will be a combination of a
standing wave and a travelling wave. This is the more

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 235

usual case with reflection.


It is a useful exercise to draw two waves as in figure 9.10
but with unequal amplitude and see what effect this has on
the resultant. What is produced is an amplitude modulated
oscillation with maxima and minima but no true nodes
(figure 9.12).

Figure 9.12
Effect on the standing wave pattern of
REFLECTION AND REFRACTION unequal size incident and reflected waves.

We have seen that a mismatch in impedance results in


reflection of waves at a boundary. A difference in
impedance also results in the phenomenon of refraction.

When a beam of waves is incident on a boundary at a


certain angle (i in figure 9.13) the reflected wave will leave
the boundary at the same angle. i' in figure 9.13 is the
same size as i. The transmitted wave will be refracted: that
is, its direction of propagation will change. The angle of
refraction, r, will not be equal to the angle of incidence, i.
The laws of reflection and refraction arise in most
discussions of how light behaves, but these laws are not
restricted to optics: they apply equally to any kind of wave
motion. All that is required for refraction to occur is that the
wave have a different velocity in the two media. The wave
velocity is in turn determined by the impedance of the
medium. Thus refraction of light occurs when a beam Figure 9.13
passes from air to glass because of the different velocity of Reflected and refracted waves at a boundary.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 236

light (and, more fundamentally, electrical impedance) of the two media.

To see how the laws arise, consider a beam incident on a boundary as shown in
figure 9.14. First we look at the reflected wave. For simplicity, we consider a beam of
width AB chosen so that AC is exactly one wavelength and we assume that the wave-
crests are synchronized (the results are perfectly general, but the maths is more
complicated when the waves are not synchronized and the distances do not match).
Waves will be reflected at B while those at A on the same
wavefront still have to travel a distance AC before being
reflected. This will take a time t where
AC = v1t
During this time waves reflected at B will have travelled a
distance BD where
BD = v2t
and the new wavefront is DC. Clearly distance AC is equal to
distance BD: this is because the velocities of the incident
and reflected waves are equal.
If the angle of incidence is i then angle ACB is (90-i) - from
simple geometric considerations - thus angle ABC is i and
AC Figure 9.14
sin i = .... (9.6)
BC Reflection of a beam.
In triangle DBC angle DBC is (90-i') and angle DCB is thus i'
and i' is given by
BD
sin i' = .... (9.7)
BC
Since we know that AC and BD are equal, equations 9.6 and 9.7 together give sin i =
sin i' thus i = i' and we have the 'Law of Reflection':
angle of incidence = angle of reflection

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 237

Now consider figure 9.15 where the refracted beam is


shown.
Waves entering medium 2 at B will travel a distance BD
where
BD = v2t .... (9.8)
in the same time it takes for waves at A to travel the
distance AC where
AC = v1t .... (9.9)
In this case v1 is not necessarily equal to v2 so distance
BD is not equal to distance AC.

Angle ABC is equal to i (as in the previous example with


reflected waves). Hence
AC
sin i = .... (9.10)
BC
Similarly, angle BCD is equal to r and
BD Figure 9.15
sin r = .... (9.11) Refraction of a beam.
BC
Dividing equation 9.10 by equation 9.11 gives:
sin i AC
=
sin r BD
and substituting equations 9.8 and 9.9 this becomes
sin i v
= 1 ..... (9.12)
sin r v2
Which is the 'Law of Refraction' for waves at a boundary.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 238

Since v1 is not necessarily equal to v2 , sin i is not equal to sin r and so the angle of
incidence is not equal to the angle of refraction. The angles of incidence and
refraction depend on the relative velocity of the waves in each medium.
Equation 9.12 is a less familiar form of the law of refraction. It is more common in the
case of light to define an 'index of refraction'. This is simply the ratio of the velocity of The law of refraction is often
light in a vacuum to its velocity in the medium. Equation 9.12 then has v1 and v2 written:
replaced by n1 and n2, the refractive indices of each medium. The refractive index is sin i n1
dictated by the wave velocity in the medium. =
sin r n2
For light waves in air their velocity, v1 , is always greater than the velocity, v2 , in a where n1 and n2 are the so-
denser medium (glass or whatever). Consequently the angle of incidence is always called refractive indices of
greater than the angle of refraction. each medium.

An example.
The velocity of sound in air is 340 m.s-1 and in water is close to 1500 m.s-1 (see table
10.1 in the next chapter). Use equation 9.12 to calculate the angle of refraction when When sound waves enter a
sound waves in air are incident upon water at an angle of 6o. denser medium, they travel
faster. Electromagnetic
Substituting v1 = 340 m.s-1 and v2 = 1500 m.s-1 into equation 9.12 we have waves are slowed in a
denser medium.
sin i 340
= = 0.23 ..... (9.13)
sin r 1500
that is
sln i
sin r =
0.23
In this example i = 6o so we have
sin 6o 0.1045
sin r = = = 0 4548
0.23 0.23
and the angle of refraction, r, is calculated to be 27o.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 239

Critical Angle
From the previous discussion it is apparent that waves are refracted at a boundary
when the wave velocity is different in each medium. The relationship between incident
and refracted angle is given by equation 9.12.
Consider again the example of sound waves in air incident upon a boundary with
water. Equation 9.13 relates the incident and refracted angle in this case. If this angle of angle of
equation is used to calculate r for different values of i, a table similar to table 9.2 is incidence refraction
produced. i r
The results show a smooth increase in r as i increases in the range 0o to 13o . The 3o 13o
value i = 13o is called the critical angle for the air/water system. At this angle of
incidence the angle of refraction, r, is 90o. In other words the refracted wave travels 6o 27o
along the air/water boundary. For angles of incidence greater than 13o there is no real 9o 44o
solution to equation 9.13. Experimentally what we observe is that total reflection 12o 67o
occurs; that is, no refracted wave is produced. The critical angle is the largest incident
13o 90o
angle for which a refracted wave exists.
Although we have used the air/water system as an example, the general conclusions
apply to any pair of materials where the wave velocity in medium 2 is greater than in Table 9.2
medium 1. In this circumstance, the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of Angle of incidence and
incidence and at a critical angle of incidence the refracted angle will be 90o . For refraction for sound waves
angles of incidence greater than the critical angle, total reflection occurs. The actual at an air-water interface.
value of the critical angle for a given pair of materials is calculated using equation
9.12.

An example.
The velocity of sound in muscle tissue is 1550 m.s-1 and in bone is 2800 m.s-1 (table
10.1 following). Calculate the critical angle for sound waves incident upon a
muscle/bone boundary.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 240

Using equation 9.12 we have


sin i 1550
= = 0.55
sin r 2800
At the critical angle the refracted angle is 90o so sin r = 1.00. We thus have sin i =
0.55 which gives i = 34o . Hence the critical angle for the muscle/bone boundary is
34o.

EXERCISES
1 (a) Figure 9.1 shows transverse oscillations induced in a spring. The
oscillations are observed to travel along the spring at a velocity of 2.5 m.s-1.
If the end of the spring is vibrated with a frequency of 2 Hz what will be the
wavelength of the oscillations?
(b) When the spring shown in figure 9.2 is vibrated back and forth at a frequency
of 3 Hz regions of compression separated by a distance of 48 cm are
produced. What is the velocity of longitudinal waves in the spring?
2 The frequencies of some of the waves used in therapy are: ultrasound: 1 MHz,
microwave: 2450 MHz, infrared: 3 x 10 11 to 4 x 10 14 Hz, ultraviolet :0.8 x 10 15 to
1.6 x 1015 Hz
(a) Given that the speed of light is 3 x 10 8 m.s-1 and that of sound 340 m.s-1,
calculate the wavelength (or wavelength range) of these waves.
(b) For each of these waves, indicate whether the wavelength concerned is
closest in size to
a house.
a human limb.
a tissue layer.
a cell a protein molecule.
(c) What would be the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation of the same
frequency as the ultrasound?

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 241

3 (a) Describe the similarities and differences between sound and


electromagnetic waves.
(b) Give four examples of electromagnetic waves. What are their differences
and similarities?
(c) On what basis do we distinguished sound and ultrasound?

4 The number of possible modes of vibration of a molecule depends on the


number of atoms in the molecule. For example the diatomic molecule in figure
9.6 has three possible modes of vibration. How many modes of vibration has:
(a) a single atom?
(b) a triatomic molecule?
What are the implications of this for absorption of, say, sound energy in liquids
made up of diatomic compared with polyatomic molecules?

5 Sound waves in liquid A are absorbed more rapidly than in liquid B. What
conclusions can you draw regarding the frequencies of molecular oscillation in
each liquid?

6 Consider an electromagnetic wave travelling through a material.


(a) Describe the effect of the wave on each of polar molecules, non-polar
molecules and ions in the material.
(b) If the proportion of ions in the material was increased what effect would this
have on the rate of absorption of wave energy? Explain.
(c) If the proportion of non-polar molecules was increased what effect would
this have on the rate of absorption of wave energy? Explain.

7 The penetration depth of 1 MHz ultrasound in muscle tissue is 1.7 cm. Using
equation 9.2 construct a table showing fraction of energy remaining (E/Eo ) at
different depths in the muscle. Use a range of values of depth from 0 to 5 cm.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 242

Plot a graph of E/Eo vs depth and determine the depth at which the energy is
reduced to:
(a) 75%
(b) 50%
(c) 37%
(d) 25%
(e) 10%

8 The penetration depth of 1 MHz ultrasound in fatty tissue is 7.2 cm. Use equation
9.2 to construct a table showing the fraction of energy remaining (E/Eo ) at
different depths in the tissue. A suitable range of values of depth is from 0 to 5
cm. Plot a graph of E/Eo versus depth.
(a) Compare your graph with that obtained in question 7. What conclusions
can you draw about the relative 'absorbing power' of fatty tissue compared
with muscle for 1 MHz ultrasound?
(b) Use your graph to determine the thickness of fatty tissue required to reduce
the wave energy to 75% of the original value.
(c) What thickness of fatty tissue is required to absorb 10% of the incident
energy?

9 The penetration depth of 4000 MHz microwaves in muscle tissue is 0.6 cm (table
9.1). Use equation 9.2 to calculate the thickness of muscle tissue required to
absorb:
(a) 10%
(b) 50%
(c) 90%
of the incident wave energy.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 243

10 (a) Electromagnetic waves with wavelengths in the range 700 nm to 400 nm


are termed 'near infrared'. What is the frequency range of near infrared
radiation? (See equation 9.3).
(b) The portion of the far infrared spectrum used in therapy ranges from 4000
nm to 15 000 nm in wavelength. What is the frequency range of these
waves?

11 What are the factors which determine:


(a) the impedance of a spring?
(b) the acoustic impedance of a material?
(c) the impedance of a material to electromagnetic waves (the electrical
impedance)?

12 Two springs are connected together as in figure 9.8. A pulse travels along spring
1. After reflection the reflected pulse has an amplitude one fifth of the incident
amplitude.
(a) What is the reflection coefficient of the boundary?
(b) If the impedance of spring 1 is 3 x 10 3 kg.m-2.s-1 what is the impedance of
spring 2?

13 Two springs are connected together as in figure 9.8. The impedance of spring 1
is one quarter of the impedance of spring 2.
(a) Calculate the reflection coefficient of the boundary.
(b) What is the significance of the negative value for the reflection coefficient?
(c) What is the fraction of energy reflected at the spring junction?
(d) What is the fraction of energy transmitted from spring 1 to spring 2?

14 Calculate the reflection coefficient for two media in contact when:


(a) the impedances differ by a factor of 100.
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 244

(b) the impedances differ by a factor of 10.


(c) the impedances differ by a factor of 2.
(d) the impedances are equal.

15 For each of the cases considered in question 14 above calculate the percentage
of the original energy which will be:
(a) reflected
(b) transmitted
at the boundary between the media.

16 Figure 9.10 shows the standing wave pattern produced by two waves of equal
amplitude travelling in opposite directions. The time interval between each
diagram is the same. Construct (graphically) the standing wave pattern at four
successive (equal) time intervals.

17 Figure 9.10 shows the standing wave pattern produced when incident and
reflected waves are of equal amplitude. Construct (graphically) the
corresponding pattern produced when the reflected wave is only 2/3 the
amplitude of the incident wave.

18 Ultrasound waves travelling through water strikes fatty tissue at an angle of


incidence of 45o. The velocity of sound in water is 1500 m.s-1 and in fatty tissue
is 1450 m.s-1 . Use equation 9.12 to calculate the angle of refraction of the
waves.

19 Ultrasound waves travelling through muscle strike an interface with bone. The
transmitted wave has an angle of refraction of 80o . Given that the velocity of
sound in muscle is 1550 m.s-1 and in bone is 2800 m.s-1, calculate the angle of
incidence of the ultrasound waves.

SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 245

20 Microwaves strike a tissue with an angle of incidence of 20o. If the ratio:


speed of light in air
speed of light in tissue
is 1.3, calculate the angle of refraction of the waves.

21 Light incident on tissue at an angle of 40o has an angle of refraction of 29o. If the
speed of light in air is 3.0 x 10 8 m.s-1 , calculate the speed of light in the tissue
(using equation 9.12).

22 (a) What is meant by the term 'critical angle' for a wave at a boundary?
(b) Draw diagrams showing the incident, reflected and transmitted waves when
the angle of incidence is
(i) zero,
(ii) less than the critical angle,
(iii) equal to the critical angle and
(iv) greater than the critical angle.

23 (a) The velocity of sound in fatty tissue is 1450 m.s-1 and in muscle, 1550 m.s-
1. Calculate the critical angle for the fat/muscle interface.

(b) The critical angle for an air/water interface is 13o. Given that the velocity of
sound in air is 340 m.s-1, calculate the velocity of sound in water.

24 Consider three parallel layers, fat/muscle/bone, on top of each other. A sound


wave travelling through fatty tissue is incident upon the fat/muscle interface at an
angle of 20o.
Given: vfatty tissue = 1450 m.s-1
vmuscle = 1550 m.s-1
vbone = 2800 m.s-1
SOUND AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 246

Calculate:
(a) the angle of refraction at the fat/muscle interface,
(b) the angle of incidence at the muscle/bone interface.
Would any wave energy be transmitted at the muscle/bone interface?
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 247

10 Therapeutic Waves: Ultrasound


Of the diathermic modalities commonly used in therapy, ultrasound is the most
popular. This is not because ultrasound is necessarily the most depth-effective. Their popularity may be
While ultrasound is a deep-heating modality and more depth-efficient than superficial because ultrasound units are
modalities such as hot packs, infrared lamps or lasers, the depth effectiveness is relatively cheap, simple to
strictly limited. use, compact and portable.

The ultrasound frequencies most commonly used are 1 MHz and 3 MHz. The reasons
for these being popular operating frequencies will become apparent in later sections
of this chapter. In water and tissues of high water content the velocity of sound is
close to 1500 m.s-1 thus the wavelength of 1 MHz ultrasound is (from equation 9.1)
about 1.5 mm and that of 3 MHz ultrasound is about 0.5 mm.

PRODUCTION OF THE WAVES


The apparatus used to generate
ultrasound waves consists of a high
frequency oscillator, a power
amplifier and a piezo-electric crystal
which is mounted in a hand-held
probe. A gating circuit is usually
interposed between the oscillator
and the power amplifier to provide
pulsing of the ultrasound output.
Figure 10.1 illustrates the
arrangement.

Figure 10.1
An ultrasound machine (schematic).

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 248

A power supply is needed to convert mains supplied 50 Hz AC into DC to power the


subsections shown.

The heart of the circuit is the oscillator which produces high frequency sinusoidal AC
(see chapter 5). This current is amplified and applied to a piezo-electric crystal, Various crystals display
causing it to vibrate (change in thickness) at the same frequency. The piezo-electric piezo-electric properties but
effect was discovered in 1880 by the brothers Pierre and Paul-Jaques Curie. They two, quartz and barium
found that certain crystals display the remarkable property of producing a small titanate (both ceramics) are
potential difference between their faces when subjected to mechanical pressure. The most useful for practical
reverse of this effect, namely that when a voltage is applied to a piezo-electric crystal it applications.
changes in thickness, was discovered a short time afterwards.

All piezo-electric crystals are found to exhibit a resonance effect - that is, they vibrate
most efficiently at a certain (resonant) frequency. This natural frequency depends on
the dimensions, most importantly on the thickness, of the crystal. The resonant
frequency of the oscillator (see chapter 5) is normally adjusted during manufacture to
correspond to the crystal's resonant frequency.

In continuous mode the gating circuit is not used and the piezo-electric crystal is
supplied with high frequency AC continuously. In pulsed mode the AC is applied to
the crystal in bursts. The burst frequency is normally 100 Hz; thus the time from the
start of one burst to the start of the next is one-hundredth of a second or 10
milliseconds. The duty cycle is the ratio of 'on' time to total time ('on' plus 'off') for the
output. In other words the duty cycle is the fraction of time for which ultrasound is
being produced. Typical values of duty cycle for apparatus used in therapy are in the For example a pulsed
range 1:2 to 1:10. ultrasound signal which is on
for 5 ms then off for 5 ms has
An alternative to specifying the duty cycle of pulsed ultrasound is to specify the mark- a duty cycle of 1:2 and a
space ratio. The mark-space ratio is the ratio of 'on' time to 'off' time for the output. mark-space ratio of 1:1. A
signal which is on for 1 ms
The rationale for the use of pulsed ultrasound will be discussed in a later section of and off for 9 ms has a duty
this chapter. cycle of 1:10 and a mark-
space ratio of 1:9.
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 249

PATTERN OF THE ULTRASOUND FIELD


The ultrasound generator produces a beam of ultrasonic waves by vibration of the
metal end plate of the treatment head (the transducer) shown in figure 10.1. The plate
is typically a few centimetres in diameter - perhaps twenty or thirty wavelengths.
When the diameter of the transducer is many multiples of the wavelength, the sound The angle of divergence of a
beam is cylindrical in shape and the beam divergence is low. At a frequency of 1 MHz, sound beam produced by a
an ultrasound beam in water, produced by a typical size transducer (2.8 cm diameter) flat vibrating disk is given by:
has a divergence of about 4o. This figure increases to about 40o at a frequency of 100
kHz and 90o at 65 kHz. Thus at frequencies of 65 kHz or less, there is no beam: 0.61 v
sinθ =
sound waves radiate in all directions. At MHz frequencies, the sound beam is pencil- f.r
shaped and almost the same diameter as the transducer. where v is the wave velocity, f
is the frequency and r is the
Although the beam has a relatively uniform, cylindrical shape, the relatively small size transducer radius.
of the treatment head of typical ultrasound machines results in a marked variation in
ultrasound intensity across the width of the beam. To see how this occurs, consider a
particular point in front of the transducer such as point A in figure 10.2.

Every point on the transducer surface will act as a source of sound waves.
The total wave amplitude, and hence total wave energy, at point A will
depend on the contribution from all points on the transducer surface.
Waves from some points will arrive in phase and reinforce each other;
others will arrive out of phase and cancel. Figure 10.3 shows waves
originating at only two points on the transducer surface: in this case the
waves are out-of-phase and cancel.
By adding (vectorially) the waves originating from all points on the
transducer surface we can calculate the resulting intensity at any particular
point. The calculations are made complex by the fact that the surface of the
transducer does not remain planar, but flexes and undulates as it Figure 10.2
oscillates. Interference of sound waves from a
radiating source.

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 250

The net result is that the ultrasound field is not uniform.


Near the transducer a distinctive pattern of maxima and
minima of intensity are produced. Beyond this region
(called the near or interference field) the distant field is
more homogenous and decreases smoothly in intensity
with distance from the transducer. The effect is illustrated
in figure 10.3 where the undulations of the transducer
surface have been ignored for simplicity.

The pattern of intensity was calculated for a frequency of 1


MHz and a transducer of diameter 2.8 cm (area 6.2 cm2 ):
with larger diameters the pattern is qualitatively similar with
the interference effects extending to greater distances.
At an ultrasound frequency of 3 MHz the pattern would
again be qualitatively similar but with the interference
effects extending over approximately three times the
distance shown in figure 10.3. Figure 10.3
Intensity along the axis of a sound beam for
Figure 10.3 shows the variation in intensity of an ultrasound a transducer of diameter 2.8 cm, operated
beam at points along the central axis. In the near field, at 1 MHz frequency in water.
local 'hot-spots' or regions of maximum intensity are
separated by 'cold-spots' or regions of minimum intensity.
Off-axis, patterns of hot-spots and cold-spots are also observed. The location of their
maxima and minima are, however, different. Averaged across the beam, the intensity
is relatively constant, only decreasing slowly with distance. So at any particular
distance, hot-spots and cold spots are produced in different locations across the
beam, while the average energy is constant.

Figure 10.4 shows another view of the energy distribution in an ultrasound beam.
This time a two-dimensional view showing the high intensity regions off the central
axis. The shaded areas indicate regions of high local ultrasound intensity. Note that
regions of low intensity on the central axis have, alongside, regions of high intensity
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 251

and vice-versa.

Most of the ultrasound energy is confined


within the area defined by the brown
lines. There is a slight convergence of
the beam in the near (interference) field
and a small divergence in the far field.

The complex interference pattern makes


it essential that in therapeutic application Figure 10.4
of ultrasound the transducer be moved around over the area to be Variation in intensity within the ultrasound
treated. If the sound-head (ultrasound transducer) were kept stationary, beam described in figure 10.3.
localized 'hot spots' would be produced in tissue which could result in
excessive local heating. By moving the sound-head in circular paths,
production of local areas of high temperature rise is avoided.
If the sound-head is moved in a circular path so as to produce a treated
area of at least twice the diameter of the head, hot-spot production will
be avoided.

Beam Nonuniformity Ratio (BNR)


A quantity of interest is the beam nonuniformity ratio or BNR. This is the ratio of the
peak intensity to average intensity of the beam. Because there are always local
regions of high intensity, the BNR is always greater than 1.
In figure 10.4, the intensity pattern is that which would be produced by a piezo-electric
crystal which was about the same size as the ultrasound treatment head. If the crystal If a hollow, doughnut-shaped
were appreciably smaller than the metal end-plate of the ultrasound treatment head, crystal were used, the
the metal end-plate would vibrate differently and the pattern shown in figure 10.4 intensity pattern would again
would be different. The high-intensity regions would be in different positions and, be different to figure 10.4. In
more importantly, the peaks would be higher. So the BNR would be higher. this case the highest peak
(and the BNR) would be
A low BNR is clearly an advantage but movement of the treatment head is of much lower.

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 252

more crucial importance in clinical practice.


In the following sections we ignore beam nonuniformity and assume that the
treatment head is moved to produce the effect of a uniform ultrasound beam. For a
more accurate analysis we would have to consider the exact shape of the beam and
its movement and also include the effect of tissue inhomogeneity in the calculations
(for example the effect of blood vessels in fatty tissues). Much useful insight can,
however, be gained with the simplifying assumptions used.

TRANSFER OF ENERGY TO TISSUE: COUPLING


Before examining the effect of ultrasound on tissue we must first consider the transfer When the two impedances
of energy from the transducer to tissue. Previously we saw that reflection of waves at are the same, no reflection
an interface depends on the difference in impedance of the two media. occurs while if the
impedances differ greatly
Table 10.1 (following) lists the acoustic impedances of air, water, steel and body most of the wave energy is
tissues. Notice that the impedance of air and metal differ significantly from the rest reflected.
with air showing by far the largest deviation.
The acoustic impedance of air is only a tiny fraction of the impedance of body tissues.
For this reason the ultrasound transducer must be in intimate contact with the skin for
appreciable transfer of energy to the tissues. If the transducer is separated from the
skin by even a tiny air gap most of the ultrasonic energy will be reflected back into the
transducer from the air/tissue boundary. It is a useful exercise to calculate the amount
of energy transmitted at an air/tissue interface. Using the values in table 10.1 and
equation 9.5
ar Z -Z
ρ = = 1 2 .... (9.5)
ai Z1 + Z2
we predict that the amplitude of the reflected wave will be 0.9997 times the amplitude
of the incident wave for an air/tissue interface. Hence (0.9997)2 x 100 = 99.94 per cent
of the incident energy is reflected! Clearly the amount of energy transmitted (0.06%) is
negligible. Almost all of the wave energy is reflected back into the air.
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 253

Only by having a coupling medium between the transducer and tissue can efficient
transfer of energy be ensured. The coupling medium is spread on the surface of the It is also important that there
skin so that the ultrasound transducer contacts the skin via the coupling medium. No be no tiny air bubbles within
air/tissue boundary is present. the coupling medium as
these too would produce
Many different coupling media can be used. The desirable characteristics of the reflection and prevent efficient
coupling medium are: transmission of the
ultrasound energy.
* It should be fluid, so as to completely fill the gap between skin and treatment
head and exclude air bubbles.
* It should be viscous so that it stays on the skin rather than rapidly flowing and
spreading.
* It should not inhibit heat loss from the skin otherwise high temperatures may be
produced in skin and subcutaneous tissue.
* It should have an impedance similar to that of steel and tissue, so as to minimize
reflection.
* It should absorb a negligible amount of the ultrasound energy: in other words,
should have a high penetration depth.
In practice the first two criteria listed above are the most important. The principal Criterion five is least
function of a coupling medium is to eliminate air gaps and provide contact between important since a very thin
treatment head and tissue. Criterion three is also very important and water or water layer of couplant is used in
based gels are best in this regard. Criterion four is important but most liquids have practice so that energy
similar values of acoustic impedance. absorption by virtue of the
penetration depth in the
Water meets all the above criteria with the exception of the second (viscosity). For this coupling medium is relatively
reason water is most often used either in a coupling cushion (a polythene or rubber insignificant.
bag filled with water) or in a bath - when the part to be treated can be immersed.

Oils and liquid medicinal paraffin have appropriate viscosities and so can be used as

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 254

couplants, however they inhibit heat loss from the skin and produce greater superficial
heating than water, water based gels or glycerol.
Glycerol is viscous and has similar acoustic properties to water. It makes a very good
coupling medium.

Thixotropic couplants are solids at room temperature which liquefy when ultrasound
is applied. They are ideally suited to treatment of a vertical surface as they will not run
down the skin. A number of thixotropic couplants are available.

THERMAL EFFECTS OF ULTRASOUND


At the intensity levels used for therapy the major effect of ultrasound waves on tissue
In this section we ignore the
is, as with all diathermic modalities, the production of heat. The amount of heat
effects of different coupling
generated in a particular tissue depends on two factors: media and focus attention on
* the rate at which energy is absorbed by the tissue - which is determined by the what happens to the
penetration depth, δ. ultrasound energy which is
transmitted into tissue.
* the extent to which the waves are reflected back into the tissue on striking a
tissue interface: determined by the difference in impedance between the two
media.

We considered in chapter 9 the rate of absorption of energy in different tissues.


Values of the penetration depth are shown in table 9.1. The figures are not very
accurate and vary by up to a factor of two between different tissue samples. They do,
however, give a clear indication of the relative absorbing power of different tissues.

The amount of reflection at a tissue interface is determined by the difference in


impedance of the two materials. The acoustic impedance (Z) depends on the
elasticity and density of a medium according to equation 10.1:

.... (10.1)
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 255

where ρ is the density and Y the modulus of elasticity (stiffness) of the medium.
The velocity of sound in the medium, v, also depends on elasticity and density
according to equation 10.2:

.... (10.2)

Combining these two equations we obtain a simple expression for the impedance in
terms of velocity and density:
Z = ρ.v .... (10.3)
Table 10.1 lists the acoustic properties of air, water, various tissues and steel. As
noted previously the acoustic impedance of air differs considerably from the
remaining materials.
The table also shows that there is little
difference in the acoustic impedance of muscle, velocity density impedance
Material
fatty tissue and water. For this reason we (m.s-1) (kg.m-3) (kg.m.s-1)
expect little reflection at a fat/muscle interface.
The reflection coefficient calculated using Air 340 0.625 213
equation 9.5 is 0.10, thus the amount of energy Fatty Tissue 1450 940 1.4 x 106
reflected is 0.1 squared or 1%.
Muscle 1550 1100 1.7 x 106
The impedance of bone is higher than that of Bone 2800 1800 5.1 x 106
muscle hence we expect significant reflection at Water 1500 1000 1.5 x 106
a muscle/bone interface. The reflection Steel 5850 8000 47.0 x 106
coefficient is 0.50 so we expect about 25% of
the energy to be reflected.
Table 10.1
Heating Rate of Boneless Tissue Acoustic properties of materials.
Consider first an ultrasound beam travelling through fatty tissue and muscle with no
bone present. Equation 9.5 tells us that reflection at the fat/muscle interface is

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 256

negligible and equation 9.12 indicates that refraction is minimal for incident angles up
to about 50o . Thus we can consider the waves to be travelling in one direction in a
straight line through the tissue.
The wave intensity at a point is the energy per unit area per unit time; the area being
taken perpendicular to the wave direction. Since energy varies with distance
according to equation 9.2, the wave intensity I (in watts per square metre) is given by
equation 10.4:
I = Io e-x/δ .... (10.4)
where x is the distance in the tissue and δ is the penetration depth.
The rate of heating is equal to the rate of decrease of intensity with distance. It
depends on two factors, the wave intensity at a particular point and the rate of The lower the penetration
absorption of energy (specified, indirectly, by the penetration depth). depth, the greater the rate of
heating.
The rate of decrease of intensity with distance is obtained by differentiating equation
10.4 to give:

.... (10.5)

where Pv is the heat developed per unit volume per second.


We can use equations 10.4 and 10.5 together with values for δ (from table 9.1) to
calculate the wave intensity and heat development in different parts of a fatty
tissue/muscle combination once we know the thickness of the fat and muscle layers.
For example, suppose that we have a fat layer of uniform thickness (1 cm) on top of a
thick muscle layer and that ultrasound of frequency 1 MHz is incident upon this tissue
combination. The penetration depth in fatty tissue at this frequency is 7.2 cm (table
9.1) thus the wave intensity (equation 10.4) will be reduced by a factor of e-1/7.2 or 0.87
on traversing the fatty tissue - a decrease of only 13%. After travelling a distance of
one centimetre in the muscle the intensity would be reduced by a factor of e-1/1.7 or
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 257

0.56 so the intensity would be 56% of 87% or 49% of the original energy.
In 2 cm of muscle the
Figure 10.5 shows the overall reduction in wave intensity with distance in the tissue intensity would be reduced by
and also the relative rate of heating of the tissue (equation 10.5). Calculated heating a factor of e-2/1.7 = e-1.2 =
rates are scaled to a value of 100% at the muscle surface (because this is where 0.31 so the intensity would
maximum heating occurs). be 31% of 87% or 27% of
the original value.
Even though we have made a number of simplifying assumptions (to be discussed
shortly) the general implications of figure 10.5 are valid. It is clear that only modest
heating is produced in the fatty tissue. Greatest heating is produced
in the few centimetres of muscle tissue adjacent to the fat/muscle
interface. Using our simplified model, even after penetrating 2 cm of
muscle tissue the ultrasound is predicted to produce a higher rate of
heating than at any point in the fatty tissue.
This validates ultrasound as being classified as a diathermic
modality. A greater rate of heating is produced at depth.

[The depth efficiency of MHz frequency ultrasound is not, however, as


great as implied by figure 10.5. Depth efficiency is best assessed
by the rate of temperature increase, which is not the same as the
rate of heating. A graph of temperature increase resulting from this
heating pattern does not show as great a difference between fatty
tissue and muscle. This is because temperature elevation in tissue
depends on a number of factors other than rate of energy input.
Temperature elevation will be considered later in this chapter].

Heating Rate of Tissues With Bone


The same kind of calculation as made above can be performed for
the more complex tissue combination of fat/muscle/bone. In this Figure 10.5
case we can not ignore reflection. Equation 9.5 indicates that close Wave intensity and relative rate of heating
to 25% of the wave energy incident upon the muscle/bone interface in fat and muscle tissue with ultrasound of
frequency 1 MHz.

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 258

is reflected.
Figure 10.6 shows the relative rate of heating which is predicted for a
combination of 1 cm fatty tissue and 1 cm muscle overlying bone. The
reflection has two effects:
* a greater proportion of the total wave energy is
absorbed in the fat and muscle tissue.
* the reflected and incident waves will interfere and
produce a standing wave pattern.
The first of these effects is quite significant. Energy will
be absorbed both as the wave travels through fat and
muscle to the boundary with bone and as the reflected
wave travels back through muscle then fatty tissue.
Hence the total rate of heating of fat and muscle tissue at
any depth is greater than without the bone (compare
figures 10.6 and 10.5). The effect on fatty tissue is small.
As might be expected, in muscle the effect is larger
because the reflected wave, and thus the reflected wave
energy, is larger.
The second effect is of less practical importance.
Certainly an interference pattern will be produced but
consider the distance between nodes and antinodes
(figure 9.11). The wavelength of the standing wave
pattern is the same as that of the incident and reflected
waves with nodes and also antinodes separated by one Figure 10.6
half of a wavelength. For ultrasound of frequency 1 MHz Wave intensity and relative rate of heating
the wavelength is 1.5 mm so the antinodes will be separated by 0.75 in fat, muscle and bone with ultrasound of
mm. The antinodes represent points of maximum wave energy and frequency 1 MHz.
hence maximum heat production. We have, then, that points of
maximum heat production are only 0.75 mm apart. This is too close to
be of practical significance, particularly if the treatment head is kept
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 259

moving. We have already seen why the treatment head can not be kept stationary:
movement is necessary to smooth out the effects of variations in ultrasound intensity
with depth shown in figure 10.4. This same movement will produce variations in In summary, in figure 10.6 we
tissue thickness well in excess of 0.75 mm. The net result will be an averaging of any have included the effect of
standing wave pattern as the treatment head is moved: so much so that no evidence reflection which occurs at the
for standing waves would be detected. In addition factors such as the pulsatile nature muscle/bone interface. This
of blood flow through tissue and muscle contraction will result in variations in the results in a less rapid drop-
thickness of tissue layers: the standing wave pattern will hence shift back and forth, off in heat production with
further smoothing the pattern of heat production. depth in the fat and muscle
tissue when compared with
The most significant feature of figure 10.6 is the high rate of heating of the bone figure 10.5. The effect of
surface. Most of the wave energy transmitted into the bone is absorbed in the first few standing waves has been
millimetres. This is predicted from the value of penetration depth given in table 9.1. ignored for the reasons
The result is substantial heating. As can be seen, the heating rate is predicted to be described.
about three times greater at the bone surface than anywhere in the muscle tissue.
Heat development is confined to the first few millimetres of bone but is quite
substantial. In practice, heat production at the bone surface is often the factor which
limits the intensity which can be used in therapeutic application of 1 MHz ultrasound.
Too great an intensity or too prolonged a treatment can result in periosteal pain and
significant tissue damage (a periosteal burn).
There have been reports of
The risk of periosteal burns is reduced by movement of the ultrasound transducer deep tissue burns being
(treatment head). Movement distributes the ultrasound energy over a larger area of inflicted by unqualified
the bone surface, thus reducing the average energy in a specific location. practitioners who neglected
to move the ultrasound head
The pattern of heat production shown in figures 10.5 and 10.6 indicate the value of 1 during treatment.
MHz ultrasound for heating of deeply located tissue. Figure 10.6 also highlights the
risk when the soft tissue layers are thin and underlying bone is exposed to the
ultrasound beam.
If a frequency of 3 MHz is used rather than 1 MHz, values of penetration depth are
smaller (table 9.1). The ultrasound intensity decreases more rapidly so heat
production is greater in the superficial tissues. A less pronounced 'deep heating'
effect results but there is less energy remaining at depth to heat underlying bone.

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 260

Figure 10.7 shows the wave intensity and relative rate of heating calculated for
ultrasound of frequency 3 MHz in a tissue combination with the same dimensions as
assumed in figure 10.6. Note that with the assumptions made, the peak heating rate
at the bone surface does not exceed that at the muscle surface.

Comparison of figures 10.6 and 10.7 bears out the


qualitative observation made earlier: if a maximum depth
efficiency of heating is required then 1 MHz ultrasound is
the modality of choice. For less deeply located structures,
3 MHz ultrasound may be preferred to avoid excessive
heating of the bone.

Figures 10.6 and 10.7 indicate the great usefulness of


ultrasound for heating of joints, particularly those located
under thick tissue layers. Heat developed at the bone
surface will be transferred to heat the adjoining tissue.
Experimental work in which the temperature elevation of
the hip joint was measured directly confirms that
ultrasonic therapy is very useful in this regard.
Let us now briefly summarize the approximations made
in calculating the results shown in figures 10.6 and 10.7:
* We have assumed that the ultrasound beam is
uniform: that is, we have neglected the original beam
shape. This is a reasonable approximation to make
if the treatment head is moving and the transfer of Figure 10.7
heat between and within tissues is taken into Wave intensity and relative rate of heating
account. in fat, muscle and bone with ultrasound of
frequency 3 MHz.
* We have neglected reflection and refraction at the fat/muscle
interface. A reasonable approximation as only about 1% of the
energy is reflected and the refraction effect is very small (equation
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 261

9.12 and table 10.1). Reflection at the bone surface was taken into account -
refraction in bone is unimportant as the penetration depth is so small.
* We have assumed the tissue layers to be homogeneous. A valid assumption
when we are considering heating of the tissue as a whole. We return to this point
shortly in considering the mechanical effects of ultrasound.
* We have neglected heat losses to the bloodstream and heat transfer to adjacent
tissues. These effects are considered next.

Temperature Distribution in Tissue


The results shown in Figures 10.5 to 10.7 correctly describe the rate of heating due to
the absorption of wave energy. They do not, however, describe the resulting rate of
temperature increase. The rate of temperature increase depends on the heat capacity
of the tissue. The heat capacity is measured by how much heat must be provided to The rate of temperature
increase the temperature by one degree (see chapter 7). A tissue with a high heat increase depends not just on
capacity will require more heat to increase the temperature by 1o than a tissue with a the rate of energy absorption,
low heat capacity. Muscle tissue (principally because of its high water content) has a but also on heat capacity of
higher heat capacity than fatty tissue or bone. Consequently, for the same amount of the tissue and the rate of heat
heat energy, the temperature increase in muscle will be less than that of fatty tissue or transfer to adjacent tissue.
bone. At the commencement of treatment, the relative rate of heating will be more or
less as indicated in the figures. Graphs of rate of temperature increase would,
however, show an overall lesser rate of temperature increase in muscle than fat or
bone, because of the heat capacity effect. Water has a much higher
heat capacity than most other
A second factor affecting the rate of temperature increase in tissue is heat loss to the substances. This is
surrounding tissue and, more importantly, the blood vessels. Muscle has a much illustrated by the fact that a
higher vascularity and therefore volume rate of blood flow, than fatty tissue or bone. cup of lukewarm tea has a
We would thus expect convective cooling of muscle (i.e. heat carried away by the higher heat content than a
bloodstream) to reduce the rate of temperature increase still further. (large) red-hot nail.
A third factor is that any temperature increase in muscle would also be expected to
trigger reflex dilation, whereby arterioles dilate to increase the blood flow in response

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 262

to an increase in temperature. This would further decrease the rate of temperature


increase.
The main points relating temperature increase to heating rate are as follows:
* the low specific heat capacity of fatty tissue and poor thermal conductivity will
result in a greater temperature rise than indicated by the graphs. In addition the Equation 7.6 tells us that if
thermal conductivity of fatty tissue is low and its vascularity is not as good as the specific heat capacity is
muscle; consequently heat can not be removed as rapidly. This adds to the low the rate of temperature
temperature elevation of fatty tissue as compared to muscle. elevation will be greater for a
fixed rate of heat energy
* efficient heat transfer through muscle tissue and to blood vessels will result in supplied to the tissue.
more uniform heating of muscle and less temperature rise than might otherwise
be expected. At the same time heat transfer to the adjacent fatty tissue will
reduce the temperature elevation of muscle near the fat/muscle interface.
* bone is a relatively good conductor of heat. The heat will be rapidly distributed in
the bone and also transferred to the periosteum. The higher thermal conductivity
partially compensates for the rapid absorption of energy near the bone surface
and reduces the selective heating. It is still possible, however, to produce a
maximum temperature elevation in the periosteum when the intervening tissue
layers are not very thick. This gives rise to the periosteal pain mentioned
previously.
Despite these limitations, some of which also apply to other diathermic modalities,
ultrasound is an effective deep-heating modality. The principal factor limiting the
temperature elevation which can be produced at depth is heating of the periosteum.

Mechanical Effects
The predominant physiological effects of ultrasound therapy are due to a rise in
temperature of the treated tissues. Certain effects are, however, produced which are
a direct result of the mechanical vibration of tissue.
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 263

As an ultrasound wave propagates the particles in the medium


experience rapidly alternating compressions and rarefactions.
The pressure varies with distance as shown in figure 10.8.
Regions of high pressure (dark shading) are separated by one
wavelength - about 1.5 mm for 1 MHz ultrasound.

For a wave intensity of 2 to 4 watts per square centimetre (near the


upper limit for therapeutic application) the pressure amplitude of
the waves is about 2 to 4 atmospheres (20 to 40 newtons per Figure 10.8
square centimetre). This means that the pressure extremes - a Pressure variation in an ultrasound wave.
difference of 4 to 8 atmospheres - are separated in tissue by only
one half of a wavelength (0.75 mm). Any tissue component or
substructure with dimensions of about one wavelength will be
subject to substantial mechanical stresses, alternating at a frequency of 1 MHz.
Smaller structures such as tissue cells will experience lesser, though still substantial
stresses and will be vibrated back and forth by the pressure changes.

Figures 10.4 and 10.8 are two important views of the ultrasound intensity variation in a Therapeutic ultrasound
beam. Figure 10.4 is at a gross, large-scale level and shows the variation in intensity produces large stresses in
within a beam. Regions of high intensity (shown by the deepest blue colouration) are biological tissues, acting over
separated by distances measured in centimetres and the positions are stationary in distances of a fraction of a
the beam. Viewed on a smaller scale, figure 10.8 shows a sound wave within the millimetre. The stresses are
beam. At any point within the beam shown in figure 10.4, the pressure varies from greatest in the regions shown
maximum to minimum over a distance of half of one wavelength and regions of high in figure 10.4.
pressure move through the medium (tissue, air or water) at a high velocity. The
sound velocity, v, is about 1500 m.s-2 in water and soft tissue.
Listed below are some examples of the effects of ultrasound where mechanical
stresses are thought to play a significant role. It should be emphasized that in all
instances heating contributes to the observed results: in most cases it is difficult to
ascertain the relative contribution of thermal and mechanical effects.
* Experiments have shown that the extensibility of connective tissue can be
increased by exposure to ultrasound. Since connective tissue fibres are key

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 264

constituents of tendons, scar tissue, joint capsules and muscle the results are of
major significance for therapy. Part of the effect is attributed to the increase in
temperature on exposure to ultrasound: the separation of fibres and loosening of
the structure as a result of the mechanical stresses would also be expected to
contribute.
* The rate of diffusion of ions across cell membranes is found to increase on For example, the diffusion of
exposure to ultrasound. An effect is observed over and above that due to heating sodium ions across a
alone. A possible explanation is that a stirring effect is produced which membrane will deplete the
increases the concentration gradient of ions and other materials. In any diffusion concentration close to one
process there will be a narrow region on either side of the membrane where the side of the membrane and
ion concentrations are not the same as in the bulk of the fluid. Another possible increase it on the other side:
contributing factor involves the fluidity of the cell membrane. If we picture the cell this will result in a decrease
membrane as a thixotropic barrier we predict that the fluidity, and hence the in the rate of diffusion. If the
permeability, of the cell membrane will increase in response to the mechanical fluids are agitated, mixing will
agitation of the ultrasound waves. proceed more rapidly and the
concentration gradient will be
* Ultrasound is useful in relieving pain and muscle spasm. While any form of more efficiently maintained.
heating is useful in this regard, it appears that ultrasound can have an effect
other than via direct heating. The mechanism of this action has not been
conclusively established but it is interesting to note that an optimum effect
appears to be produced using pulsed ultrasound beams. The pulse frequency
normally available is 100 Hz - the same frequency used to produce analgesia by
electrical stimulation.

PULSED ULTRASOUND
Most ultrasound apparatus makes provision for either pulsed or continuous output. In
pulsed mode the ultrasound is produced in bursts, normally with a frequency of 50 or
100 Hz. If the duty cycle ('on' time to 'on + off' time) is 1:5 then the apparatus is 'on' for
only one fifth of the time: consequently the rate of transfer of energy is one fifth of that
obtained using the continuous mode at the same intensity. If the dose required
(continuous mode) necessitates treatment for 20 minutes then to obtain a similar
thermal effect using pulsed ultrasound we would have to extend the treatment time or
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 265

increase the intensity to compensate. An increase in the treatment time alone will not
compensate adequately. Suppose the duty cycle is 1:5 then a 20 minute (continuous)
treatment could be increased to 100 minutes (pulsed). Although the total energy (the
dose) supplied to the tissue is the same in both cases, spreading the treatment over
100 minutes will considerably reduce the temperature elevation produced.
Increasing the intensity by a factor of five will result in the same rate of energy transfer
to tissue (dose rate) but the much higher peak intensities could result in tissue Temperature elevation
damage through gaseous cavitation - the rapid formation and collapse of tiny gas depends not just on the dose
bubbles in the tissue fluid. The cavitation effect will be described more fully in chapter but also on the dose rate.
12 along with other potentially harmful effects.

Proponents of the use of pulsed ultrasound argue that heat production is rarely the
sole objective of therapy and that in some applications it may even be undesirable. By
use of pulsed ultrasound, at low to moderate intensities, mechanical effects are
produced while heat production is kept to a minimum. Of course the same (low) rate
of heat production could be achieved using the continuous mode at one fifth of the
peak intensity. We would, however, expect some differences in the mechanical effects
produced: continuous mild mechanical agitation does not necessarily produce the
same effect as brief vigorous mechanical agitation. The idea is that mechanical
effects do not depend linearly on intensity: that there is a threshold intensity level
below which the mechanical effects are negligible. Pulsed ultrasound would ensure
that intensities above threshold are achieved while keeping heat production to a
minimum.
One study which indicates the possibility of therapeutically significant mechanical
effects was carried out by Dyson et al. (1968). These authors examined the rate of The referances here are to
tissue repair using continuous output treatment compared with pulsed mode two old but reliable papers:
treatment using different duty cycles. The frequency used was 3 MHz and the output in Dyson M et al. Clinical
pulsed mode was adjusted to keep the average power the same in each experiment. Science 35, 273-285 (1968)
Tissue growth rate was increased using a duty cycle of 1:5 but retarded when a duty and Dyson M & Suckling J.
cycle of 1:80 was used. It seems that modest duty cycles may promote repair activity Physiotherapy 64, 105-108
but that (for the same average power) too small a duty cycle involves peak power (1978).
levels which are damaging to tissue. The results of this and other relevant studies

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 266

are summarized by Dyson and Suckling (1978).


To date, insufficient research has been done to quantitatively determine the relative
contributions of heating and mechanical effects in different therapeutic applications of There is no clinical evidence
ultrasound. When such information is available the therapist will be in a better that pulsed has greater
position to select between pulsed and continuous mode and, when pulsed mode is therapeutic benefit than
indicated, to chose the appropriate duty cycle. continuous ultrasound.
Biophysical evidence shows
At this stage it is possible, at least, to say that if ultrasound is chosen (rather than that there are different effects,
another diathermic modality) on the basis of the predicted pattern of heat production, but whether this translates
then a continuous output is indicated. Where mechanical effects are a desirable part into clinical practice is
of the therapy, continuous or pulsed mode might be selected. unknown at present.

EXERCISES
1 Consider the schematic diagram of an ultrasound generator shown in figure
10.1.
(a) Briefly explain the function of each subsection.
(b) What is the function of the piezoelectric crystal shown in the probe? Explain
what happens when an AC signal is applied to opposite faces of the crystal.

2 (a) Explain why the ultrasound beam produced by apparatus used in therapy is
non-uniform.
(b) What is meant by the terms 'near field' and 'far field' as applied to
therapeutic ultrasound?

3 Figure 10.3 shows the distribution of ultrasound energy with distance along the
central axis of an ultrasound transducer. In this case the interference pattern is
generated by a 2.8 cm diameter, 1 MHz frequency, ultrasound source in water.
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 267

Describe how the interference pattern would change if:


(a) the transducer diameter was made smaller
(b) the operating frequency was increased (to 3 MHz, say)
(c) fatty tissue rather than water was used. What is the effect of the different
wave velocity in fatty tissue?
4 Use equation 9.5 and the impedance values given in table 10.1 to calculate the
reflection coefficient of a metal/air boundary and an air/fatty tissue boundary.
(a) What percentage of the incident ultrasound energy would be transmitted at
these boundaries?
(b) What are the implications of your results for ultrasound therapy?
5 (a) What is a coupling medium and why is one needed in ultrasound therapy?
(b) List the characteristics of a 'good' coupling medium and describe the
relative importance of each.
(c) State the relative advantages and disadvantages of water, oils, glycerol and
thixotropic fluids as coupling media.
6 Ultrasound of frequency 1 MHz travels through water and strikes fatty tissue. Use
the data in table 10.1 to calculate the reflection coefficient of the water/fat
boundary. What percentage of the incident wave energy is transmitted?

7 Use equation 9.5 and the figures in table 10.1 to calculate the reflection
coefficient of ultrasound at the following boundaries:
(a) fatty tissue/muscle
(b) muscle/bone
What are the practical implications of these figures?

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 268

8 (a) Refer to figure 10.5 and explain how the graph of wave intensity vs distance
can be used to obtain the graph of relative rate of heating versus distance.
(b) What is the relationship between penetration depth (table 9.1) and relative
rate of heating (figure 10.5)?

9 For ultrasound of frequency 2 MHz (table 9.1) calculate the fraction of energy
remaining after travelling through:
(a) 2 cm fat
(b) 2 cm muscle
(c) 2 cm bone

10 Ultrasound of frequencies 1, 2 and 3 MHz travels through 3 cm of fatty tissue and


strikes a fat/muscle interface. Assuming no reflection at the interface, what
fraction of the original energy reaches the muscle? Use the data in table 9.1 and
equation 9.2.

11 Consider 3 MHz ultrasound travelling through a tissue combination of 2 cm fatty


tissue over muscle.
(a) Use equation 10.4 and the data in table 9.1 to calculate the wave energy at
depths of 1, 2, 3 .... 10 cm in the tissue combination. You may assume no
reflection at the fat/muscle interface.
(b) Use equation 10.5 to calculate the relative rate of heating from the intensity
figures obtained in part (a).
(c) Plot a graph of wave intensity versus depth and relative rate of heating
versus depth for comparison with figure 10.5.
(d) What similarities and differences are evident in comparing your graphs with
figure 10.5?

12 Compare figures 10.5 and 10.6 and explain why the wave intensity appears to
diminish less rapidly with distance in fat and muscle in figure 10.6.
THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 269

13 Consider figure 10.6, which shows the wave intensity at different depths in a
muscle/fat/bone tissue combination. The graph is obtained assuming that 25%
of the incident energy is reflected at the muscle/bone interface.
(a) How would the graph of intensity versus depth differ if reflection at the
muscle/bone interface was negligible?
(b) Reflection of waves at an interface results in the production of a standing
wave pattern. Why is this not shown in figure 10.6?
(c) Under what conditions will the production of standing waves be of practical
significance for 1 MHz ultrasound in complex tissue combinations?
14 Compare figures 10.6 and 10.7 and summarize the advantages and
disadvantages of 1 MHz ultrasound compared with 3 MHz ultrasound for different
thicknesses of tissue over bone.
15 The results shown in figures 10.5 to 10.7 take no account of heat losses to the
air, the bloodstream and between adjacent tissues. Redraw figure 10.7 to show,
qualitatively, the relative rate of heating when heat loss and heat transfer are
taken into account.
16 Figures 10.5 to 10.7 show the relative rate of heating of different tissue exposed
to ultrasound.
(a) What additional factor must be taken into account to predict the initial rate of
temperature increase in each tissue?
(b) Draw a diagram, based upon figure 10.7 to show (qualitatively) the initial
rate of temperature increase in each tissue. You may assume that the
specific heat capacity of muscle is twice that of fatty tissue and bone.
17 Explain why graphs such as those shown in figures 10.5 to 10.7 can be used to
accurately predict the initial rate of temperature increase in tissue but not the final
temperature increase in therapy. What additional factors must be taken into
account to predict the final temperature elevation?

THERAPEUTIC WAVES: ULTRASOUND 270

18 (a) Briefly explain why ultrasound would be expected to have mechanical effects
on tissue in addition to thermal effects.
(b) List and briefly describe the effects of ultrasound where mechanical
vibration is thought to play a direct role.

19 Compare the following two methods of treating a patient with ultrasound:


(i) Exposure at a level of 2 W.cm-2 for 10 minutes in continuous mode
(ii) Exposure at a level of 2 W.cm-2 peak for 20 minutes using a duty cycle of 1:2
Would you expect:
(a) the same mechanical effect?
(b) the same total heat production?
(c) the same temperature elevation?
How do the dose and dose rate compare in each case?
20 Compare the following two methods of treating a patient with ultrasound:
(i) exposure at a level of 1 W.cm-2 for 15 minutes in continuous mode.
(ii) exposure at a level of 2 W.cm-2 peak for 15 minutes in pulsed mode (duty
cycle 1:2).
Would you expect:
(a) the same mechanical effects?
(b) the same total heat production?
(c) the same temperature elevation?
How do the dose and dose rate compare in each case?
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 271

11 Electromagnetic Waves for Therapy


We saw, in chapter 9, that Maxwell's equations predict that whenever charges are
accelerated electromagnetic waves are produced. In this chapter we consider the
electromagnetic waves used in therapy: how they are produced and why they are
useful to physiotherapists.
Three main kinds of electromagnetic wave are used in therapy: microwaves, infrared Ultraviolet and infrared
and ultraviolet radiation. Of these, only microwaves are able to penetrate tissue radiation have low
significantly and so be classed as diathermic. penetration depth but are
The different therapeutic applications of these radiations arise from their differing useful for therapy in
effect on tissue. These effects, in turn, are determined by the wavelength (or applications other than
frequency) of the waves. Before considering the effect on tissue we examine the way diathermy.
in which each kind of electromagnetic wave is produced: this gives a first insight into
their physical and physiological effects.
PRODUCTION OF WAVES AROUND OPTICAL FREQUENCIES
In what follows we consider the way in which infrared and ultraviolet radiation are
produced for therapy. Both kinds of radiation are normally produced by similar
apparatus: more fundamental are the similarities in the molecular processes
involved.
Production Of Ultraviolet Radiation
Electromagnetic waves with frequencies from 0.75 x 10 15 Hz to 3.00 x 10 15 Hz are
classified as ultraviolet radiation (see figure 9.5). Their frequencies are above those When discussing ultraviolet
of visible light and below those of X-rays. Ultraviolet radiation has wavelengths radiation it is a common
between 400 nm and 100 nm. The wavelengths used in therapy are restricted to the convention to talk in terms of
high end of this range: 190 nm to 400 nm, as wavelengths less than 190 nm are wavelength rather than
strongly absorbed in air. frequency.

By international convention the ultraviolet spectrum is divided into three regions.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 272

These are:
* UV-A: wavelengths between 400 nm and 315 nm
* UV-B: wavelengths between 315 nm and 280 nm
* UV-C: wavelengths between 280 nm and 100 nm.

UV-C radiation is used to sterilize things when you don't want to boil them. This is
because UV-C, at sufficiently high intensities, destroys bacteria. It does this by When deciding whether to
damaging the bacterial DNA. UV-C exposure will also damage human cells in the use UV for therapy, the
same way and can produce malignancies (cancer). UV-C and, in fact, UV-B and -A clinician must, as with all
have an extremely low penetration depth, so most of the absorption of UV is by the interventions, weigh the
skin. The low penetration depth of UV is the reason that UV exposure (in particular, benefits against the risks.
exposure to UV-C) is associated with skin cancer.
The usual means of producing ultraviolet light is by the passage of an electric current Indeed, we have evidence for
through an ionized gas or vapour. Gases at normal temperature and pressure are gaseous conduction at
very poor conductors. They can, however, be made to conduct at high temperature or normal temperature and
low pressure in the presence of a sufficiently strong electric field. pressure with every lightning
Ultraviolet radiation for therapeutic application is usually produced by current flow flash in a thunderstorm.
through mercury vapour. Mercury under reduced pressure is contained in a sealed
envelope of quartz or special glass with an electrode inserted in each end. The device
is similar to the strip-lights (fluorescent lights) commonly found in the
kitchen at home and the office or tutorial room. The difference is that UV
lights operate at lower pressures than household or business lights. This
means that more energy is required to initiate conduction and charges are
accelerated over greater distances so that when they collide, the energy
release is larger and, as a result of the higher energies, UV rather than
visible light is produced. The arrangement used with a mercury vapour
lamp is shown in figure 11.1.

Figure 11.1
Schematic diagram of a mercury vapour lamp.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 273

The reduced pressure in the lamp ensures that mercury vapour is present, but in
order for current to flow the vapour must be ionized. This means that electrons must Ionization occurs continuous-
be separated from the parent atoms. Cosmic rays and gamma-rays are high ly in all materials: it is brought
frequency and high energy and can 'kick' electrons from their orbitals, so producing about by various radiations
positive ions and free electrons. Under normal circumstances the electron returns to always present at low levels;
its parent atom, because of the attraction between positive and negative charges. cosmic rays and natural
However, in a sufficiently strong electric field (as in the lamp) the excited electron can radioactivity are examples.
accelerate and collide with other atoms. If the electric field is strong enough, the
electron can gain enough energy to cause further ionization and produce an
'avalanche' effect: one electron is accelerated and collides, producing more metal
ions and free electrons which in turn accelerate, collide and cause further ionization.
The glow of a mercury-vapour lamp is a consequence of the avalanche of ionization.
After participating briefly in the avalanche, electrons reattach to ions, dropping into a
particular orbital and releasing energy in the form of electromagnetic waves.
In the discharge process ions are being continually formed and are continually
recombining with electrons. As ions and electrons recombine energy is released in It is generally necessary to
the form of electromagnetic radiation which has frequencies characteristic of the help initiate the avalanche, or
parent atom. The range of frequencies put out by the lamp is modified by the discharge, by pulsing the
pressure within the lamp and further modified in passing through the glass envelope lamp with a high voltage.
which contains the vapour. Once the discharge is started
the current must be regulated
to limit and control the output
Figure 11.2 compares the range of wavelengths over which various lamps put out
appreciable energy. The spectral range for an ordinary incandescent (tungsten of light from the lamp.
filament) lamp, a fluorescent tube (strip-light) and for sunlight is also included for
comparison.
Also indicated in the figure are approximate proportions of ultraviolet, visible and
infrared radiation expressed as a percentage of the total energy output. The
proportions vary with the pressure of mercury vapour in the lamp or tube and with the
thickness and composition of the lamp envelope. Percentages are not shown for
fluorescent tubes ('strip lights') or incandescent lamps (normal globes) as the

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 274

proportions vary depending on the construction of the device, the power rating and
whether filters are used to block-out certain wavelengths.
Figure 11.2
Spectral range of various lamps
and sunlight

Mercury vapour lamps operating


at lower pressure put out more
radiation in the high frequency
region of the spectrum (towards
the far ultraviolet region). Even
so, all ultraviolet lamps produce
a considerable amount of energy
in the infrared and visible region.
Both the visible and far ultraviolet
radiation can be removed by the
use of filters. If water cooling of
the lamp is used - as with the
Kromayer lamp - the water
serves the dual role of keeping
the lamp cool and absorbing the
infrared radiation.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 275

Within the ultraviolet region of the spectrum there are significant differences in the
output of mercury vapour lamps and tubes:
* Low pressure mercury vapour lamps, otherwise known as cold quartz lamps
when the envelope material is quartz, emit most of their ultraviolet radiation in the Quartz or special composition
UV-C region, at a wavelength of 253.7 nm. The operating temperature of the glass must be used for the
lamp envelope rarely exceeds about 60oC. envelope of all ultraviolet light
sources as normal glass
* High pressure mercury vapour lamps, known as hot quartz lamps when the absorbs strongly over almost
envelope material is quartz, put out a proportion of their ultraviolet energy at a the whole of the ultraviolet
wavelength of 366.0 nm (in the UV-A region). There is also significant output at spectrum.
specific wavelengths in the UV-B and UV-C regions. The amount of energy in
each region depends on the construction of the lamp. The normal operating
temperature of these lamps is several hundred degrees Celsius: if they are to be
used close to, or in contact with the patient they must be cooled by a water jacket
(Kromayer lamps) or an air blower.
* Fluorescent ultraviolet tubes are usually low pressure mercury lamps in the form
of a long tube. The tube is coated on the inside with fluorescent substances
(phosphors). The purpose of the phosphor is to absorb the original ultraviolet
radiation and re-emit it at longer wavelengths. Different phosphors have different
wavelengths for re-emission of radiation. The commonly used ultraviolet tubes
put out most of their energy in the UV-A region. Special tubes are available which
produce a maximum output in the UV-B region. A negligible amount of UV-C
radiation is emitted from any of these light sources.
In the past carbon arcs were used extensively for the production of ultraviolet radiation. The presence of a vapour,
Two carbon rods are brought into contact with each other and a current is passed even at atmospheric
through them. With a small point of contact the high current density heats and pressure, enables a
vapourises the carbon. The rods are then separated and the presence of carbon discharge to be sustained
vapour enables a current to flow in the form of an arc discharge between the ends of with a gap up to around 5 cm
the rod. The spectrum produced by carbon arcs has a range close to that of sunlight when about 80 volts potential
(figure 11.2): the proportions of ultraviolet, visible and infrared radiation are also difference is applied.
similar.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 276

Carbon arcs are rarely used today in physiotherapy departments: they have been
largely superseded by mercury vapour lamps which are cleaner and easier to operate.
Production Of Infrared Radiation
Infrared radiation - sometimes referred to as radiant heat - is produced (and
absorbed) by all materials at temperatures above absolute zero.
Absorption of infrared radiation results in changes in molecular and atomic motion of
a material; the continuous agitation and changes in the motion of molecules, and
within molecules also results in the emission of infrared radiation. For example,
chemical bonds in molecules can absorb energy and 'stretch', changing the bond
length and thus the energy of the bonding electrons. When the bond reverts to its
original size, infrared radiation is produced at a frequency characteristic of the bond.
Any molecule may, as a result of absorption of radiation or collision, change its state
of rotation or vibration, or both simultaneously. On changing to a rotation or vibration Any object will be emitting
state of lower energy, infrared radiation is produced. A particular kind of molecule has and absorbing infrared
very many possible states of rotation and vibration and therefore many options for radiation on an ongoing
going from one state to some other. basis. Whether emission
outweighs absorption
At a given temperature a body will emit a continuous spectrum of radiation - the depends on the temperature
maximum intensity occurring at a particular frequency but with significant intensities of the object relative to its
extending over a wide range of frequencies. The frequency of maximum production of surroundings.
radiation is directly proportional to the absolute temperature of the source. Since
wavelength and frequency are inversely related (by equation 9.1, v = f.λ), it follows that
the wavelength of maximum production of radiation is inversely proportional to the
absolute temperature of the source. (This is called Wien's Law).
As the source of radiation becomes progressively warmer, the wavelength of
maximum emission becomes progressively shorter: thus an iron bar turns from black
to 'red-hot' to 'white hot' to 'blue hot' as its temperature increases. In the black to red-
hot temperature range both near infrared (770 to about 4000 nm) and far infrared
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 277

(4000 to 15 000 nm) radiation is produced in appreciable amounts.

A suitable device for producing such radiation consists of a coil of wire through which
a current is passed. If the coil is wound on an insulator such as a ceramic rod, both
the wire and the ceramic will emit radiation. The ceramic, being at a lower
temperature will produce more far infrared radiation. The common household electric
heater is usually of this kind. A way of producing most radiation in the far infrared
region of the spectrum is to encase the heating element inside a ceramic rod or For an ordinary household
mount it behind a plate so that the major source of radiation is the rod or plate. If a light bulb the tungsten
reflector is used, the reflector will absorb some radiation and re-emit it at higher filament is at about 3000 K
wavelengths thus adding to the far infrared component. These devices are often used and the wavelength of
for therapy. Use is also made of incandescent infrared lamps which produce a maximum emission is about
significantly greater proportion of near infrared radiation. 960 nm - that is, in the near
infrared. For skin at about
Incandescent infrared lamps (similar to household lamps - consisting of a tungsten 300 K it would be 9600 nm, in
filament mounted in a glass envelope) have maximum emission at a wavelength the far infrared.
around 1000 nm: some visible and ultraviolet light is produced but the ultraviolet is
absorbed by the glass envelope and not transmitted. Use may be made of specially
shaped lamps with internal reflectors. The reflectors may be shaped to give a
floodlight beam - suitable for treating large areas - or a spotlight beam for treatment of
localized areas. Some lamps have a clear glass lens while others have a red lens:
there is little difference in the therapeutic effects of each.
EFFECTS OF ULTRAVIOLET AND INFRARED RADIATION ON TISSUE
Infrared and ultraviolet radiation share the common feature that their effects are
produced in the surface layers of the skin. This was mentioned briefly in chapter
9(link to p227). Figure 11.3 summarizes the penetrating properties of these
radiations. The penetration depth of waves of these frequencies clearly distinguishes
them from waves used for diathermy.
Considering first the infrared radiation (wavelengths of 770 nm and above) the figure
indicates that shorter infrared waves (770 to 1200 nm) penetrate to the deeper parts of
the dermis while the longer wavelengths are absorbed in the superficial epidermis.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 278

From a penetration depth of a few millimetres at 1200 nm there is a decrease to about


0.1 mm at 3000 nm. Wavelengths above 3000 nm are absorbed by moisture on the
surface of the skin. The trend does not continue indefinitely and we find that in the far
infrared region from 10 000 to 40 000 nm, the penetration depth increases to several
centimetres. In effect, the tissues become much more transparent.

Figure 11.3
Penetration of radiation into skin in the
infrared to ultraviolet region of the
electromagnetic spectrum

Over the whole of the near infrared spectrum and


up to about 20 000 nm in the far infrared, reflection
is minimal. Close to 95 per cent of energy
incident perpendicular to the skin is absorbed -
only about 5 per cent is reflected. To a reasonable
approximation then, we can consider infrared
radiation to be wholly absorbed by tissue.

The region of the ultraviolet spectrum of interest in


therapy extends from about 180 nm to 390 nm.
From figure 11.3 we can see that most of this
radiation is absorbed in the epidermis. In the
region from 220 nm to 300 nm about 5 to 8 per
cent of incident radiation is reflected. The
reflectance increases to about 20 per cent at 390
nm. Within the range there are regions of very low
reflectance corresponding to specific absorption
by particular molecules in the skin - for example,
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 279

nucleic acids absorb strongly at frequencies between 250 and 260 nm and at 280 nm.
Heating by Infrared Radiation
From the foregoing discussion it is clear that the major effect of infrared radiation is
thermal: to increase the temperature of cutaneous tissue. The penetration depth is The physiological effects of
very small but some heat will be transferred to the subcutaneous tissues via the infrared radiation differ from
capillaries. those of other forms of
heating (e.g. shortwave
The main effects of treatment are: diathermy) only in the
location of heat production.
* An increase in metabolic rate in the superficial tissues. This is the direct effect of
temperature on the rate of chemical reactions generally. As a result there will be
an increased demand for oxygen and an increased output of waste products.
* Dilatation of capillaries and arterioles due directly to the heating and also as a
reflex reaction to the presence of increased concentrations of metabolites. The
flow of blood to the superficial tissues is thus increased producing a reddening
of the skin (erythema) and an increased supply of oxygen and nutrients. The
erythema produced by infrared therapy, unlike that resulting from ultraviolet
treatment, appears quite rapidly and begins to fade soon after treatment ceases.
* Sensory sedation. Mild heating has a 'sedatory' effect on sensory nerves and is
thus useful for the relief of pain. The effects of infrared
radiation are not damaging
* Muscle spasm relief. This results from both the effect of heat on nerve fibres and unless the temperature
the direct effect of heat which is transferred to muscle from the superficial elevation is too high.
tissues.

Effects of Ultraviolet Radiation


The effects of ultraviolet radiation are mainly non-thermal and due to cellular damage
and protective responses. While damage might seem an undesirable consequence,
there are therapeutic benefits of treatment. Five principal effects of therapeutic
significance are found to result from treatment with ultraviolet radiation:

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 280

* An increased blood supply to the skin results from dilation of the capillaries and
arterioles. Dilation does not result from heating of the tissue but as a reflex
response to destruction of cells. Cells are destroyed as a result of chemical
changes caused by the absorption of radiation, and reddening of the skin
(erythema) results. The effects are similar to the changes observed in
inflammation. Two groups of waves produce this reaction, one with wavelengths
in the UV-C region around 250 nm and one with wavelength close to 300 nm
(UV-B).
* Production of vitamin D. Ultraviolet radiation in the range 250 to 300 nm initiates
a sequence of chemical reactions by which vitamins of the D group are Nowadays, vitamin tablets
synthesized. The effect has been used in the past for the treatment of rickets and provide a means of achieving
tetany, but is not used any longer. results more quickly and
economically when treating
* Pigmentation. The amino-acid tyrosine is converted, via a sequence of reactions, vitamin D deficiency.
to the pigment melanin. The accumulation of melanin in the epidermis is
triggered by the same wavelengths of ultraviolet radiation responsible for
erythema production - in addition UV-A wavelengths around 340 nm in low doses
can produce tanning without erythema.
* Sterilization. Shorter wavelength ultraviolet radiation (UV-C, around 250 nm) is
effective in destroying bacteria. In therapy this effect finds application in the In laboratories and
treatment of indolent ulcers: ultraviolet treatment is found to promote and pharmaceutical preparation
accelerate the healing process. It is not clear to what extent the sterilization areas, contamination by
contributes as compared to erythema production. The increased blood supply bacteria must be avoided, so
evidenced by erythema will increase the number of white blood cells and lamps producing UV-C are
antibodies in the area, hence reinforcing the body's defence mechanism. used to irradiate the areas.

* Desquamation occurs some time after exposure to ultraviolet rays - it is a


casting-off of dead cells from the surface of the body. The amount of peeling
varies with the strength of the dose: it ranges from virtually imperceptible through
powdery peeling to free peeling of epidermal layers. This can be of value in the
treatment of skin diseases such as acne and psoriasis.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 281

The degree of erythema production is used to characterize the dose in ultra-violet


therapy using UV-B fluorescent tubes or mercury vapour lamps. The reaction is
graded into four levels:
* A first-degree erythema is a slight reddening of the skin which takes from six to
eight hours to develop. The erythema has faded in about twenty four hours
leaving the skin apparently unchanged. A minimum erythema dose (MED) is also
a slight reddening which takes from six to eight hours to develop but in this case
the erythema is still just visible at twenty four hours.

* A second-degree erythema is a more marked reddening of the skin (resembling


mild sunburn). There is a slight soreness. The reaction fades in about two days
and is followed by pigmentation. After one or two weeks desquamation (peeling,
usually powdery) occurs.
* A third-degree erythema resembles severe sunburn. The skin may begin to
show the effects as soon as two hours after treatment. The reaction is severe and
the skin becomes hot, sore and oedematous. Effects subside gradually over
several days and the skin often peels off in sheets or flakes.
* A fourth-degree erythema is similar to a third-degree reaction but exudation and
oedema are so marked that blisters form. Production of a third or fourth degree The counter-irritation effect of
erythema in a small localized area results in a counter-irritation effect. a fourth degree erythema has
been used in the past as a
Dose characterization in this way is appropriate for sources which produce an quick and effective method of
appreciable proportion of UV-B radiation. When using UV-A fluorescent tubes, relieving pain from joints and
dosage can not be assessed in this way as erythema production is minimal except at other deep structures in
extremely high dose levels. In practice this is not a problem as the principal use of degenerative arthritis and
UV-A is in conjunction with a photosensitizing drug, 8-methoxy-psoralen, for the rheumatic conditions.
treatment of psoriasis. For psoralen - UV-A, therapy a special procedure is used for
dose characterization. The procedure is described in chapter 12.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 282

PRODUCTION OF MICROWAVES
Having considered the low penetration electromagnetic waves - infrared, visible and
ultraviolet - we now turn to lower frequency waves used in therapy; microwaves.
Microwaves occupy the region of the electromagnetic spectrum between radio waves
and infrared radiation: their wavelengths are in the range from about a centimetre to a
meter - corresponding to frequencies in the range 300 MHz to 30 000 MHz. Three main
frequencies are used for physiotherapy, 2450 MHz (wavelength 12 cm), 915 MHz
(wavelength 33 cm) and 433.9 MHz (wavelength 69 cm). Note that the wavelengths Electromagnetic waves travel
quoted are in air. In biological tissues the wavelength is significantly lower because more slowly in biological
the wave velocity is lower. tissues than air. The higher
the dielectric constant and
Radio waves can be produced by first generating a very high frequency AC signal in an conductivity, the lower the
ordinary electronic circuit and then applying this signal to a suitable antenna. The high wave velocity.
frequency alternating current in the antenna results in radio frequency waves being
produced and radiated. The limit to the frequencies that can be produced by standard
electronic circuits is determined by the time it takes for an electron to travel through a
transistor. If the transit-time, the time taken, becomes comparable to the time of
oscillation or period of the wave we wish to produce, then the transistor can no longer
function at this frequency. Microwave frequencies are extremely high, by electronic
standards, and are at the limit of those which can be produced by transistors.

Although vacuum tubes (valves) are an older design and are generally more inefficient
than transistors, two vacuum tube devices which can operate at microwave
frequencies were developed many years ago: these are the magnetron and the
klystron. The magnetron valve, first described by Hull in 1921, was developed for radar
use during the second world war. It is more useful for high power applications than As we will see, a frequency of
the klystron. After the war, apparatus operating at a frequency of 2450 MHz (the 2450 MHz is not the best
standard radar frequency) was made available to physiotherapists. choice for therapeutic
applications and for some
Microwave apparatus (figure 11.4) consists of a device (a magnetron or klystron), years the use of lower
powered by an electronic circuit. The high frequency alternating current which is frequencies has been
produced is fed to an antenna. The current flowing in the antenna results in the advocated.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 283

production of electromagnetic waves (chapter 9) which are beamed by the reflector.

Figure 11.4
Schematic diagram: microwave
apparatus

The frequency of the microwaves is equal to the frequency of the AC produced by the
magnetron. This is determined by the physical construction of the magnetron and is
fixed during manufacture.

A number of differently shaped antennas and reflectors may be used for directing the
beam. Each gives a different beam shape though none gives a perfectly uniform
beam. To obtain a collimated uniform beam (like a searchlight) would require a
parabolic reflector with a point source of radiation as shown in figure 11.5(a). If a point
source of radiation is placed at the focus of the parabola the beam emerges with a
uniform cylindrical shape as shown.
In the case of microwaves used by physiotherapists, the most common frequency is
2450 MHz and the wavelength in air is 12 cm. The source of radiation is normally a
half-wave antenna; a rod shaped conductor about 6 cm long. Placed in a small
parabolic reflector the antenna would produce a highly non-uniform beam (figure
11.5b). To produce a reasonably uniform beam the antenna would need to be placed
in a reflector very much larger than its 6 cm length. A reflector with a focal length of a

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 284

metre or more and a diameter of several metres would be needed - producing a


beam which is metres in diameter.
Figure 11.5
(a) a uniform beam from a parabolic reflector and
point source, (b) a non-uniform beam from a
parabolic reflector and extended source

For therapeutic application, a microwave beam only 10


to 20 cm in diameter is desirable, in order to localize
the microwave energy. Reflectors 10 or 20 cm in
diameter with antennas about 6 cm in length cannot
produce a uniform beam but can be designed to
produce a diverging beam. The beams obtained from
reflectors presently used in therapy diverge
considerably - the wave intensity decreasing rapidly
with distance from the reflector. The reflectors must be
designed this way: if a less divergent beam is
produced part of the beam will be divergent, part will be
parallel and part focussed at some point in front of the
reflector as in figure 11.5(b). This has the obvious risk
of producing a local hot-spot in the patient's tissue and
causing tissue damage.
Microwave applicators are available to produce a number of beam patterns. The
pattern is not obvious from inspection of the shape of the reflector but the
manufacturers do supply this information.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 285

EFFECT OF MICROWAVES ON TISSUE


The penetration depth of microwaves (table 9.1) indicates that the waves are useful for
diathermy.
The three factors determining the depth efficiency of waves generally are (chapter 9)
the penetration depth (δ) of the waves in a particular tissue and the extent of reflection
and refraction at tissue interfaces.
Considering first penetration depth, we make the observation that tissues with high
values of dielectric constant (ε) and conductivity (σ) absorb electromagnetic radiation
more rapidly than tissues with low values of ε and σ. The reasons were given in
chapter 9 previously. Values of ε and σ are significantly different at microwave
frequencies to those appropriate to shortwave diathermy at 27 MHz (table 6.2). Table
11.1 lists the values applicable at microwave frequencies.
Notice that fatty tissue and bone
marrow have quite similar values of
ε and σ - this explains why the
penetration depth of microwaves
(table 9.1) is almost the same in
both tissues. The relatively high
values of ε and σ for muscle result
in a greater rate of microwave
absorption and hence a lower
value for the penetration depth in
this tissue.
The extent of reflection at an
interface is calculated from
equation 9.5: it is determined by the
mismatch in impedance of the Table 11.1
tissues. Since we are talking about Dielectric constant and conductivity of tissue
electromagnetic waves the imped- at microwave frequencies.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 286

ance of interest is the electrical impedance - determined by the dielectric constant (ε)
and conductivity (σ ) of the tissue. Reflection of microwaves at the fat/muscle and
muscle/bone interfaces will be pronounced due to the difference in electrical
properties (changed by a factor of 10) on either side of the boundary concerned.

The amount of refraction at an interface is calculated from equation 9.12: it is Clearly if we wish to calculate
determined by the mismatch in wave velocity of the tissues. The wave velocity in turn the pattern of heating in
is determined by the dielectric constant and conductivity of the tissue. tissue we must take account
of both the penetration depth
Because of the large difference in the electrical properties (ε and σ) of air, fatty tissue, in each tissue and the
muscle and bone, refraction effects will be significant unless the microwave beam amount of reflection and
strikes each boundary at a right angle (zero angle of incidence). refraction at each tissue
interface. Each factor will
The Fraction of Total Energy Absorbed have a significant effect on
the heating pattern.
A knowledge of the dielectric constant and conductivity of each tissue enables us to
calculate the relative rate of heating of each tissue. This information alone does not
allow us to predict the actual amount of heat produced since much of the microwave
energy is reflected at the air/skin interface.

The significant difference in the electrical properties of air (for which ε ≈ 1 and σ ≈ 0)
and soft tissue will result in a considerable amount of the energy incident upon the
skin being reflected. The total percentage of microwave energy absorbed deeper in
the body tissues and hence converted into heat also depends on the thickness of the
skin/fatty tissue layer. This is because a proportion of the wave energy reflected from
the fat/muscle interface will penetrate the skin and be re-radiated into the air.

Some decades ago, H. P. Schwan (see Licht (1968)) calculated the percentage of
total energy reflected at different frequencies and various thicknesses of skin and fat. See the chapter by Schwan
His results show that: in: Licht, S H, Therapeutic
Heat and Cold, (2nd Edition),
* At frequencies less than 1000 MHz, 60 to 70% of the energy is reflected this New Haven (1968).
almost independently of skin and fat thickness.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 287

* Between 1000 and 3000 MHz reflection depends critically and in a complex way
on tissue thickness. Between 0 and 80% of the energy is reflected.
* Above 3000 MHz around 60% of the energy is reflected - again almost
independently of tissue thickness.

One major implication of the above results is that at a frequency of 2450 MHz the Another practical implication
effective dosage is virtually impossible to determine in a clinical situation, due to the of the large amount of
practical difficulty in establishing skin and fat thickness which may vary considerably reflection is the need to avoid
in the treated area. Clearly a frequency above or below the range 1000 to 3000 MHz is unintentional exposure of
to be preferred on these grounds. As we will see in what follows, a lower frequency is body parts (including those of
preferable. the therapist).
The Distribution of Absorbed Energy
We examine now the absorption of the proportion of microwave energy which is not
reflected by the skin or re-radiated. Consider a 2 cm fatty tissue layer adjoining
muscle tissue. For simplicity we begin by making two assumptions:
* that no bone is present. We will take bone into account in subsequent examples.

* that refraction can be ignored. In other words the angle of incidence is assumed
to be zero. Refraction effects will be described separately.

The relative rate of heating can be calculated from the dielectric constant and
conductivity of each tissue: the two factors which determine the amount of reflection
and the penetration depth. The method of calculation is described by Schwan (see
Licht (1968)).

Figure 11.6 shows the pattern of heat production for microwaves at the relatively high
frequency of 8500 MHz (wavelength 3.5 cm in air). A standing-wave pattern (see
chapter 9) is produced in the fatty tissue: this is because of reflection at the fat/muscle
interface.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 288

Figure 11.6
Heating pattern predicted for microwaves of
frequency 8500 MHz in a specimen of 2 cm fatty
tissue over muscle.

The standing-wave pattern in the fatty tissue is not ideal since reflection is not 100%
and the wave is progressively absorbed in its travel. The actual pattern is a When unequal size waves
combination of an exponential decrease (determined by the penetration depth, δ) and interfere, the standing-wave
interference of unequal size waves (figure 9.12). effect produces peaks and
troughs in the heating-rate
At this frequency, most heat is produced in the fatty tissue close to the skin and in the pattern, but there are no true
superficial region of the muscle. A reasonable heating rate is obtained at the muscle nodes (points where the
surface but the effect extends to only a fraction of a centimetre into the muscle tissue. intensity is zero).
The total amount of heat produced in each tissue is indicated by the area under the
curves in figure 11.6. It is evident that there is greater overall heat production in the
fatty tissue. This problem is typical of higher microwave frequencies.

The peaks in the heating pattern in the fatty tissue are separated by one half of a
wavelength (see chapter 9 - this is close to 1 cm in figure 11.6) so the wavelength of
the microwaves in fatty tissue is about 2 cm.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 289

At a frequency of 2450 MHz, the frequency most commonly used in therapy, the relative
rate of heating is as shown in figure 11.7.
Figure 11.7
Heating pattern predicted for microwaves of
frequency 2450 MHz in a specimen of 2 cm fatty
tissue over muscle.

Again a standing wave pattern is found in the fatty


tissue where most heat is produced. At this lower
frequency, the wavelength is greater (since equation
9.1 holds: v = f.λ) so only a single peak is seen in
the heating pattern in fatty tissue. Heat production in
the muscle tissue is improved over the 8500 MHz
results but is still limited to the first centimetre or so.
Evidently the lower frequency is preferable from a
'deep heating' point of view - but we saw earlier that
frequencies in the range 1000-3000 MHz result in
uncertain dosage.

What of frequencies below 2450 MHz? Figure 11.8


shows the relative rate of heating predicted for a
microwave frequency of 915 MHz in a tissue
specimen with the same dimensions as used
previously.

Figure 11.8
Heating pattern predicted for microwaves of
frequency 915 MHz in a specimen of 2 cm fatty
tissue over muscle.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 290

At 915 MHz, a standing wave pattern is still produced in the fatty tissue but the
wavelength is so large that no peaks are evident.
The wavelength in fatty tissue
Figure 11.9 shows the relative rate of heating predicted for a microwave frequency of at 915 Mhz is about 18 cm so
434 MHz in the same tissue specimen. a peak and a trough would be
separated by 4.5 cm (one
quarter of a wavelength).

Figure 11.9
Heating pattern predicted for microwaves of
frequency 434 MHz in a specimen consisting
of 2 cm fatty tissue over muscle.

The depth efficiency of lower frequency microwaves


is apparent from figures 11.8 and 11.9. Both
frequencies give maximum heating in the muscle
with much the same decrease in heating rate with
distance into the tissue. The lowest frequency (434
MHz) produces least heating of fatty tissue; the
difference being most noticeable near the tissue
surface.

Both frequencies give a heating pattern which is


suitable for diathermy and dosage is reasonably
predictable.
The heating of the fatty tissue surface with 915 MHz microwaves can be compensated
for by using a contact applicator with surface cooling. The microwave director
(applicator) is designed to be used in direct contact with the patient. Cooling air is
blown through the applicator and on to the patients' skin during treatment in order to
minimize the temperature elevation of superficial tissues.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 291

When we consider the three-layer system of


fat/muscle/bone we predict reflection at both
the fat/muscle interface and at the
muscle/bone interface. In consequence a
complex heating pattern is produced in both
the fat and muscle tissue. Figures 11.10,
11.11 and 11.12 show the patterns predicted
for frequencies of 2450 MHz, 915 MHz and
434 MHz respectively. Tissue dimensions are
the same as those chosen to illustrate the
heating pattern for ultrasound (figures 10.6
and 10.7).

Figure 11.10
Heating pattern predicted for a microwave
frequency of 2450 MHz in a tissue combination
of 2 cm fat, 2 cm muscle and 2 cm bone.

Figure 11.11
Heating pattern predicted for a microwave
frequency of 915 MHz in a tissue combination
of 2 cm fat, 2 cm muscle and 2 cm bone.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 292

For each frequency, heat production in bone is


minimal. Both 915 and 434 MHz microwaves
produce maximum heating in the muscle layer:
the lower frequency having greater depth
efficiency. Not too much significance can be
attributed to the actual positions of maxima
and minima of heat production as these vary
with the tissue dimensions and electrical
properties assumed. The general implicat-
ions of the figures are, however, clear:
frequencies below 1000 MHz are needed if
tissues located beneath a few centimetres of
fat are to be effectively heated. For treating
structures located closer to the skin surface -
for example a knee or elbow joint which is not
covered by a thick layer of fat - a frequency of
2450 MHz is adequate, though the dose will be Figure 11.12
somewhat unpredictable. More deeply located Heating pattern predicted for a microwave
structures - for example, the hip joint - are not frequency of 434 MHz in a tissue combination
heated appreciably at this frequency. of 2 cm fat, 2 cm muscle and 2 cm bone.
TISSUE GEOMETRY AND REFRACTION EFFECTS
The heating patterns shown in figures 11.6 to 11.12 were calculated ignoring
refraction effects. This is appropriate for a uniform microwave beam incident upon a
plane surface with tissues of constant thickness beneath. When microwaves are
incident upon a curved surface then, even if the beam is uniform, refraction will occur.
This is illustrated in figure 11.13, where reflected waves are omitted for clarity.
The amount of refraction depends on the curvature of the tissue surfaces an the
electrical characteristics of the tissues. When the curvature of the tissues is
pronounced, as for example with an arm or leg, the amount of refraction is
considerable. The smaller is the radius of the limb, the greater is the refraction effect.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 293

Tissues of high dielectric constant and conductivity have a low electrical


impedance and consequently a low wave velocity. Thus the velocity decreases as
the wave progresses from air to fatty tissue and then to muscle. This means that
waves will be refracted to produce convergence of the beam. A focussing effect is
produced in the tissues.

What effect will the beam convergence have on the heating pattern? As the beam
travels through fatty tissue and muscle it is progressively absorbed. The wave
energy is converted into heat energy and the wave intensity (energy per unit area)
decreases. Convergence of the beam will result in the energy remaining any
particular depth being concentrated in a smaller area. This tends to increase the
beam intensity. Thus with curved tissue surfaces as shown in figure 9.12 the
beam intensity does not diminish as rapidly as would occur with plane surface.
Consequently the depth efficiency for heat production is greater.

H. S. Ho (1976) has calculated the relative rate of heating for cylindric models Figure 11.13
with dimensions approximating to adult human arms and legs. His results are Refraction of a microwave beam
qualitatively similar to those shown in figures 11.10 to 11.12 but the relative rate of at tissue interfaces.
heating of muscle is significantly higher. Nonetheless the conclusions to be
drawn from Ho's work are those described earlier. For patient treatment, better
heating patterns are produced with frequencies lower than the 2450 MHz currently
used. Ho's results indicate an optimum frequency of around 750 MHz for efficient
and relatively uniform heating of muscle tissue.
For a description of depth efficiency calculations using different frequencies and Ho HS. Health Physics, 31,
other geometric shapes resembling parts of the human body see A. W. Guy in 97-108 (1976).
Lehmann (1982), chapter 6.
Lehmann, J F, Therapeutic
In summary we may conclude that 2450 MHz microwaves have low depth Heat and Cold, (3rd Edition),
efficiency. This frequency is best suited to heat production in fatty tissue and the Williams and Wilkins (1982).
superficial region of muscle. 915 MHz and 434 MHz microwaves produce greater
depth heating of muscle and less heating of fatty tissue. The optimum frequency
for selective and uniform heating of muscle tissue being around 750 MHz.

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 294

Microwaves are intrinsically unsuited to heating of bone (see figures 11.10 to 11.12)
because of its electrical characteristics: for this reason joints can only be heated when
the overlying tissue layers are very thin. For heating of deeply located joints,
ultrasound or shortwave diathermy would be more effective.

As a final point it should be stressed that the graphs shown in figures 11.6 to 11.12
The difference between
show where heat is produced but not the temperature increase in each tissue. The
temperature increase depends on such factors as the specific heat capacity of the heating rate and rate of
temperature increase, and
tissue and heat transfer within and between tissues and to the bloodstream (see
chapter 7). the relationship between
these quantities, was
LASERS discussed in chapter 7.

The acronym 'laser' stands for 'light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation'.
Lasers are electromagnetic wave amplifiers which can produce beams of electro-
magnetic waves with two special properties:
* the beam has very little divergence. It has a pencil-like shape.
* the beam is coherent. That is, all the waves in the beam are of exactly the same
frequency and wavelength and are synchronized with each other.
The pencil-like beam of the laser means that the wave energy is always concentrated
on the same area: the intensity (which is the energy per unit area) does not decreased The divergence of a laser
appreciably with distance due to beam-spreading. beam is so small that a
beam pointed at the moon
Production of a laser beam could illuminate a target less
than a metre across.
Visible light can be produced by excitation of atoms. For example if crystals of a
copper salt, such as copper sulphate, are heated in a flame, the flame turns blue.
When strontium salts are heated, the flame turns violet. Sodium salts produce a
yellow colouration. This is because electrons in the copper, strontium or sodium
atoms are kicked from their 'ground state' orbitals by the heat energy of the flame and
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 295

when they fall back into their original orbitals, the energy released is radiated as light
of a particular frequency. Because electrons may be kicked out of, and fall back to, The light emitted by a
different orbitals, the light emitted is a mixture of several specific frequencies. By burning salt is usually at a
contrast, laser radiation has but a single frequency. mixture of waves of different
frequency. The different
The light emitted by a burning salts is also incoherent, meaning that electrons drop frequencies correspond to
back into their ground-state orbitals randomly so there is no synchronization of the electrons returning to different
radiated electromagnetic waves. By contrast, lasers are devices which force 'ground state' orbitals.
electrons to drop back into one particular orbital in an avalanche effect, i.e. almost
simultaneously. The result is that the emitted waves are all synchronized (coherent)
and have the same frequency.
The avalanche effect and resulting coherence of a laser beam is achieved by
bouncing waves back and forth between two reflectors. For example, a helium-neon
laser consists of a cylindrical tube containing helium and neon gas. Each end of the
tube has a reflector, one is fully reflecting and the other is partially reflecting so as to
allow some light (the laser beam) to escape. The back-and-forth reflection triggers a
resonance effect where electrons to drop back into a specific ground-state orbital
synchronously and a coherent, monochromatic beam of waves is produced. each The term 'monochromatic'
wave having the same frequency. literally means 'one colour'.
In most contexts this means
To keep the laser operating it is necessary to bump electrons out of their ground-state that each wave has the same
orbitals and into a higher-energy orbital, ready to drop. For this reason a power frequency.
supply (a source of energy) is required. Sometimes the energy is provided by an
electric current, sometimes by a by a burst of light energy. In the case of a helium-
neon laser, a power supply is used to energise a flashlight (rather like a camera
flash) which provides rapid-fire bursts of light energy to push electrons into an excited
state. In the case of diode lasers, current flow through the diode provides the
necessary energy.
We can summarize the differences between laser light and light from a common,
incandescent light bulb as follows. Light from a normal incandescent source has a
spectrum of frequencies and the waves are incoherent. Lasers are beams of
coherent waves of identical frequency. There is some clinical evidence that laser

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 296

beams can be therapeutically beneficial. What has not been established is whether
laser beams have any advantage over simpler (and cheaper) torch beams. No
comparisons have yet been reported.
Beam Intensity
The output of a laser can vary from tens of milliwatts to tens of kilowatts, depending on
High power lasers are used
the type and the physical construction. Lasers used therapeutically have power levels
between these two extremes. They are typically of relatively low power and intensity. to cut steel sheets several
Intensities are normally in the range 1 mW.cm-2 to 50 mW.cm-2. centimetres thick. Much
lower powers are used in
The beam diameter of the low power lasers used clinically is about 3 mm (an area of microsurgery, where focused
about 7 mm2). Thus if the output intensity is, for example, 20 mW.cm-2 and the area is beams are used to cut tiny
7 mm2 = 0.07 cm2, the power of the beam is 20/0.07 mW ≈ 300 mW or 0.3 W. regions of tissue.

By way of comparison, a torch might have a beam 8 cm in diameter (an area about 50
cm2) and use a 12 W light bulb. As far as visible light output is concerned, the bulb is
about 25% efficient (75% of the energy is emitted at infrared frequencies). Hence the
power of the visible light-beam is approximately 3 W. The visible-light beam intensity
is 3/50 = 0.06 W.cm-2 or 60 mW.cm-2 . The intensity of the infrared component is
approximately 180 mW.cm-2.
A torch beam thus has a similar and, if anything, a higher power and intensity than a
clinical laser but is polychromatic. The wave energy is spread over a range of
frequencies. Any clinical significance of the polychromatic/monochromatic difference
has yet to be established.
Beam Divergence
Light from a light bulb can be formed into a pencil-like beam (as in a searchlight) by Lasers are often applied with
using a parabolic reflector but the beam divergence is larger than that of a laser only a thin film of plastic
because of the practical difficulty of producing a perfectly shaped reflector. This separating the laser from the
difference would be of no clinical significance for beams between a light source and skin surface, so beam
the patient, a distance of only a few centimetres or tens of centimetres. divergence is not important.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 297

Beam Diameter
The beam diameter of the low power lasers used clinically (commonly referred-to as
'low level lasers') is about 3 mm (an area of about 7 mm 2 = 0.07 cm2 ). A
consequence is that if the area of the skin surface which is to be treated is several
cm 2 , the beam must be scanned over the area. This means that both the average
intensity and the energy delivered per unit area are reduced. For example, if the area
to be treated is 5 cm x 5 cm (25 cm2), the reduction in average intensity and energy
delivered per unit area is 25/0.07 = 3500 times. By contrast, a torch beam would
illuminate the same area with no reduction in intensity or energy delivered.
Coherence
The light from a light-globe is incoherent. The radiated waves have different Coherence is only possible
frequencies (a spread of frequencies about some mean) and the waves are not 'in if waves have identical
synch' with each other. Synchronization is impossible because the wavelengths are frequencies. If the
different. The coherence of a laser beam is not likely to be of practical significance as frequencies (and thus, the
biological tissues are quite inhomogeneous at a microscopic level. This means that wavelengths) are different,
waves will be scattered and slowed to varying extents so coherence will be lost. A they cannot stay in-phase.
coherent beam striking the skin surface will be incoherent after traversing a distance
through tissue of only a few cell diameters. Although coherence is rapidly lost in
biological tissue, the beam remains monochromatic i.e. the waves still have identical
frequencies.
Producing a coherent beam using diode lasers is technically difficult. Superluminous Since coherence is lost
diodes are easier to manufacture. These are devices which produce monochromatic, when lasers are beamed
laser-like beams which are non-coherent. It should be noted that some diode 'lasers' through tissue, whether the
used in physiotherapy produce relatively incoherent beams and should more correctly light source is a laser or
be described as 'superluminous diodes'. The lack of coherence in the beam of superluminous diode
radiation produced would appear to be of no clinical significance. appears irrelevant.
Laser Light Wavelengths
The particular wavelength of radiation emitted by a laser is determined by the physical

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 298

design; in particular its chemical composition. Thus helium-neon lasers emit red
light with a wavelength of 632.8 nm. Ruby lasers, which consist of a cylindrical rod of
synthetic ruby (a gemstone made of aluminium oxide) emit red light with a wavelength The range of wavelengths
of 694.3 nm. which can be produced by
laser action is quite large,
Gallium aluminium arsenide (GaAlAs) diodes emit radiation at a frequency from the microwave region
determined by the ratio of gallium to aluminium. The particular wavelength can be of the spectrum to the X-ray
between 650 nm (in the visible, red part of the spectrum) and 1300 nm (in the near region.
infrared).

Two types of lasers are commonly used in physiotherapy: helium-neon lasers, which,
as noted above, produce red light of wavelength 632.8 nm and gallium aluminium
arsenide diode lasers, operating at near-infrared wavelengths (normally between 810
and 850 nm).

Penetration Depth
The penetration depth of laser radiation is the same as ordinary electromagnetic
radiation of the same frequency. The wave coherence and the monochromatic nature
of the laser beam make no difference. Thus the penetration depth of visible light from
a helium-neon laser is a mm or so and most of the wave energy is absorbed in the
epidermis (figure 11.3). The infrared radiation produced by commercial GaAlAs
diodes has greater penetration depth but most of the wave energy is absorbed in the
epidermis and dermis.
This perhaps explains why laser irradiation has been shown to be of value for treating
ulcers and other skin conditions. What has not been shown, and is not likely to be Consideration of beam area
shown, is that laser treatment is any better than shining a torch beam on the area. and average intensity
indicates that torch-beam
Similar considerations indicate that laser irradiation is not likely to be of value for therapy might be a cheaper
treating deeper tissue injuries. and more effective treatment
than laser therapy.
The therapeutic benefit and relative cost effectiveness of laser therapy must thus be
questioned.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 299

EXERCISES
1 (a) What are the similarities and differences between infrared, ultraviolet and
microwave radiation?
(b) State the wavelength range and frequency range of each kind of radiation.

2 Figure 11.1 shows a schematic diagram of a mercury vapour lamp.


(a) Describe the mechanism whereby ultraviolet radiation is produced in the
lamp.
(b) Why must the power supply used for the lamp be current limiting?
(c) Why must special glass be used for the lamp envelope?
3 Compare the output of UV, visible and infrared radiation of air and water cooled
UV lamps and fluorescent tubes (figure 11.2).
(a) Why do water-cooled lamps put out a negligible proportion of infrared
radiation?
(b) Why do fluorescent tubes put out a negligible amount of radiation at
wavelengths less than 280 nm?
4 (a) Describe the process of production of infrared radiation by lamps and
electric heaters.
(b) What effect does the use of a reflector have on the directionality and
wavelength of the radiation produced?
5 The filament of a light bulb is at a temperature of 3000 K and its wavelength of
maximum emission is 960 nm. If the filament temperature was lowered to 1000
K by decreasing the current what would be the new wavelength of maximum
emission? In what part of the electromagnetic spectrum is this wavelength?

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 300

6 (a) Use figure 11.3 to describe the variation with frequency of the penetration
depth of near infrared radiation.
(b) Describe the ways in which heat produced by near infrared radiation is
transferred to subcutaneous tissue. Which would you expect to be the
most efficient transfer mechanism?

7 Compare and contrast the principal effects of infrared and ultraviolet radiation on
tissue. How are the differences related to the wavelength of the radiation?

8 (a) What is meant by the term erythema as related to dosage in ultraviolet


therapy?
(b) Briefly list the characteristics of a first, second, third and fourth-degree
erythema reaction to ultraviolet radiation.

9 Figure 11.4 shows a schematic diagram of apparatus used for the production of
microwaves.
(a) Briefly describe the function of each subsection.
(b) Why is a magnetron valve rather than conventional electronic circuitry used
in microwave apparatus?
(c) What is the relationship between the size of the antenna in figure 11.4 and
the wavelength of the microwaves produced?
(d) What determines the frequency of the microwave radiation produced by the
apparatus?

10 Figure 11.5 shows the beam produced by a point source of radiation positioned
at the focus of a parabolic reflector. Draw diagrams to show the effect on the
beam shape of:
(a) mounting the point source between the focus and the reflector surface (still
on the central axis)
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 301

(b) mounting the point source on the central axis but further from the reflector
than the focus.
11 (a) Explain why parabolic reflectors are not used with microwave diathermy
apparatus.
(b) What are the most important factors determining the size and shape of the
reflectors used with microwave diathermy apparatus?
12 (a) Give a brief explanation (in molecular terms) of why tissues with high
dielectric constant and conductivity have low values of penetration depth for
microwave radiation
(b) Refer to the figures given in table 11.1 and comment on the relative values
of penetration depth for microwaves in fat, muscle and bone. Which tissues
would be expected to have similar values of penetration depth and why?
13 It has been said that a frequency of 2450 MHz represents a very poor choice for
microwave radiation used in therapy because of the unpredictability of dosage.
Explain.
14 Using data in table 11.1 determine the thickness of fat required to absorb 50% of
the transmitted microwave energy at a frequency of:
(a) 1000 MHz
(b) 2000 MHz
(c) 4000 MHz

15 For microwaves of frequency 2000 MHz (table 9.1) calculate the fraction of energy
remaining after travelling through
(a) 2 cm fat
(b) 2 cm muscle
(c) 2 cm bone.
In which tissue is the energy absorbed most rapidly?

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 302

16 Refer to figure 11.6 and explain the origin of the peaks and troughs (maxima and
minima) in the heating pattern.
17 Refer to figure 11.6. Draw the corresponding graph of relative rate of heating
which would be expected if the reflection coefficient of the fat/muscle interface
was:
(a) 0.0
(b) 1.0

18 Compare figures 11.7, 11.8 and 11.9 and explain how the microwave wavelength
is related to the differences in heat production in each case.

19 H. P. Schwann has shown that from the point of view of reliable dose prediction
microwaves with frequencies either below 1000 MHz or above 3000 MHz are
preferred. Compare figures 11.6 and 11.9 and say whether high frequencies or
low frequencies would be preferred from the point of view of the pattern of heating
produced.

20 Compare figures 10.6 and 10.7 with figures 11.10 to 11.13 and explain the
differences in heat production in terms of:
(a) the wavelength associated with the modality
(b) the penetration depth in each tissue.

21 Figure 11.13 shows a beam of microwaves striking an arm or leg. Briefly explain
why the beam converges in fatty tissue and muscle.
22 The diagram below shows a uniform microwave beam striking a tissue surface.
The fat and muscle layers have only slight curvature. The bone surface is
markedly curved. Fatty tissue and bone have low values of dielectric constant
and conductivity. The corresponding values for muscle are high.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES FOR THERAPY 303

Complete the diagram to show the refraction effects. Briefly explain what
happens to waves at each boundary and why.
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 304

12 Dosage and Safety Considerations


Having examined the effects of electric current, electric fields, ultrasound and
electromagnetic waves on tissue we conclude by looking at two factors of great
importance in the clinical situation. These are the assessment of dose and some
specific safety considerations. The two are firmly linked. Under the heading 'safety
considerations' we include hazards associated with diathermy and exposure to Electrical safety including
electromagnetic radiation. Under the heading 'dosage' we concern ourselves with hazards associated with
how to establish safe but therapeutically effective dosage both with diathermic electrical stimulation and the
modalities and those which are more superficial (infrared, ultraviolet and visible use of mains powered
radiation, including laser). apparatus are treated
separately in chapter 13.
When considering electrical stimulation of nerve and muscle for therapy a satisfactory
statement of 'dosage' includes specification of the waveform used, duration of
treatment, position and size of the electrodes used and a description of the response
obtained. Since a response is produced immediately, the therapist can adjust the
machine controls to obtain precisely the required effect. In this way there is the
potential for optimum conditions to be achieved and for the patient to obtain maximum
therapeutic benefit at each treatment.

With other forms of treatment, using electric or magnetic fields, electromagnetic


radiation or ultrasound, the therapist does not have such reliable feedback. For these
modalities there is too long a delay between the commencement of treatment and the
effects produced. For example, in the case of diathermy the subjective response of There have been reports of
the patient - a feeling of warmth - gives only a poor guide to dosage and effect. With deep tissue injury requiring
efficient diathermic modalities it is possible that by the time a sensation of heat is felt, surgical intervention following
the deeper tissue temperatures are high enough to produce irreversible tissue incorrect application of 1 MHz
damage. This is because temperature receptors are located superficially, where they ultrasound.
are needed to detect the kind of damaging temperature elevations which are
experienced normally. For this reason particular consideration needs to be given to
the question of dosage as applied to diathermy.
It is convenient to consider dosage in two parts: the first as applied to infrared, visible

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 305

and ultraviolet radiation, the second as applied to the diathermic modalities.


Before discussing how we might reliably and reproducibly estimate dosage we need
a clear definition of three important quantities. These are:
* The dose: in other words the total energy supplied to the patient - normally
expressed in joules (J).

* The dose rate: the rate at which energy is supplied. This has units of joules per
second. One joule per second (J.s-1) is one watt (W).
* The irradiance: the dose rate per unit area of body surface. Normally in units of
In this book, the more familiar
joules per square centimetre per second (J.cm-2 .s -1 ) i.e. watts per square
term 'intensity' is used rather
centimetre (W.cm-2). When talking about radiation (sound or electromagnetic
than the more technically
waves) this quantity is what we call the intensity.
correct 'irradiance'.
The general requirement in specifying dosage is that all three of these quantities be
stated, either directly or indirectly. Each gives important facts about the treatment. For
example, consider the heating effect of ultrasound. The total amount of heat
developed is determined solely by the dose. The temperature increase, however,
depends on the dose rate, the time of treatment and the area treated: that is, on all
three factors listed above. Since it is the temperature rise rather than heat production A dose of 10 J administered
as such which determines the physiological response, a knowledge of dose alone is in a second or so would
insufficient. evoke a marked physiological
response. The same dose
DOSAGE: INFRARED AND ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION applied over a 10 minute
period would have little effect.
When we consider the question of dosage with infrared or ultraviolet radiation two
problems arise:

* The therapeutic effects depend not just on the energy output of the lamp but also
on the frequency of the radiation (chapter 11). This is most noticeable with
ultraviolet radiation where only narrow ranges of frequency produce the desired
reactions.
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 306

* A given dosage from the same lamp will produce a greater response in some
patients than others. Again greater variation is found with ultraviolet radiation.
For infrared treatment, specifying the particular type of lamp, the reflector used, the With infrared exposure, the
patient-to-lamp distance and the time of exposure is an adequate statement of intensity used is normally that
dosage. Dose, dose rate and intensity are thus specified indirectly. Generally the which produces a mild,
intensity used is that which produces a mild, comfortable warmth after 5 minutes. If comfortable warmth after 5
this does not come about, the lamp-to-patient distance can be adjusted during the minutes. If this does not
treatment. come about, the lamp-to-
patient distance can be
With ultraviolet therapy the maximum effects are not produced until long after adjusted during treatment.
treatment is complete. For this reason no adjustment of the dose can be made
during treatment. A close estimate of the dose requirement is needed beforehand.
How can this be achieved? A measurement of the total power output of the lamps is
insufficient. Even if the output was measured at different frequencies this would take
no account of variation in sensitivity of individual patients. A more useful and direct
method is to test lamps in terms of the amount of radiation needed to produce a
specific biological response in each particular patient.

Ultraviolet Therapy and Erythema Dosage


For lamps which produce an appreciable output of UV-B radiation (see chapter 11) As a UV lamp ages the
tests are carried out to determine the amount of radiation needed to produce a first ultraviolet output diminishes:
degree erythema. This will vary from patient to patient and even between different skin for this reason the average
areas on a particular patient, but an average figure for the lamp will provide a useful dose figure must be re-
starting point in determining the test dose requirements of an individual. Once known, determined periodically.
the dose requirements of a particular patient can be specified as multiples of the first
degree erythema dose (erythema dosages were described in chapter 11 previously).

The dose required to produce a first-degree erythema is determined by exposing


small parts of an area similar to that to be treated (usually a few square centimetres)
for varying lengths of time. The patient-to-lamp distance is kept constant. Inspection
of the exposed areas after 24 hours enables the dosage to be determined.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 307

Specification of the dosage in this case requires a statement of the particular lamp
used, the exposure time and the patient-to-lamp distance.
Once the time and distance required for a particular lamp are known the dosage
needed to produce any other degree of erythema can be established from table 12.1.
E 1 refers to a first-degree erythema, E2 to one of second-
degree and so on. The values quoted are experimentally
determined and represent a consensus of agreement Erythema reaction E1 E2 E3 E4
amongst physiotherapists. To obtain the exposure time
required for a second, third or fourth degree erythema the
time for first-degree erythema production is multiplied by the Conversion factor 1 2.5 5 10
appropriate conversion factor. For example if a first-degree
erythema is produced after 6 seconds exposure, table 12.1
indicates that 5 x 6 s = 30 s exposure is required to produce Table 12.1
a third-degree erythema. Conversion factors for different degrees of
erythema.
In table 12.1 the lamp-to-patient distance is assumed to be
the same. For different distances an inverse-square law is
applied (see below) to correct the conversion factor.

After a first exposure to ultraviolet radiation, there is thickening of the epidermis.


Consequently an increase in exposure time is required to produce the same effect on
subsequent occasions. Table 12.2 lists the increase required. Again the conversion
factors quoted are experimental results, not theoretical values (which would be
extremely difficult to calculate).

Erythema reaction E1 E2 E3 E4
Table 12.2 Conversion factor 1.25 1.5 1.75 *
Conversion factors for repeated exposure to
ultraviolet radiation.
* not normally progressed
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 308

Thus a second exposure to ultraviolet radiation would require a 50% increase in


exposure time in order to reproduce a second degree erythema. The figures shown Following marked
are only approximate and may need modification in many cases. desquamation it is common
practice to reduce the
PUVA Therapy and Dosage exposure time to its original
(first exposure) value.
As indicated in chapter 11 previously, UV-A radiation alone does not produce erythema
except at extremely high dosages. The common use of UV-A, however, is in
combination with a photosensitizing drug, 8-methoxy-psoralen, for the treatment of
psoriasis.

In psoralen-UVA (PUVA) therapy the drug is administered two hours before UV-A
exposure. The drug renders the patient UV-A sensitive and an erythema response is
readily evoked.

The dosage required to produce a minimal erythema 72 hours after exposure is


determined. This is called the minimal phototoxicity dosage (MPD). It is found by
exposing test areas of the patient's skin to predetermined dosages of UV-A (for
example 0.5, 1, 2, 3 and 4 J.cm-2) and inspecting the test areas 72 hours later.
Once the MPD has been determined, treatment can be given with the dosage
specified in J.cm-2. The present practice is to use the MPD for the first treatment and Patients who always burn in
to progress the dosage by 0.5 J.cm-2 or 1 J.cm-2 (depending on skin type) on each the sun are progressed by
subsequent treatment. 0.5 J.cm-2. Those who never
or rarely burn are progressed
UV-A fluorescent tubes display a significant drop in output intensity, particularly over by 1 J.cm-2.
the first 200 hours of use. For this reason it is essential that the output intensity of the
UV-A source be regularly measured. Special meters, calibrated in W.cm-2 , are
available for this purpose.
If the output intensity of the source is known the dosage in J.cm-2 can be calculated
using the relationship:
Dosage (in J.cm-2) = Intensity (in W.cm-2) x time (in s)

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 309

THE INVERSE SQUARE LAW AND DOSAGE


Turning now to the more general aspects of dosage we consider the effect of the
distance from the source of radiation to the patient. These considerations apply to
both infrared, visible and ultraviolet radiation - and also to microwaves to a more
limited extent. Consider a screen with a small square aperture, behind which is
placed a point-source of radiation. The arrangement is shown in figure 12.1.

Figure 12.1
The law of inverse squares.

Radiation produced by the point source spreads


uniformly in all directions. The aperture in the
screen allows a beam of square cross-section
through.
The distance from source to screen is s and the
sides of the screen aperture have length x. The
beam area at the screen is thus x 2 . At a
distance 2s from the source (a further distance s
from the screen) the beam area is (2x)2 = 4x2. At
a distance 3s from the source the area is (3x)2 =
9x 2 . In other words, as we progress 1,2,3,4
units of distance from the source the beam area
increases to 1,4,9,16 times the original area: it
increases in proportion to the square of the
distance.
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 310

What happens to the wave energy which passes through the square aperture? For
infrared, ultraviolet and microwave energy there is very little absorption in air over a
distance of a few metres. In other words their penetration depths in air are large. This
means that the wave energy in the rectangular beam in figure 12.1 is virtually constant. If the energy of the beam is
constant but is spread over
If the beam of radiation has an energy E at the aperture then the intensity - the energy a larger and larger area with
per unit area - is E/x2. At a distance 2s from the source this energy is spread over an distance from the source then
area 4x2 , so the intensity is E/4x2 or one quarter of its value at the screen. At a the intensity, which is the
distance 3s the intensity is one-ninth of the value at the screen. energy per unit area, must
decrease.
An inevitable conclusion is the law of inverse squares which states that the intensity of
radiation from a point source varies inversely with the square of the distance from the
source.
Mathematically this is written:
oI
I = .... (12.1)
d2
where I in the intensity at a distance d from the source and Io is the intensity at unit For example if the intensity is
distance.
0.1 W.cm-2 at a distance of
How is the law of inverse squares applied to dosage? Strictly speaking, the inverse 1 m from the source, then at a
square law only holds for point sources of radiation. Sources of infrared and distance of 2 m the intensity
ultraviolet are extended sources, usually mounted in reflectors. The effect of the will be 0.1/4 = 0.025 W.cm.
reflector is to reduce the divergence of the beam, but for the lamps used in
physiotherapy departments the effect is not too great and the law provides a rough,
rule-of-thumb, but satisfactory basis for calculations.
An Example:
Consider treatment with a high pressure mercury vapour lamp (a hot quartz lamp;
chapter 11). Suppose we know that the minimal erythema dose with a particular lamp
is 18 seconds at a distance of 1 metre and we wish to use the lamp at a distance of

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 311

1.5 metres. What exposure time is required at this new distance?


The production of the erythema reaction depends on the intensity of radiation and the
exposure time. At a distance of 1.5 metres the intensity is reduced by a factor of (1.5)2:
thus the exposure time needs to be increased by a factor of (1.5)2 to produce the
same effect. The new exposure time is then 18 x (1.5)2 = 41 seconds.
This kind of calculation shows how the law of inverse squares, which nominally Using equation 12.1 and the
relates intensity to distance is adapted to relate exposure time to distance. fact that dose per unit area is
to.d2 the product of intensity and
t = .... (12.2) exposure time it is a simple
do2
matter to derive equation 12.2
Here t o and do refer to the original exposure time and the original distance which relates exposure time
respectively. t is the new exposure time at the new distance d. at one distance to exposure
time of any other distance.
The Effect of the Angle of Incidence
What happens if the beam of radiation does not strike the surface of the patient's skin
at right-angles? This happens in the circumstances illustrated in figure 12.2. In each
case some or all of the radiation has an angle of incidence, θ, which is not zero.
When this happens the amount of reflection is increased and the beam is spread over
a larger area.

Figure 12.2
(a) effect of beam divergence on the angle of
incidence, θ. (b) effect of both beam
divergence and surface curvature.
(continued overleaf)
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 312

Figure 12.2
(c) effect of beam divergence and angulation of the
reflector on the angle of incidence, θ.

Reflection is minimal at an angle of incidence of 0o. As the


angle is increased, the amount of reflection increases. The
relationship between reflectance and angle is a complex one
(at the critical angle, reflection is 100%). In each of figures
(a), (b) and (c), reflection is increased because the angle of
incidence is not always zero.
The beam (or part of the
beam) is spread over a greater area in figures 12,2(b) and (c). This results in a
decrease in the intensity of radiation at the surface. In figure 12.2(b) the area
illuminated by the beam is larger because the surface is curved. In figure 12.2(c) the
beam is spread over a wider area because of the angulation of the reflector.

The effect of angulation is


further illustrated in figure 12.3
where, for simplicity, we
consider a tiny portion of the
beam with width x and square
cross-section.

Figure 12.3
The effect of angle of incidence
on intensity.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 313

When the beam is incident at right angles the energy is spread over an area x2 so the
intensity is E/x2. With the angle of incidence θ the area irradiated is x2/cosθ and the
intensity if Ecosθ/x2: that is, the intensity is reduced by a factor of cosθ. For example,
for an angle of incidence of 15o, cosθ = 0.97 and the intensity is reduced by 3%. Table
12.3 shows the relative intensity (as a fraction of the intensity for θ = 0) for different
values of θ.
This effect is quite noticeable when using a torch to see one's way on a dark night.
Pointing the torch downwards gives a circular beam. Shining the torch ahead gives a angle of incidence relative
larger area of illumination with an egg shape. Here the area depends on both the (degrees) intensity
distance (through the inverse square law) and the angle of incidence.
0 1.00
In the application of infrared and ultraviolet radiation, the therapist should be aware of 15 0.97
this effect. It is normal practice to keep the beam as near to perpendicular to the 30 0.87
treated surface as possible: thus the situation shown in figure 12.2(c) should be 45 0.71
avoided.
60 0.50
Even if a perpendicular arrangement is used, parts of the treated area near the 75 0.26
periphery may receive a lower dosage (figure 12.2 (a and b)). If necessary the lamp 90 0.00
should be moved to give additional exposure to these areas.
DOSAGE AND DIATHERMIC MODALITIES Table 12.3
Relative intensity for different
In the previous chapters we examined the relative rate of heating of different tissues in values of θ, the angle of
combination. We saw that the resulting temperature increase depends on a number incidence.
of factors including the dose rate and time of exposure. In any treatment there will be
threshold values of dose and dose rate which cannot be exceeded without risk of
harm to the patient.
There will also be minimum values of useful dosage. Below this, heat development
in the tissues will be within the range which the body's temperature regulating See the chapter by Schwan
mechanism can cope with and there will be an insignificant local rise in temperature. in: Licht, S H, Therapeutic
The maximum safe energy dose exceeds the minimum required to produce an Heat and Cold, (2nd Edition),
appreciable effect by less than a factor of ten: thus a knowledge of dosage is of great Williams & Wilkins (1968).
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 314

importance.

In order to specify dose and dose rate we need to know first the energy produced by
the apparatus and second, the fraction of that energy which is absorbed by the body.
Unfortunately both of these quantities are not always known, as we will see.
Shortwave Diathermy
This is the modality which has been in use for the greatest length of time. It is also
the one for which the dosage is least predictable. The meter on the front panel
of most shortwave diathermy
In the case of the capacitor field technique the energy produced by the apparatus machines only indicates a
varies with the position and size of the electrodes and the amount and type of tissue relative value of power - it
in the field. It is possible to simulate the conditions of therapy by placing a 'dummy gives no indication of the
load' between the electrodes. The load must have the right electrical properties and actual dosage.
be correctly positioned to simulate the conditions of therapy. In this way the energy
produced can be measured, though not the energy absorbed by the patient. Scott
(see Licht (1968)) describes how a series of subjects were tested with apparatus
adjusted for a predetermined rate of energy production. The extreme variation in the
responses obtained indicates that a knowledge of energy production alone is of little
value in establishing dosage.

A further complication is that the field spreads as it passes through the body. This
results in the area treated being much larger than the electrodes used, and varying
with depth. This makes it impossible to predict accurately the heat developed in a
particular part of the tissue.
With the inductive coil technique of application the situation is just as complex - due to
the difficulty in establishing the pattern of induced electric field intensity with the
geometries used.
For the present, the most reliable estimate of correct dosage is obtained by adjusting
the intensity until the patient feels a mild, comfortable warmth in the treated area. This
is a relatively safe method of assessing dose as greatest temperature elevation is

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 315

produced in tissues where pain and temperature receptors are abundant. Since
temperature elevation is less in the more deeply located structures there is little risk of
overheating them without first producing pain and damage to superficial tissues. The
need to rely on physical sensations indicates why shortwave diathermy (or indeed any
diathermic modality) is contra-indicated for areas where sensory impairment is
suspected.

Ultrasound
In the case of ultrasound therapy, virtually all the energy produced by the generator is
transferred to the patient, provided that intimate contact is maintained between the Since even minute amounts
transducer and body surface (chapter 10). of air can interrupt the flow of
energy, the space between
Generator-produced power can be read directly from the meter on the front of the transducer and skin is filled
apparatus: thus the dose is obtained simply by multiplying the power (in watts: 1 W = by a coupling medium.
1 J.s-1) by the treatment time (seconds). The irradiance or average intensity (in W.cm-
2 ) is not so reliably known when the usual massage technique of application is used
and the treatment head is moved in small circles over the area to be treated. The
average intensity is calculated by dividing the total power by the area treated: it will only
be a reliable figure if the therapist is able to expose all parts of the treated area for the
same length of time.
Ultrasound ranks highest of the diathermic modalities in terms of reliability and
reproducibility of dosage. Even so it is difficult to assess the dosage applied to a
particular structure or tissue layer within the treated part. This is partly because of the
difficulty in estimating the thickness of different tissue layers and, more significantly,
because the ultrasound beam intensity (figure 10.4) is nonuniform.
Microwaves
The power produced by a microwave source can be quite accurately measured. It can Up to 80% of the microwave
usually be read directly from a meter on the front of the apparatus. Unfortunately, at a energy may be reflected at a
frequency of 2450 MHz, the proportion of energy actually absorbed depends on a frequency of 2450 MHz (see
complex way on the thickness of skin and subcutaneous fatty tissue (chapter 11). chapter 11).
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 316

In view of the practical difficulty in estimating tissue thickness, microwave therapy at


2450 MHz does not permit accurate dosage measurement.
As with shortwave diathermy, the dosage, and consequently the heat development
can only be estimated roughly. The physiotherapist must be guided by a knowledge The difficulty in establishing
of the pattern of heat production, a knowledge of 'normal' dose rates and the microwave dosage is
subjective reports of the patient. A more quantitative assessment of dose can, at discussed in Lehmann, J F,
least, be made for lower frequency microwaves, though the proximity of the patient to Therapeutic Heat and Cold
the source of radiation (less than one wavelength in normal applications) makes the (3rd Edition) Williams and
distribution of energy difficult to calculate. Wilkins (1982): chapter 6).

IMPLANTS AND CAVITIES


In this and the following sections we consider some of the safety aspects of the The scope of this book
treatments we have discussed. precludes consideration of
the indications and contra-
When using any of the diathermic modalities in the region of a metallic implant, air or indications for each modality.
fluid-filled cavity, particular consideration needs to be given to the likely effects of the Rather we restrict ourselves
cavity or implant on the pattern of heat production in nearby tissue. The effects are to the effect of implants and
different for each modality so we will consider each in turn. cavities, and to some specific
Shortwave Diathermy safety hazards.

We considered in chapters 6 and 7 the way in which different tissues (fat, muscle and
bone) modify the field pattern and determine the magnitude of real and displacement
current. This in turn determines the pattern of heat production in tissue combinations.
The two quantities determining these effects are, as we saw, the dielectric constant
and conductivity of the tissues.
To determine the effect of a cavity or implant we need to know its depth, shape and
size and, most importantly, its electrical properties.
* Metals have extremely high conductivities - several thousand times higher than
muscle.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 317

* Air, for all practical purposes, can be considered a perfect insulator. The
conductivity can be taken as zero and the dielectric constant as 1.
* Body Fluids can be considered equivalent to muscle and other tissues of high
water content. The differences in electrical properties are negligible as far as
shortwave diathermy is concerned.

Figure 12.4 shows the effect of a cylindrical object of high dielectric


constant or conductivity on a uniform electric field. This illustrates the
focussing effect on the field lines of a metallic implant in tissue.
The effect of the orientation of the object on the field is apparent. A
greater focussing effect is produced when the long axis of the object
is aligned with the field (figure 12.4a). When the length along the field
direction is short, as in figure 12.4(b) and (c), the field distortion is
less.

Figure 12.4
A material of high dielectric constant or conductivity
in a uniform electric field. The effect of different
orientations.
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 318

The heat production within a metal implant is very low because the field intensity
within the metal is very low - due to the rapid, free movement of charge which results
in accumulation of charge on the surface and termination of field lines.
If the metal was a perfect
The field intensity is greatest near the surfaces of the metal perpendicular to the field conductor the resistance
lines. It is here that maximum heat is produced. The risk, then, is of overheating would be zero, the field
tissue adjacent to a metallic implant. For this reason shortwave diathermy is often intensity zero and the heat
contraindicated when a metallic implant is present. The effect of metallic implants is production zero.
discussed more fully by B. O. Scott in Licht, (1968).

Figure 12.4 is also applicable to fluid-filled cavities in fatty tissue or bone. This is See the chapter by Scott
because the dielectric constant and conductivity of body fluids are considerably higher in: Licht, S H, Therapeutic
than those of bone or fat. We saw an example of this with blood vessels in fatty tissue Heat and Cold, (2nd Edition),
in chapter 7. Field lines will be focussed resulting in maximum heat production near Williams & Wilkins (1968).
the cavity. The field intensity within the cavity will be reduced by charge accumulation
at the interface, but this may not be sufficient to prevent overheating.

Fluid-filled cavities in muscle or other tissues of high water content will not affect the
electric field pattern appreciably. The temperature rise in the cavity will however be
greater than in muscle because heat is not transferred efficiently to adjacent tissues
or the bloodstream.
The effect of an air-filled hollow in tissue was discussed in chapter 7 (see figure 7.14).
The field lines bend around the hollow. This results in an increased intensity in the
tissue adjacent to the sides of the hollow which are parallel to the field. The effect
proves useful when it is desired to selectively heat the surfaces of hollows, such as
the sinuses.
Ultrasound
We saw in chapter 9 that reflection of ultrasound occurs when there is a mismatch of
acoustic impedance between two adjacent tissue layers. The impedances of muscle
and fatty tissue are similar but that of bone is much higher. There is thus an
appreciable reflection of ultrasound at the muscle/bone interface.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 319

In order to determine the effects of implants or cavities we need to know the acoustic
impedances of metals, air and body fluids.
* Metals have an acoustic impedance about thirty times higher than fat or muscle
so there will be significant reflection at a tissue/metal interface. Using the figures
in table 10.1 and equation 9.5 we find that the reflection coefficient for a fat/metal
or muscle/metal interface is about 0.94. Thus about (0.94)2 x 100 or 90% of the
ultrasound energy will be reflected.
* Air has an acoustic impedance which is only a tiny fraction of that of tissue so
virtually 100% of the energy incident upon a tissue/air interface will be reflected.
* Body fluids have an acoustic impedance closer to that of water, muscle and fatty A selective build-up of heat
tissue. Fluid-filled cavities will not pose any problems as regards reflection of could result, however, if the
the ultrasound beam. heat cannot be transferred
to adjacent tissues or the
Whenever reflection occurs there will be an increase in the ultrasound intensity bloodstream.
adjacent to the reflecting surface and greater heat production in this region (see
chapter 10).
For a metallic implant in tissue, reflection will be significant and almost all the heat
will be produced between the implant and the tissue surface. The excess heating of Little heat will be produced
the tissue layer above the implant may or may not be advantageous depending on the in a metal as little energy is
actual location of the tissue to be heated. The additional factor of the effect of shape of transmitted at the tissue/
the implant on the ultrasound field pattern is discussed by Lehmann in Licht, (1968). metal interface and
ultrasound is not absorbed
The presence of an air-filled cavity in tissue will have a substantial effect on the pattern very rapidly in metals (the
of heat production. Almost total reflection will occur at the interface and almost all of penetration depth is high).
the heat will be produced in the intervening tissues. This has particular implications
for treatment of the chest wall or throat.

As we saw, the presence of fluid-filled cavities has little effect on the pattern of heat
production with ultrasound. The only factors to be assessed are the likelihood of
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 320

selective heating within the cavity due to poor heat dissipation, and whether this is
desirable.
Microwaves
As we saw in chapter 11, the reflection of microwaves and the rate of absorption are
determined by the electrical properties (dielectric constant and conductivity) of tissues. The electrical properties of
metals, air and body fluids
Since metals have a much higher conductivity than any biological tissue, reflection at a were considered earlier in
tissue/metallic-implant boundary will be pronounced. The high conductivity of metals this chapter.
also results in rapid absorption of microwaves - penetration depths are extremely
small. The result is that pronounced reflection occurs at a tissue/metal boundary and
the transmitted wave is absorbed over a very short distance.
Microwaves penetrating metallic implants will be absorbed in a fraction of a millimetre
with significant heat production. However, metals are good conductors of heat and The phenomenon of rapid
the energy will be rapidly conducted throughout the metal and spread into the adjacent absorption (and consequently
great heat production) can be
tissues. demonstrated quite
convincingly by igniting a
Reflection of microwaves at a tissue/metal interface will result in the production of piece of steel wool in a
standing waves. The energy reflected and the resulting standing wave pattern will microwave oven.
produce a concentration of energy in the tissues adjacent to the metal. There is also
the risk of focussing the waves with a curved metal surface (chapter 11) which can
result in 'hot spots' being produced in the patient's tissues. The rather poor
penetration depth of 2450 MHz microwaves suggests, however, that metallic implants
located well below the surface of the body will have little effect on heat production.

The effect of an air-filled cavity is similar to that of a metal implant: reflection occurs at
the boundary and a standing wave pattern is produced. The implications of this were
discussed above.
Fluid-filled cavities within muscle and other tissues of high water content will not affect
the pattern of heat production, but may undergo a selective rise in temperature if heat
is not conducted away efficiently.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 321

SOME SPECIFIC HAZARDS


Electromagnetic Waves and Safety
It is known from various studies that certain body tissues are more susceptible than
others to damage from electromagnetic waves. The eyes and reproductive organs
are most frequently mentioned in this regard.
The eyes, not having a covering of skin, are susceptible to damage by ultraviolet
radiation. In ultraviolet therapy the eyes should always be protected from direct Sunglasses or goggles
irradiation by use of glasses which reduce the visible light intensity and absorb most made of plastic or glass and
of the ultraviolet radiation. Sunglasses perform this role quite adequately. The only painted with a filter (often
risk is of UV exposure through the areas not covered by the sunglasses. For this coloured blue) can effectively
reason, protective goggles, which cover the eyes completely, are preferred. block ultraviolet transmission.

Exposure of the eyes to a sufficiently high dose of ultraviolet radiation produces


photopthalmia - acute inflammatory reactions of the superficial parts of the eye. This
is commonly known as snow-blindness (snow reflects a large part of the UV radiation
in sunlight). It can be produced by sunlight, electric welding arcs or any other source
of ultraviolet radiation. The reactions cause acute pain, beginning after a latency
period of a few hours and reaching a maximum in about 48 hours. The effects
subside over a period of days. Only very large doses produce permanent damage.
It should also be borne in mind when considering prolonged or repeated courses of As with all forms of therapy
treatment with ultraviolet radiation that such radiation is carcinogenic. Certain forms the risks associated with UV
of cancer are known to occur more frequently in people exposed to higher levels of exposure must be calculated
ultraviolet radiation. and weighed against the
therapeutic benefit in
Microwave therapy is contraindicated for treatment of eye conditions. Generally, deciding a course of
extreme caution should be exercised when treating nearby structures. The treatment.
susceptibility of the eyes to damage by microwave radiation is due to two factors (a)
reflection and refraction producing 'hot-spots' within the eye cavities and (b) a relatively
poor blood supply which limits the eye's ability to conduct heat away.
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 322

It has been known for some time that sufficiently high intensities of microwave
radiation can bring about the formation of cataracts in the eye. Experimental work
using laboratory animals indicates a threshold intensity level for cataract formation a
little in excess of 100 mW.cm-2 for prolonged exposure.

It is common practice to avoid exposing the reproductive organs to microwave


radiation. The testes are particularly susceptible to stray radiation in therapy.
For a detailed description of the hazards of microwave exposure and references to
relevant experimental work see S. M. Michaelson in Lehmann (1982). For a more The hazards with microwave
general description of the hazards of both radio-frequency and microwave radiation exposure are discussed in
see publications by the World Health Organization (search their website at Lehmann, J F, Therapeutic
www.who.int). These documents discuss the known biological effects of such Heat and Cold (3rd Edition)
radiation and summarize exposure safety limits proposed or in use in different Williams and Wilkins (1982):
countries. chapter 7).

All practicing physiotherapists should be familiar with the relevant safety standards
and their implementation. It should be noted, however, that the exposure limits
stipulated apply to the general public but not to the patient receiving treatment, nor the Australian standard AS2772.1
therapist. For example, the maximum exposure level for a therapist using 27 MHz (1998) stipulates the
shortwave diathermy apparatus is 1.2 mW.cm-2 . For non-occupationally exposed maximum exposure levels
individuals such as secretarial staff and members of the general public the stipulated allowed for radio-frequency
levels are one fifth of these values. For patient exposure, there is no prescribed limit. and microwave frequency
It is assumed that the therapist has weighed the therapeutic benefits against the radiation.
potential hazards and on this basis has prescribed treatment.
Ultrasound And Boundary Effects
A fundamental characteristic which distinguishes ultrasound from other diathermic
modalities is that the ultrasound wave is a mechanical disturbance in a material
medium. Particles within the medium oscillate back and forth, undergoing large
changes in velocity and acceleration. This gives rise to two phenomena which can
result in selective heating at or near a boundary. The processes are called velocity
gradient heat production and shear wave production.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 323

We consider first velocity gradient heat production. Suppose an ultrasound beam is


directed so as to strike a tissue boundary at a grazing angle. In other words the
waves travel almost parallel to the interface. At this angle of incidence little or no wave This means that particles on
energy will be transmitted. one side of the boundary are
oscillating back and forth with
There will be a thin layer, just each side of the boundary where the velocity changes the wave motion while
from maximum to zero. Thus there is a velocity gradient in this narrow region. If the particles on the other side of
boundary region is very narrow a very high velocity gradient exists and the adjacent the boundary are stationary.
region are subject to greater stresses than those outside. The higher oscillatory
stresses give rise to greater heat production than occurs in the medium in which the
waves are travelling. Hence boundary layer heat production can be significantly
greater than heat production due to normal wave energy absorption in a medium.
The thickness of the boundary layer determines the velocity gradient and this in turn
depends on the rigidity of each medium. For tissues of similar stiffness, such as
muscle and fatty tissue the boundary layer is wide, the velocity gradient is small and
boundary layer heat production is minimal. For tissues of quite different stiffness,
such as muscle and bone, the velocity gradient is high and the rate of heat production
at the interface is much higher than in the bulk of the tissues.
Shear waves can be produced when an ultrasound beam strikes a boundary. They
are not produced when the wave strikes the boundary at a right angle (zero angle of
incidence), nor is production appreciable at grazing angles. Maximum production
occurs near the middle of the range.
While normal sound waves are a longitudinal wave motion, shear waves are
transverse. In other words the particle displacement is at right angles to the direction In practical terms this means
of propagation. A further point which should be noted is that shear waves can only that shear wave production is
exist in solids or very viscous liquids and they are absorbed more rapidly than relatively unimportant at soft
transverse waves. tissue interfaces but is
important at the muscle/bone
Shear waves are produced when the wave velocity is different in two adjacent tissues. interface.
The wave frequencies must be identical so the difference in wave velocity results in a
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 324

different wavelength in each tissue (by equation 9.1, v = f.λ).

This means that regions of compression and rarefaction are separated by different
distances in the adjoining tissues. So at the boundary, a region of compression on
one side will periodically be aligned with a region of rarefaction on the other. The
resulting pressure differential will cause particles near the boundary to oscillate in a
direction transverse to the direction of the reflected and transmitted waves. The high
stresses produced at the interface result in greater heating than in the bulk of each
tissue.

When an ultrasound beam in muscle strikes the muscle/bone interface the amount of Dunn and Frizzel (see
energy taken by the shear wave can be large. As the rate of absorption of shear wave Lehmann, 1982, chapter 9)
energy is much higher than that of longitudinal waves, heating of the surface region of calculate that for 1 MHz
the bone is accentuated. ultrasound, up to 80% of the
energy transmitted at the
In chapter 10 we saw that in the fat/muscle/bone system, 1 MHz ultrasound produces muscle/bone interface may
the greatest rate of heating in the first few mm of bone. The resulting temperature rise go into production of shear
in the periosteum places a limit on the rate at which energy can be supplied to the waves.
patient. This happens when ultrasound is incident on each tissue boundary at a right
angle and shear wave production and velocity gradient effects are negligible. For
ultrasound incident upon the bone at other than a right angle, the heating rate of
tissue adjacent to the bone will be even greater so the rate at which energy can be
supplied to the patient will be further limited. The implication is that in therapy, the risk
of producing periosteal pain and tissue damage is enhanced if the ultrasound beam
does not strike the bone surface at a right angle. The therapist should position the
treatment head as close to parallel to the surface of the underlying bone as possible
so as to minimize velocity gradient and shear wave effects.
Ultrasound and Cavitation
We discussed in chapter 10, the mechanical stresses produced when an ultrasound A pressure of 20 N.cm-2 is 20
wave travels through tissue. With 1 MHz ultrasound at an intensity of 2 W.cm-2 , x 104 N.m-2 or 20 kPa). This
regions separated by 0.75 mm differ in pressure by about 20 N.cm-2 . The large is about 1/5 of atmospheric
pressure gradient can result in gaseous cavitation: the formation of tiny bubbles from pressure.

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 325

gas dissolved in the tissue fluid in a region of rarefaction (low pressure).


An upper limit to the therapeutic dose rate of ultrasound is set by the threshold
intensity for cavitation. Treatment at intensities above this threshold could only The formation of a gas
produce the therapeutically undesirable outcome of mechanical tissue damage. In bubble can cause damage,
practice this threshold is unlikely to be achieved clinically. An intensity of 2 W.cm-2 tearing apart the tissue. Also,
would produce sufficient heating for temperature elevation to be the limiting factor. the bubble may collapse
during the subsequent
Thus although cavitation is a risk and a therapeutic hazard, it is not likely to be of compression phase, creating
practical significance. a minute but intense shock
wave in the immediate area.
Cavitation effects are described more fully by Coakley (Physiotherapy. 64, 166-169,
1978).

Treatment of the eyes with ultrasound is generally avoided because of the risk of
damage in any tissue which has a poor or restricted blood supply.
Cardiac Pacemakers
Cardiac pacemakers present a special hazard as far as diathermy is concerned. Two
kinds of pacemaker are used: the fixed rate unit which provides a constant frequency
train of stimuli to the heart and the more popular noncompetitive units which provide a
stimulus frequency based on feedback signals from the heart. Noncompetitive units
are more satisfactory medically as the heart rate is adjusted by the oxygen demand of
the patient.
There are two risks in the application of diathermy:
* the risk of selective heating of the unit and tissues in contact with the unit and its
wires. Each diathermic modality presents this hazard when used close to the
unit.
* more importantly, the risk of interfering with pacemaker action. Microwave and
shortwave diathermy present the greatest hazard in this regard. The fixed
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 326

frequency pacemaker is less susceptible as it does not require any feedback


signal. Noncompetitive units can change their frequency or cease to function
completely as a result of currents induced by microwave radiation or the
shortwave field. See J. F. Lehman in Krusen's
Handbook of Physical
The limited amount of research in this area to date indicates that shortwave and Medicine and Rehabilitation
microwave radiation are contraindicated when a pacemaker is present. Some units (3rd Edition), Williams and
are found to cease functioning when brought within a few metres of microwave Wilkins (1982) and J. Heath
apparatus. Ultrasound therapy seems safer in this regard but extreme care should be Modern Medicine (Abstract)
exercised, when using this modality, to avoid the area containing the pacemaker and Vol. 43, June 15, 1975
wires.

EXERCISES
1 (a) Define the terms dose, dose rate and irradiance. What are the units of each
quantity?
(b) Use infrared therapy as an example and explain how each of the above
quantities are specified in describing the treatment conditions.

2 (a) List the treatment modalities for which the response of the patient can be
used as an immediate guide as to dosage requirements.
(b) For each treatment modality not listed in (a) above, explain why the
immediate response of the patient can not be used to assess dosage
requirements. Distinguish those cases where the immediate response is a
poor guide and where an immediate response is not normally produced.

3 Describe the way in which dose requirements are established for (i) ultraviolet
therapy and (ii) PUVA treatment in terms of:
(a) calibration of the lamp
(b) testing an individual patient

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 327

4 A patient about to receive ultraviolet therapy is tested with a particular lamp and
found to require 25 seconds exposure at a distance of 0.6 m to produce a first-
degree erythema reaction (E1).
(a) What exposure time would be required to produce a second-degree
erythema reaction (E2) with the same lamp-to-patient distance? (See table
12.1).
(b) What exposure time would be required to again produce a second degree
erythema reaction with a subsequent treatment? (See table 12.2).
(c) What exposure time would be required to produce an E2 reaction at the
second treatment if the patient-to-lamp distance is decreased to 0.4 m?

5 A patient is found to require a 35 second exposure from a particular lamp to


produce a first-degree erythema reaction. The lamp-to-patient distance is 0.5 m.
(a) What exposure time would be required to produce an E1 reaction if the
lamp-to-patient distance was changed to 1 m?
(b) What exposure time would be required to produce an E3 reaction with the
lamp-to-patient distance kept at 0.5 m?
(c) What exposure time would be required to produce an E3 reaction with the
lamp-to-patient distance reduced to 0.25 m?
6 Equation 12.1 was derived by considering light from a point source passing
through a rectangular aperture in a screen (figure 12.1). Show that the same
relationship is obtained when we consider light passing through a screen with a
circular aperture of diameter x.

7 Using the fact that dosage depends on the product of intensity and exposure
time, derive equation 12.2 from equation 12.1.
8 What are the two factors which contribute to lower the dosage when radiation is
not incident at right angles to a tissue surface?
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 328

9 (a) Draw a diagram similar to figure 12.3(b), showing a light beam of square
cross-section striking a surface at an angle θ.
(b) Use simple trigonometry to show that the square beam consequently
illuminates a rectangular area with sides of length x and x/cosθ.
(c) Hence show that the light intensity at the surface is Ecosθ/x2, where E is the
light energy in the beam.

10 A beam of light strikes a surface at right angles as shown in figure 12.3. The
light intensity at the surface is measured as 50 J.m-2. Calculate the light intensity
if the surface is tilted so that the angle of incidence is:
(a) 15 o
(b) 30 o
(c) 45 o

11 Briefly summarize the particular problems of assessing dosage in:


(a) shortwave diathermy
(b) ultrasound diathermy
(c) microwave diathermy
For which modality is the dosage most reproducible and for which is it least
reproducible?

12 (a) Draw a diagram similar to figure 6.19(a) but including a metal implant (say a
metal plate on the surface of the bone).
(b) Draw the pattern of electric field lines and indicate clearly where the field
intensity is increased and where it is decreased.
(c) Describe the effect of the implant on heat production in different areas of the
tissue. Why would heat production within the metal be low?

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 329

13 Assume that the electric field within a tissue layer is originally uniform and draw
diagrams to show the effect of a spherical implant or cavity for the following
cases:
(a) an air-filled cavity in muscle
(b) an air-filled cavity in fatty tissue
(c) a fluid-filled cavity in muscle
(d) a fluid-filled cavity in fatty tissue
(e) a metal implant in muscle
In each case state reasons for the effects on the field pattern which you have
shown.

14 Briefly describe the effects of shape and orientation of a metal implant in tissue
subjected to an electric field (figure 12.4). What are the implications for
shortwave diathermy treatment using parallel plate electrodes?

15 Consider the effect of implants and cavities on the distribution of ultrasound


energy in tissue.
(a) What factors determine the amount of energy reflected at a tissue/implant or
tissue/cavity interface?
(b) Would you expect significant reflection at the following interfaces?
(i) tissue/metal
(ii) tissue/air cavity
(iii) tissue/body fluid cavity
Justify your answers.

16 The pattern of heat production for 1 MHz ultrasound in a fat/muscle tissue


combination is shown in figure 10.5.
(a) Draw diagrams similar to figure 10.5 to show qualitatively the effect on the
DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 330

pattern of heat production of a metal implant located 4 cm below the tissue


surface.
(b) Would you predict any difference in the pattern of heat production if an air-
filled cavity rather than a metal implant was included in the tissue? Justify
your answer.
(c) What differences would be expected in the temperature elevation of tissue
adjacent to a metal implant as compared to an air-filled cavity? Explain.

17 Briefly describe the effects of the following on the pattern of heat production in
tissue exposed to microwaves:
(a) an air-filled cavity
(b) a metal implant
(c) a fluid-filled cavity
What differences in temperature elevation would occur with (a) as compared to
(b)? Explain.

18 (a) Briefly describe why the eyes must be protected from exposure to (i)
microwaves and (ii) ultraviolet radiation in therapy.
(b) For ultraviolet therapy adequate shielding of the eyes is achieved by wearing
protective glasses. Would similar glasses provide adequate protection
from microwaves? Explain.
(c) List other specific hazards associated with microwave and ultraviolet
radiation.
19 (a) What is meant by the term 'velocity gradient heat production' and under what
circumstances is this effect significant?
(b) What is a shear wave and under what circumstances is shear wave
production significant?
(c) What effect will shear wave production and velocity gradient heat production
have on the temperature distribution in tissue?

DOSAGE AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 331

20 (a) What is meant by the term 'gaseous cavitation'. Does it pose a hazard in
ultrasound therapy?
(b) Why is gaseous cavitation associated with ultrasound waves and not
microwaves or ultraviolet radiation?

21 Cardiac pacemakers present a special hazard for diathermy. What are the risks
and how do shortwave, microwave and ultrasound diathermy differ in this
regard?
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 332

13 Electrical Safety
Most of the apparatus used in diathermy and electrotherapy is plugged into the mains
supply - 240 volts AC with a frequency of 50 Hz. Any apparatus of this kind represents In Australia, the UK and many
a potential hazard: the risk of electric shock. In this chapter we consider how a shock other countries the mains
can occur, its likely effect and methods of shock protection. supply is 240 volts AC at a
frequency of 50 Hz. Other
It is convenient to distinguish two kinds of shock mechanism; these are macroshock countries (including the USA)
and microshock. use a 120 volts, 60 Hz supply.

* Macroshock: The familiar mechanism which has posed a risk since the advent of
commercially supplied electricity. Here current flows from the body surface, through
the skin and into the body. In order to produce harmful effects a relatively large voltage
and current are needed. A high voltage is needed to produce a sufficiently high
current as the skin offers a high electrical impedance. A high current is needed as
current spreads as it flows through deeper tissues and it is the current density (in A.m-
2 or mA.cm-2) which determines the physiological effects.

* Microshock: As a result of increasing sophistication in medical technology the


patient, in a hospital setting, may be connected to a number of pieces of apparatus For the clinician in an
some of which provide a direct electrical pathway to the heart (for example a intensive-care ward, the risk
myocardial electrode or a transvenous catheter). A very small current applied directly of microshock is an important
to the heart via this pathway can be fatal. Only a low voltage is needed as the consideration. In private
subcutaneous tissues have a low electrical impedance and the current is localized, practice, the potential hazards
resulting in a high current density. are less likely to exist.

How to get a shock


To avoid the risk of electric shock, it is necessary to understand how it can occur. In
order to produce an electric shock two conditions must be satisfied. Firstly the victim
must complete a circuit and secondly the current levels involved must be high enough
to produce an adverse reaction.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 333

Suppose a person inadvertently contacts one terminal of a battery. In this situation no


shock can occur. A shock current can only flow when the person completes a circuit
and current is able to flow from one terminal through the person and ultimately to the
opposite terminal of the battery. In order for a current to flow the person must
simultaneously contact both terminals of the battery. This is illustrated in figure 13.1.

Figure 13.1
A person must 'complete a circuit' for
shock to occur.

In figure 13.1(a) a shock can not occur, regardless of the size of the battery voltage, as
there is no continuous pathway for the current to travel. In figure 13.1(b) current is able
to flow from one terminal of the battery, through the person, to the opposite terminal:
the circuit is complete and a shock can result if the current flow is large enough.

SIZES OF SHOCK CURRENT


For shock to occur the current flowing through the person must exceed a certain level.
Currents below about 10 mA (0.01 amps) when applied to the whole body via the skin
are unlikely to cause an electric shock. This is because the current is distributed
through the body so that the amount of electrical energy applied to a particular organ
is small. Macroshock only poses a significant risk if the current level exceeds 10 mA.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 334

By the same token a current in excess of about 100 µA (0.0001 amps) applied directly
to the heart (for example via a myocardial electrode) may be fatal. The microshock
risk threshold is more than 100 times lower than that of macroshock. Shocks are described in
terms of current flow and not
Table 13.1 shows the effect of macroshock, i.e. when current passes through the skin voltage. A shock's effect is
and through the body: that is when the shock is not given directly to vital organs. The determined by the amount of
values quoted refer to mains frequency (50 Hz) AC, since shock via the mains supply current which flows through a
is the greatest hazard in most situations which the physiotherapist will encounter. For particular organ, not the
figures appropriate to DC and other frequencies see Standards Association voltage which produces it.
publication AS/NZS 60479:2002.

Table 13.1
Effects of shock current through body.

While any amount of current over 10 mA is capable of producing painful to severe


shock, currents between 50 and 250 mA are potentially lethal. At values as low as 20
mA breathing becomes laboured, finally ceasing completely even at values below 75
mA: the victim can suffocate due to uncontrollable contraction of the muscles of the
thorax and abdomen.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 335

If the current exceeds about 50 mA, ventricular fibrillation of the heart is likely to occur -
an uncoordinated twitching of the walls of the heart's ventricles. Once ventricular A fibrillating heart is unable to
fibrillation is induced the heart will not spontaneously revert to its normal pattern of pump blood so the victim will
beating. Normal cardiac rhythm can only be restored by administering a massive die unless first aid (cardiac
current pulse from a cardiac defibrillator. The machine, which should only be massage and artificial
operated by qualified personnel, supplies a short (3-4 ms) current pulse with an respiration) is administered
instantaneous amplitude of up to 40 to 80 amperes. Such high currents forcibly until medical help arrives.
clamp the heart. When the clamping action ceases the heart is more likely to revert to
its normal pattern of contraction.
For shock currents above about 250 milliamps, the muscular contractions are so
severe that the heart is forcibly clamped during the shock. This clamping protects the
heart from going into ventricular fibrillation and the chances of survival are improved.

From a practical viewpoint, after a person is knocked out by an electrical shock it is


impossible to tell how much current passed through the vital organs of his body.
Artificial respiration must be applied immediately if breathing has stopped: if no pulse
is detectable external cardiac massage should also be applied.
An important question is 'how much current will flow if a particular voltage is applied
externally i.e. to the skin surface'. This depends more on the skin impedance than
on the impedance of deeper tissues. The impedance of deeper tissues depends on
their shape and volume, but does not vary a lot. Between the ears, for example, the A useful rule-of-thumb is that
internal resistance at low frequencies (less the skin resistance) is 100 ohms, while in most practical situations,
from hand to foot it is close to 500 ohms. the deep-tissue impedance
is around 200 Ω.
The skin impedance varies much more than that of the underlying tissue. For 50 Hz
AC it can be lower than 1000 ohms for moist skin to higher than 0.5 megohms for dry
skin.
The body current flowing when a person contacts the mains supply (240 volts) is
calculated from Ohm's law to vary between 0.5 mA when the skin is dry and 240 mA
when the skin is moist. If the victim is startled from an initial mild shock, sweating can
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 336

result in a lowering of skin resistance and a rise in current from sub-lethal to lethal
levels in a short space of time. This is one reason why it is essential, in an electric
shock situation, to terminate the shock current as quickly as is safely possible. Perspiration is an unfortunate
accompaniment to pain and
HOW SHOCK CAN OCCUR: MACROSHOCK fright. This lowers the skin
resistance and increases the
To understand the hazards associated with the use of mains powered apparatus we shock current.
need a clear picture of the way in which mains electricity is supplied.
The very high voltage electricity which is generated at power stations is distributed by
cables to electricity substations where step-down transformers reduce the voltage to a
lower value. A single, large step-down transformer may be used to supply the 240
volts to many buildings in a residential neighbourhood. Large buildings in a city (for
example a hospital) may have their own step-down transformers. Figure 13.2 shows
the essential features of the power supply to a building.

Figure 13.2
Mains supply to a building
(schematic)

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 337

One terminal of the stepped-down supply is earthed at the electricity substation. This
is called the neutral line. When the substation serves several buildings the neutral
line is normally also earthed at the fuse box in each building. As we will see later, earthing
the supply affords a simple
240 volts AC is thus supplied to the fuse box in a building using two wires, the active but efficient means of primary
wire and the neutral wire. The neutral wire is nominally at earth potential (zero volts) protection against shock
and the active wire is at a high potential. The active line connects through a power hazard situations.
meter to a switch and fuse or to a circuit breaker. From the fuse box, power wires run
to light switches and power outlets. Power outlets have three terminals; an active, a
neutral and an earth terminal. The earth terminal is connected to a wire which is
physically connected to earth at the building. Figure 13.3 shows the connections of
the active, neutral and earth wires to a power outlet socket.

Figure 13.3
Wiring convention for an Australian
power outlet (viewed from the front).

Both the neutral and earth terminals of a power point are


normally at earth or ground potential. However, it should not
be assumed that the active terminal (on the left in figure 13.3)
is the only hazardous one. For example it is quite possible for
the active and neutral connections to be inadvertently
interchanged when the power point is installed. Mains-
powered equipment will still function normally when plugged
in to the power point: the fault can only be determined by a
specific test.
Even when the power point is correctly wired it is possible for the neutral terminal to
be above ground potential. This happens when appliances which draw a high current
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 338

are connected to the same circuit. A high current flowing in the neutral line will result
in a potential difference between the power point neutral terminal and the connection
to earth at the fuse box. This is because the resistance of the neutral cable, while For these reasons both the
small, is not zero. If the neutral wire has a resistance R and carries a current I, the active and neutral terminals
potential difference produced is given by Ohm's law as V = I.R. of a power point should be
treated with equal respect
In what follows we assume that the power point is correctly wired and consider other when considering potential
hazards associated with the mains supply. shock hazards.

In normal operation, when an appliance is plugged into the mains outlet, current flows
between the active and neutral terminals. The earth wires does not normally carry any
current. The earth connection is only provided as a safety measure.

The advantages of a three-terminal mains supply can be seen by inspecting figure


13.4.

Figure 13.4
Earthing of mains-powered apparatus casing.

The circuitry within the apparatus (represented by an equivalent resistance Re in


figure 13.4) is powered from the active and neutral wires. The earth wire is connected
to the casing of the apparatus to ensure that there is never any voltage on the casing.
The idea is that if the active wire within the apparatus makes accidental contact with
the casing a very high current will flow through the earth wire to ground. The low

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 339

resistance of the earth wire ensures that the current flow will be large enough to blow
the fuse, thus cutting off the active supply. In this way, the casing of the apparatus can
not become 'live' and present an electric shock hazard to anyone touching it. For this reason a fuse should
never be replaced with a
As long as the earth wire and connections remain intact there is no risk of shock from conductor other than a fuse
touching the apparatus. of the same rating.

Some apparatus - electric shavers and hair dryers are examples - is 'double Australian Standard AS3100
insulated'. The casing is usually made of a non-conducting plastic and special requires that double
precautions are taken to ensure that an electric shock is virtually impossible. The insulated apparatus has two
advantage here is that no reliance is placed on an earth wire which could come loose distinct and independent
or break. In fact, no provision at all is made for an earth connection to the apparatus. layers of insulation. Failure of
The use of the double insulation principle is restricted to small and easily insulated both insulating layers is
apparatus. Any exposed metal on double insulated apparatus is not connected to almost impossible without
earth but is doubly isolated from the internal electrical circuitry. complete fracture of the
apparatus' casing.
All apparatus which plugs into the mains, then, is macroshock protected, either by
double insulation or by earthing. Nevertheless hazards remain in the form of faulty or
worn equipment or careless workmanship.

Figure 13.5 illustrates how an electric shock can


result when apparatus is not earthed - because
the earth wire is damaged or disconnected. The
shock hazard in figure 13.5 arises when the
active terminal short-circuits to the casing of the
apparatus. In this case two faults have occurred -
a break in the earth connection and a short circuit
of the active wire to the casing.

Figure 13.5
A person contacts apparatus which is not earthed
and has the active wire touching the casing.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 340

Since the neutral line is earthed at the fuse box and power sub-station, a person
standing on the ground is effectively connected to the neutral terminal of the mains
supply. To complete the circuit and receive a shock, the person need only touch the
active terminal or something connected to the active terminal. Current flows from the
active terminal through the person to ground and hence to the neutral connection at
the fuse box or power substation.
Two important things should be noted about the situation illustrated in figure 13.5
* A shock has occurred because the earth wire is damaged. If the earth
connection was intact the fuse in the active line (figure 13.2) would blow and
isolate the apparatus from the mains supply.
* The fuse in the active line will not protect the person from receiving an electric
shock. The fuses used for normal apparatus have a rating of several amperes. The fuses used in typical
The person can receive a lethal shock (see table 13.1) without blowing the fuse. apparatus must have high
ratings so they will not blow in
A question which might occur to you is 'do both faults shown in figure 13.5 have to normal operation (where the
exist in order for a shock to result?' The answer is no. A shock can result when the current flowing between
apparatus is not earthed even though there is no direct physical contact between the active and neutral may be
active terminal and the casing. This is because the active wire and the case must measured in amperes).
have a small capacitance associated with them and insulation will not be perfect.
Thus it is possible for small currents to leak via the insulation to the casing. With new
and well looked-after apparatus the insulation impedance will be high and the
maximum leakage current will be very small. Bad design or deteriorating insulation
can, however, increase leakage currents to hazardous levels. Only by earthing the
casing and providing an extremely low resistance pathway to ground can the risk of
shock be minimized.

MACROSHOCK PROTECTION
From the previous discussion it should be apparent that the fuses in the mains supply
serve a protective role only when currents of several amperes are involved. For this to

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 341

happen the active wire must short-circuit to the earthed casing. How then can we
protect against shock involving much lower currents? There are two commonly used
ways - by using a core balance relay or a protected earth-free supply.
Core Balance Relays
Under normal circumstances the currents flowing in the active and neutral wires are
equal. When an electric shock occurs the current in the active wire will be slightly
greater than that in the neutral wire. This is because some current flows from the
active wire through the victim to ground and through the ground to the neutral
connection at the fuse box. Core balance relays are used to detect any imbalance and
disconnect the power supply when the imbalance exceeds a predetermined value.
The arrangement is shown in figure 13.6.
Figure 13.6
Core-balance relay protection.

The active and neutral wires both


pass through a magnetic core
around which a sensing coil is
wound. The currents in these
wires are in opposite directions
and when they are equal no current
is induced in the sensing coil. If
the currents are unequal a current
proportional to the difference in
active and neutral current is
induced in the sensing coil. The
induced current is amplified and
used to operate a magnetic relay
which disconnects both the active
and neutral supply lines.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 342

Once the core balance relay has been 'tripped', the supply remains disconnected until
the circuit breaker is manually reset.
The response time of core balance relays is quite short (less than 100 ms) and typical
units can be adjusted to trigger on an imbalance of as little as 5 mA. They are
available for permanent installation (usually inside the fuse box) and are also supplied
as portable units suitable for connecting between power points and appliances.
From the foregoing description it should be apparent that these units protect against
the 'normal' situation where a shock current flows through a person's body to earth.
They will not protect against the more unusual situation where a person inadvertently
contacts both the active and neutral lines simultaneously.
Earth Free Supplies
In the situation shown in figure 13.5
the person receives an electric shock
because his hand makes contact with
the active line and his feet are in
contact with the ground to which the
neutral is connected. A question
which might occur to you is 'would it be
safer if the supply neutral was not
earthed?' In this case the earthed
person could not complete a circuit by
touching the active line and so would
not receive a shock. The answer to the
question is a qualified 'yes'.

Figure 13.7 shows how the normal


mains supply can be rendered earth-
free by using an isolating transformer.
If neither side of the transformer Figure 13.7
secondary is earthed a person can Isolation with a transformer.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 343

touch both earth and one transformer terminal without receiving a shock.
At first glance it would seem that a person can only receive a shock if both transformer
secondary terminals are contacted simultaneously. Unfortunately this is not the case
in practice and the reasons are twofold:

* If a piece of apparatus plugged into the power point should develop a short circuit
to earth no fuses will blow. The fault can remain unnoticed indefinitely. In the
meantime the earth free supply has been converted to an earthed supply and we
have no knowledge of which side of the transformer has become 'active' and
which 'neutral'.

* If faulty or poorly designed


apparatus is plugged into the
power point the insulation
impedance between either
supply terminal and earth can
be reduced to the extent that
the supply is effectively
earthed: again with no
knowledge of which terminal
is at earth potential.

The system can be rendered safe


by adding an earth leakage
detector between the mains earth
and the two transformer secondary
wires as shown in figure 13.8.
In normal operation a negligible
amount of current flows through
the leakage detector. If, however,
apparatus with a short circuit or Figure 13.8
defective insulation is plugged into Isolation with earth leakage detection.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 344

the power point a current will flow through the detector and activate the alarm.

Of the two systems the protected earth free supply is somewhat safer than an earthed When earth free supplies are
supply fitted with a core balance relay. Unfortunately the isolation transformers and used an earth leakage
leakage detection circuitry needed are both bulky and expensive. For this reason detector system is
protected earth free supplies are only found in areas of high shock hazard. Core mandatory. The combination
balance relays which are relatively cheap and easy to install are considered adequate provides a high degree of
for more general use such as in physiotherapy clinics and the physiotherapy electrical safety.
departments of hospitals. Whichever method of protection is used it is important that
the system be checked at regular intervals to ensure that the protection mechanisms
are operating correctly.
MICROSHOCK
The use of electronic monitoring and measuring
devices in the hospital setting has proved of
immense value for patient monitoring and
assessment. It has, however, also introduced
some special risks of which the modern member
of the health care team must be aware.
Consider the patient in an intensive care unit. In
some cases the patient may have apparatus
connected by a direct electrical pathway to the
heart. One such situation is illustrated in figure
13.9. Here a very special hazard exists because of
the low current needed to cause ventricular
fibrillation. Even if all the equipment is earthed the
patient can still be electrocuted unless adequate
precautions are taken.

Figure 13.9
A microshock hazard situation.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 345

The patient, in this situation, is connected to two pieces of apparatus: an


electrocardiograph (ECG) machine and a blood pressure monitor. For simplicity only
the earth wires are shown. The patient is connected to earth by two pathways: the
electrode connected to the right leg is earthed via the ECG machine and the fluid filled
catheter is connected to a pressure transducer which is earthed via the blood
pressure monitor.
The risk of shock arises when a potential difference exists between the earth
terminals on outlets 2 and 3. If a current I flows along the earth wire connecting the For example, if the resistance
of the earth wire is 0.1 Ω, and
two outlets a potential difference V will result. V is given by Ohm's law V = I.R where R a spike of leakage current of
is the resistance of the earth wire between the outlets. Although R is very small it is
100 mA flows, a potential
not zero. If I is large enough the potential difference produced will be sufficient to
difference of 10 mV is
electrocute the patient - remember that currents in excess of 100 microamperes or so produced. If the resistance of
flowing through the patient's heart may be fatal.
the tissue is 100 Ω, a current
of 100 µA will flow.
Normally, of course, little or no current flows in the earth wire - it is only there to carry
leakage current from the apparatus plugged-in. If, however, an appliance with a high
leakage current, such as a vacuum cleaner, is plugged into outlet 1 a dangerous
situation can result.

Vacuum cleaners are notorious for producing large leakage currents (particularly at
switch-on) because the motor is continually exposed to dust and moisture which
lower the insulation impedance. Visualize the situation where the patient in figure
13.9 is connected as shown and a cleaner, working his way down the corridor, plugs
a vacuum cleaner into outlet I (on the corridor outside) and switches it on. The
instantaneous leakage current flowing in the earth wire could raise the potential at the
earth terminal of outlet 2 to a sufficiently high value (relative to outlet 3) to electrocute
the patient.

The solution, in this case, is to plug all apparatus around the patient into a single
power outlet or to interconnect the earth terminal of each outlet with heavy gauge
copper wire. It is also necessary to ensure that the wiring for the power outlets in the
patient's room does not connect to the power outlets in adjacent rooms or corridors.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 346

A further precaution which must be taken is to ensure that any apparatus which is
used in the patient's room has been tested for earth leakage and meets the
appropriate safety standards. This last criterion would
exclude most domestic and
PATIENT TREATMENT AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY industrial vacuum cleaners
and many domestic
From the foregoing considerations of shock and shock protection it is apparent that appliances.
there are three levels of risk associated with patient treatment. The greatest risk is to
patients coupled to apparatus which may have a direct electrical connection to the
heart. A lower level of risk exists when there are no invasive electrical connections;
however we should distinguish the patient who is coupled to electromedical
apparatus by surface electrodes from the patient who is not electrically connected to
any piece of apparatus. The reason is that if a patient is connected by electrodes to,
say, an electrocardiograph the potential for a shock to occur is increased by the
deliberate electrical connection. In addition the skin resistance has been minimized
by cleaning and application of a conductive electrode gel. In this case the voltage
needed to produce a fatal shock current is reduced.
Protection is afforded at two levels:
* by using apparatus which meets appropriate safety standards and
* by appropriate protection built into the mains supply.
We consider each factor in turn.

Protection and the Mains Supply


Patient treatment areas in hospitals are distinguished according to the kind of
procedures or treatment being used and different safety standards apply to the mains
supply in each case. Three types of treatment area are distinguished:
* Cardiac protected electrical areas. These are areas which are suitable for
carrying out procedures which involve direct electrical connection to the heart.
The safety requirements for both the electrical supply and apparatus to be used
in such areas are stringent (see SAA Standards AS 3200 and AS 3003). These

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 347

are described as 'Type CF' or simply 'cardiac protected' areas. In Australia and
some other countries, these used to be described as 'Class A' treatment areas.
* Body protected electrical areas. These are areas which are suitable for
carrying out procedures which do not involve direct electrical connection to the
heart but which do involve the patient being in direct electrical contact with
electromedical apparatus. Safety requirements are more stringent than those
applying to areas where no electrical connection between patient and apparatus
is necessary. Such areas are described as 'Type BF' or simply 'body protected'
areas. They used to be known as 'class B' treatment areas.
* Other patient areas. These are areas which are not specifically suited to
'cardiac type' or 'body type' procedures. Apparatus which is not electrically
connected to the patient can be used. Apparatus which is intended to connect
electrically to the patient can be used in these areas, but only if the apparatus
itself meets stringent safety requirements (equivalent to those of a cardiac
protected or body protected treatment area).
When direct electrical connection is made to the heart, shock currents as low as 100
µA can be fatal. For this reason cardiac-protected treatment areas are designed to If the maximum potential
minimize this risk. The earth wiring in these areas is constructed from heavy gauge difference is kept below 100
copper wire so that even when substantial currents (up to 1 ampere) flow in the earth mV then the maximum patient
wire the potential difference between different earth terminals is kept below 100 mV. current will be below 100 µA
An area which meets this and other requirements (see SAA Standard AS3003) is (assuming a minimum
described as an equipotential earth (EP) area. patient resistance of 1000
ohms).
In addition to the requirement for equipotential earth wiring, cardiac protected areas
must also have core-balance relay protection or have a protected earth free supply.

Body protected areas are those designed to protect patients who may be connected
directly to electromedical apparatus from macroshock currents. It is not necessary for
the area to have an equipotential earth system but the supply must have core-balance
relay protection or a protected earth free supply.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 348

Best protection is afforded by a protected earth free supply but such installations are
expensive. Core-balance relay protection can be provided economically and gives an
adequate level of safety. Body protected areas which have appropriate core-balance
protection will have the mains supply disconnected within 60 milliseconds of the
active and neutral current imbalance exceeding 10 mA (SAA Standard AS3003).

Class CF (cardiac protected) and BF (body protected) treatment areas are normally
identified by signs displayed in, or on the doors of, the area. The signs have an
identifying symbol and the words 'CARDIAC PROTECTED ELECTRICAL AREA' or
'BODY PROTECTED ELECTRICAL AREA' printed in white letters on a green
background. The symbols for these areas are shown in figure 13.10.

Figure 13.10
Symbols used to identify different classes of
equipment or treatment area. (a) class CF
(microshock protected) (b) class BF (body protected).

Patient areas which are not designated class A or B


have no 'special' safety requirements other than those
which apply to commercial, industrial and domestic
supplies (SAA Standard AS3000). This means that the
area does not provide protection if contact is made
(either directly or indirectly) between the active supply
wire and earth. It is recommended, though not
mandatory, that such areas be provided with core-
balance relay protection. The recommendation should
be considered seriously since normal protective
devices (fuses or circuit breakers) can allow currents
of up to 150 times the macroshock hazard level without
operating to cut-off the supply.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 349

Protection and Electromedical Apparatus


Electromedical apparatus used for patient treatment falls into one of two categories. Both kinds of apparatus must
In the first category we have apparatus which does not have a deliberate and direct meet certain safety standards
contact with the patient, such as an infrared or ultraviolet lamp. In the second category specified in terms of the
we have apparatus which requires deliberate electrical connection with the patient; for amount of leakage current
example, apparatus for delivering interferential or conventional TENS currents. In this which can flow under different
case the apparatus has a patient circuit. conditions. Apparatus which
has a patient circuit must
Consider first electromedical apparatus which does not have a patient circuit. In this meet additional safety
case the significant risk to the patient is if the patient inadvertently contacts the standards.
apparatus casing. If the maximum contact current which can flow is below a specified
value (10 µA through a 1000 ohm load) and the earth leakage current is less than 100
µA then the apparatus is designated class CF. This is the safest kind of
electromedical apparatus. Other electromedical apparatus must have a maximum
casing-contact current below 100 µA: this is considered to offer adequate protection
when the patient has no possibility of direct electrical connection to the heart. Class
CF equipment can easily be recognized by the 'heart in the square' symbol (figure
13.10a). This is normally displayed on the rear panel of the equipment, near where
the power cord enters.

When a piece of electromedical apparatus has a patient circuit then the patient circuit
itself can be either class CF, BF or B.

* A class CF patient circuit is the most safe. If the leakage current to the patient
circuit is normally below 10 µA and below 50 µA even when a fault condition
exists (when the earth lead is broken or the patient inadvertently contacts the
active terminal of the mains supply) the patient circuit is designated class CF. A
class CF patient circuit affords microshock protection.

* A class BF patient circuit is macroshock protected. The normal leakage current


is below 100 µA and the current which can flow when the earth lead is broken is
below 500 µA. To comply with class BF specifications the fault current which can
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 350

flow from the patient circuit through the patient to the active terminal of the mains
supply (in the event of the patient accidentally contacting the mains active lead,
either directly or indirectly) must be below 5 mA. In other words a class B patient
circuit has adequate isolation from the mains supply to minimize the risk of
macroshock.

* A class B patient circuit affords a minimum level of macroshock protection. This


kind of patient circuit may have one terminal earthed. Such a circuit must have
leakage currents below those needed to represent a macroshock hazard when
the apparatus is operating normally or when the earth lead is broken. However,
no protection is offered against the situation where the patient inadvertently
contacts the mains active lead.

Class CF and BF patient circuits are identified by the symbols shown in figure 13.10.
The appropriate symbol is prominently displayed immediately adjacent to the patient
circuit output sockets of the machine. If no symbol is found, the patient circuit should
be assumed to be class B.
Protection in Summary
It should be apparent, from the foregoing description, that electrical safety is only
ensured if:
* the equipment meets appropriate safety standards for the treatment procedures
involved;
* the electrical supply meets appropriate safety standards for the treatment
procedures involved.
Figure 13.11 shows a flowchart summarizing the requirements for earthed mains-
powered apparatus and the class of area in which it can be used.
The flowchart is based upon those of Australian Standard AS3200 and figure 5.3 of
AS2500.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 351

START

Procedure must be carried YES Is there a possibility of an NO Does the equipment have a NO
out in a class CF area. intra-cardiac conductor patient circuit?
(class CF procedure)?

YES

All mains powered


equipment must: NO Does the mains supply have
* be connected in the class CF or class BF
same equipotential area. protection?
* meet relevant safety
standards. YES
Use class CF or BF Use class CF, BF or No special
patient circuit. B patient circuit. precautions

Will individual patient circuits NO


(if any) have possibility of
intra-cardiac connection?

YES

Patient circuit must be Use class CF, BF or B


class CF. patient circuit.

Figure 13.11
Flowchart for the safe application and use of electromedical equipment.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 352

The strictest safety standards are mandatory when the patient has apparatus
connected directly to the heart. In this case the mains supply should be that provided
in a Class CF area and electromedical apparatus with a patient circuit should not be
used unless either the patient circuit is class CF or there is no possibility of a direct
electrical connection with the heart. In this way the risk of microshock is minimized.

When there is no direct electrical connection to the heart it is sufficient to protect


against the risk of macroshock. This can be achieved either by using equipment with
a class CF or BF patient circuit or by treating the patient in a class CF or BF area. If the
electrical wiring in a patient treatment area is class CF or BF then patients can be
safety treated with apparatus which has a class CF, BF or B patient circuit. If the
electrical wiring in a patient treatment area is not class CF or BF then the patient
circuit must be class CF or BF. In other words if the mains supply is of the normal
household variety then electromedical apparatus should have either a class CF or BF
patient circuit.
When there is no patient circuit and no possibility of intra-cardiac connection,
electromedical equipment may be used on a normal earthed (but unprotected) mains
supply.

EXERCISES
1 (a) What is meant by the terms 'macroshock' and 'microshock'?
(b) Electric shocks are always described in terms of shock current rather than
voltage. Why is this so?

2 (a) Consider macroshock and list the factors which will determine the size of
shock current when a person accidentally contacts the mains supply.
(b) Table 13.1 shows the effect of different sizes of shock current. Explain why
shock currents in the range 50-250 mA represent a greater hazard than
shock currents above 250 mA.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 353

3 A person accidentally contacts the mains supply (240 volts). Given that the skin
resistance may vary from 1000 Ω to 0.5 MΩ calculate the possible range of shock
currents which may result.
What is the practical significance of this in terms of terminating the shock as
quickly as possible?

4 Figure 13.3 shows the wiring convention for a power outlet. Given that the neutral
and earth terminals are grounded (earthed) at the fuse box in a building
according to figure 13.2, does this mean that the neutral and earth terminals are
'safe'? Explain.
5 (a) Figure 13.2 is a schematic diagram of the mains supply to a building. The
neutral line is earthed at the electricity sub-station. Why is it an advantage to
also earth the neutral line at the fuse box?
(b) The neutral line of the mains supply is normally earthed at the fuse box.
Even so, this does not mean that the neutral terminal of a correctly wired
power point is at earth potential. Explain.
6 Consider figure 13.4 and explain what would happen if:
(a) the active line accidentally makes contact with the apparatus casing
(b) the neutral line accidentally makes contact with the apparatus casing.
Would this blow the fuse? Could a short-circuit of the neutral line to the
casing pose a shock hazard? Explain.
7 (a) What is meant by the term 'double insulated' as applied to electrical
apparatus?
(b) What is the principal advantage of double insulation for electrical safety?
(c) Explain the relative merits of double insulated apparatus and earthed
apparatus as far as leakage currents are concerned.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 354

8 (a) Figure 13.5 shows a person receiving an electric shock because two faults
have occurred. What are they?
(b) Is it possible for a person to receive a shock from apparatus in which only
one of these faults has occurred? Explain.

9 It has been said that fuses are included in the mains supply line only to protect
the apparatus. Is it possible for a fatal shock to be delivered without blowing the
fuse in the following two cases:
(a) when the earth wiring is damaged?
(b) when the earth wiring is undamaged?
Explain.
10 (a) Describe the principles of operation of a core balance relay (as shown in
figure 13.6).
(b) The fuses included in the mains supply must have a rating of several
amperes and so can not protect against macroshock, yet a core balance
relay can have a 'rating' of a few milliamperes but will not disconnect the
mains supply in normal operation. Explain.
(c) Under what circumstances is a core balance relay unable to protect against
macroshock (even involving shock currents of several hundred
milliamperes)?

11 Figure 13.7 shows an isolating transformer used to generate an earth-free


supply.
(a) Could a person receive a shock by contacting any one of the terminals of the
power outlet?
(b) Under what circumstances could a person receive a shock from an earth-
free supply (assuming no faults in the wiring)?
(c) What is the principal disadvantage of the simple earth-free supply shown in
figure 13.7?

ELECTRICAL SAFETY 355

12 (a) Explain why earth-free supplies can only be regarded as safer than a
normal earthed supply if an earth leakage detector (figure 13.8) is included
in the circuitry.
(b) Why is a protected earth-free supply preferable to a core balance relay
protected supply for areas of high shock hazard? Are there any
disadvantages associated with the installation of protected earth-free
supplies?
13 Consider figure 13.9 where the patient is connected to (i) the supply earth of a
blood pressure monitor via a transvenous catheter and (ii) the supply earth of an
ECG machine via an electrode attached to the right leg.
Explain how a shock hazard situation arises as a result of the ECG machine and
blood pressure monitor being connected to separate power outlets.

14 A microshock of only 200 µA flowing directly through the heart can be fatal.
(a) Given that the resistance of the patient's tissues between the catheter and
the electrode applied to the right leg in figure 13.9 is about 1000 Ω, calculate
the potential difference needed to produce a fatal shock current.
(b) The resistance of the earth wire connecting mains outlets 2 and 3 in figure
13.9 is 4.0 Ω . Calculate the current flowing through the earth wire
connecting the outlets which would be sufficient to cause electrocution of
the patient.
(c) A cleaner plugs a vacuum cleaner into mains outlet 2 (see figure 13.9). The
leakage current of the vacuum cleaner is 70 mA. Does this represent a
microshock hazard?
15 Consider the microshock hazard situation shown in figure 13.9.
(a) How might the microshock hazards be minimized?
(b) What are the implications of this situation for the use of electrotherapy
apparatus on or near the patient?
ELECTRICAL SAFETY 356

16 (a) What is the difference between a class CF and a class BF treatment area?
(b) How are class CF and class BF treatment areas identified?
17 (a) How would you recognize equipment with a class CF or class BF patient
circuit?
(b) A piece of equipment has a class Z patient circuit. Under what
circumstances should the equipment be used for patient treatment?
(c) What class of patient circuit should apparatus have if it is to be used in a
patient's home?
18 Suppose you have (a) an ultrasound machine and (b) an interferential therapy
machine which are to be used with an unprotected mains supply. What electrical
safety standards apply to each machine?
APPENDICES 357

APPENDIX 1
Prefixes Used to Specify Multiples and Submultiples of Units.
The following table lists some important prefixes used to specify multiples and
submultiples of units in the système internationale (SI).

Prefix Symbol Multiple


SOME EXAMPLES
giga G 109
109 hertz (Hz) = 1 gigahertz (GHz)
mega M 106
106 ohms (Ω) = 1 megohm (MΩ)
kilo k 103
103 joules (J) = 1 kilojoule (kJ)
deci d 10-1
10-2 metre (m) = 1 centimetre (cm)
centi c 10-2
10-3 watt (W) = 1 milliwatt (mW)
milli m 10-3
10-6 henry (H) = 1 microhenry (µH)
micro µ 10-6
10-12 farad (F) = 1 picofarad (pF)
nano n 10-9

pico p 10-12 Note that the prefixes deci- and centi- are considered
acceptable (due to their common usage) but are not
recommended in the SI.

APPENDICES 358

APPENDIX 2
Quantities and Units
The following tables list the quantities used in this text, their units and their symbols.
Table 1 lists quantities which are measured directly in SI base units. The quantities
listed in Table 2 have units derived from the base SI units. For a comprehensive
listing of quantities, their SI units and their definitions see Quantities and Units in
Science by O. Ogrim and A. E. Vaughan, Science Press (1977).

TABLE 1: QUANTITIES MEASURED IN Sl BASE UNITS


Some quantities have several
quantity symbol for unit symbol for alternative acceptable symbols. The
quantity* unit ones shown are SI recommended and
are used in this book.
length l metre m # notice that the base unit of mass is the
mass m kilogram# kg kilogram, not the gram. The kilogram is
time s second s the only Sl base unit to include a prefix
in the name.
current I ampere A
temperature T kelvin## K ## Although the base Sl unit of temperature
amount of n mole mol is the kelvin, the degree Celsius
substance (symbol °C) is an acceptable alternative.
Temperatures in degrees Celsius are
angle θ radian### rad converted to kelvins by adding 273.15.
The size of the degree Celsius is equal
to the size of the kelvin.
### Although the base Sl unit of angle is the
radian, the degree (symbol o ) is an
acceptable alternative. One radian is
180/2π degrees (approximately 57o).
APPENDICES 359

TABLE 2: SOME QUANTITIES MEASURED IN Sl DERIVED UNITS

name symbol unit

capacitance C farad F (= C.V-1)


charge q coulomb C (= A.s)
conductivity σ S.m-1 (= Ω-1.m-1)
current density i A.m-2
density (mass density) ρ kg.m-3
dielectric constant# ε -
electric field strength E V.m-1 (= N.C-1)
energy E joule J (= N.m)
force F newton N (= kg.m.s-2)
frequency f hertz Hz (= s-1)
heat energy Q joule J (= N.m)
intensity (wave) I W.m-2 (= J m-2s -1)
impedance (electrical) Z ohm Ω
impedance (acoustic) Z kg m-2 s-1
magnetic field strength B A.m-1
# This quantity is more properly termed
penetration depth δ m the relative permittivity. The term
permeability## µ - dielectric constant is used in this text
potential difference V volt V (= W.A-1) to conform with common usage in the
power P watt W (= J.s-1) literature.
resistance R ohm Ω
resistivity ρ Ω.m ## This quantity is more properly termed
the relative permeability to distinguish
specific heat capacity c J .kg-1.K-1 it from the absolute permeability.
velocity v m.s-1 Since absolute permeability is not
volume rate of heating Pv W.m-3 ( = J m-3.s-1) used in this text the term permeability
wavelength λ m is used for simplicity.